Over There
Over There Rulebook
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
- Rule 1 — Introduction
- Rule 2 — Game Components
- Rule 3 — Basic Game Concepts
- Rule 4 — Sequence of Play
- Rule 5 — Zones of Control & Ownership
- Rule 6 — Movement
- Rule 7 — Transportation Lines
- Rule 8 — Stacking
- Rule 9 — Combat
- A. Procedure.
- B. General Restrictions.
- C. Combat Results.
- D. Losses.
- E. Cadres and Remnants.
- F. Movement After Combat.
- G. Zero-Strength Units and Marginal Units.
- H. Terrain, Fortification, and Weather Effects.
- I. Retreat Before Combat.
- J. Contested Hexes.
- K. Same-Hex Combat.
- L. Incremental Odds (Optional Rule).
- Rule 10 — Special Combat Effects
- Rule 11 — Supply
- Rule 12 — Artillery
- Rule 13 — Engineers
- Rule 14 — Special Ground Units
- Rule 15 — Special Ground Rules
- Rule 16 — Ground Replacement System
- Rule B17 — Basic Air Rules
- Rule A17 — Advanced Air Rules Introduction
- Rule 18 — Airbases
- Rule 19 — Movement of Air Units
- Rule 20 — Air Missions
- Rule 21 — Air Combat
- Rule 22 — Antiaircraft
- Rule 23 — Special Air Rules
- Rule 24 — Airborne Landings
- Rule 25 — Air Replacement System
- Rule 26 — Basic Naval Rules
- Rule 27 — Advanced Naval Rules Introduction
- Rule 28 — Movement of Naval Units
- Rule 29 — Naval Combat
- Rule 30 — Ports and Beaches
- Rule 31 — Naval Transport
- Rule 32 — Amphibious Landings
- Rule 33 — Naval/Land Interaction
- Rule 34 — Special Naval Rules
- Rule 35 — Naval Replacement System
Rule 1 — Introduction
These are the standard rules used in all games of The Great War series. For convenience, the rules are separated into four booklets: one each covering the ground rules, air rules, naval rules, and special rules common to all games in the series. (Each game also has a game-specific rules booklet covering that game's scope, components, set up instructions, special game rules, scenario information, and victory conditions.) Each rule is either a basic, advanced, or optional rule. Advanced and optional rules are annotated as such; all other rules are basic rules. The basic rules should be used in every game. Advanced rules are those that can be disregarded by players gaining experience with the game sys-tem, but which should be used by experienced players. In particular, the detailed advanced air, naval, and production rules (Rules A17-25, 27-35, and 38) should be set aside in favor of the basic air, naval, and production mechanics (Rules B17, 26, and 16) until the core ground rules are mastered. Optional rules cover game mechanics that are historically valid, but which affect very few units, or occur infrequently; they should be ignored by new players, but veteran players can use them by mutual agreement. Designers' Notes are sprinkled throughout the rules. These explain the historical rationale for various game mechanics that may seem strange to players who are more familiar with WW II than WW I.
Rule 2 — Game Components
Each game-specific rules booklet in The Great War series lists the components for that game.
Rule 3 — Basic Game Concepts
A. Units.
The term units, when used by itself hereafter in the rules and when used in the orders of battle, refers to ground units only and does not include air or naval units. The term forces refers to ground, air, and naval units collectively. Note that the term "units" does not include markers (for which see Rule 3D). Units are rated based on their size, type, and capabilities. Typically, a unit has a unit size, a unit type, a combat strength (or separate attack and defense strengths), a movement rating, and a unit identification. The Unit Identification Chart (UIC) displays the layout of these symbols and ratings, as well as all specialized symbols and ratings used in the game. Some unit symbols have multiple names associated with them on the UIC. When the rules refer to a particular unit type this includes all other unit types which share the same unit symbol. For example, when the rules refer to light rifle units, this includes chasseur a'pied, bersaglieri, and jager units, as these unit types share the same unit symbol. Some overall definitions apply to units.
- Size. Units are divided into three general categories, based on their size:
-
Higher Headquarters. Any unit with the army or corps symbol.
-
Divisional Unit. Any unit with the division or divisional grouping symbol.
-
Non-divisional Unit. Any unit smaller than a divisional unit: brigades, brigade groupings, regiments, regimental groupings, battalions, battalion groupings, cadres, and remnants.
- Class. Units are divided into three general classes, based on their types:
-
Non-Motorized. All unit types listed as non-motorized on the UIC. For example, a rifle unit is non-motorized.
-
Artillery. All unit types listed as artillery on the UIC. For example, a siege mortar unit is artillery. Note that for game purposes aerial bombardment, antiaircraft, and antitank units are not artillery.
-
Combat/Motorized (C/M). All unit types listed as c/m on the UIC. For example a tank unit is c/m. Note that some unit types are listed as both artillery and c/m on the UIC. For example, a motorized field artillery unit is both an artillery unit and a c/m unit.
- Regimental Equivalents. A regimental equivalent (RE) measures the size of the unit or any other item that needs its size specified. RE sizes are as follows:
-
1/4 RE: Each general supply point (GSP).
-
1/2 RE: Each battalion/battalion grouping, remnant, equipment or manpower point (Equ Pt or Man Pt).
-
1 RE: Each Corps HQs, Art XX HQs, regiment/ regimental grouping, non-American cadre, capital marker, or mine point.
-
2 REs: Each brigade/brigade grouping or American cadre.
-
3 REs: Each Army HQs, Ottoman divisional unit, or resource point (Res Pt).
-
Variable (Basic Rule): When using the basic rule, nonAmerican/Ottoman divisional units have an RE size based on their support status: 3 REs: Each such unit with the unsupported indicator. 4 REs: Each such unit with the self-supported indicator. 5 REs: Each such unit that is fully supported (that is, the counter has neither the unsupported indicator nor the self-supported indicator). Variable (Advanced Rule): When using this advanced rule, the RE size of a non-American/ Ottoman division is not based on its support status; instead its RE size is determined by its nationality, unit type, and printed strength as listed in the appropriate section of Rule 41. For example, a German rifle or mountain rifle divisional unit with a printed attack strength of 14 or more is 5 REs in size (as listed in Rule 41T3).
-
6 REs: Each American divisional unit. C/m units, and artillery units with heavy equipment (per Rule 3A4), count double their RE size for transport purposes: rail or river movement (Rules 7A and 7C), cartage by transport units (Rule 14O), and naval transport (Basic Rule 26B or Advanced Rule 31). For example, a field artillery regiment (1 RE) that moves by rail, river, or sea counts as 2 REs for transport purposes. Designers' Note: World War I brigades averaged 6-8 battalions vice the World War II norm of 3-4. Similarly, World War I divisions had 12-16 battalions vice the World War II norm of 9. Some countries (e.g. Germany) also started World War I with 2 regiments (vice the normal 1) of artillery in most of their divisions. The advanced rule shows how various countries adapted during the war to losses: as it became impossible to sustain the larger divisions they moved to the World War II standard of 9 battalions. Note that the Ottoman Empire converted to the 9 battalion standard following the 1912-13 Balkan wars in order to keep the same number of divisions on active service after the loss of most of its European territory stripped it of nearly a quarter of its traditional recruiting base. A few countries (notably Austria-Hungary) converted to 9 battalions later in the war, but simultaneously significantly increased the artillery in their divisions (the Austrians went from one to three regiments), thus their RE size does not change. American divisions averaged 25,000 men, effectively double the strength of most other countries' end-war divisions. Cavalry units on the other hand were smaller in World War I than in World War II; with, for example, a World War I regiment being close in size to a World War II battalion.
-
Heavy Equipment (HE). Some rules make a distinction as to whether or not a unit has HE. The UIC lists the unit types that have HE. For example, a heavy artillery unit has heavy equipment, but a field artillery unit does not. In addition, all fully-supported divisional units have HE. (A fully supported divisional unit is any divisional unit that does not have an unsupported or self-supported indicator.)
-
Disruption. Various rules make use of the concept of disrupted units. Units become disrupted (or badly disrupt-ed) as described in the appropriate rules (e.g. reserve commitment movement (Rule 6C), contested hexes (Rule 9J), bombardment (Rule 12C), and airborne landings (Advanced Rule 24)). In general (unless otherwise specified in the rules), a unit that becomes disrupted (or badly disrupted) remains so until the start of its next friendly initial phase. For example, an Entente unit disrupted during the Entente player-turn would remain disrupted throughout the remainder of the Entente player-turn and throughout the entire following Central Powers player-turn. (Place a disruption hit/double disruption hit marker on a unit when it is disrupted/badly disrupted to show the disruption. Remove disruption hits from eligible friendly units at the start of each friendly initial phase.) Disruption effects are:
-
Disrupted. While disrupted, a unit has its attack strength, defense strength, RE size for purposes of special combat effects capabilities (Rule 10), AA strength (if any, see Basic Rule B17C or Advanced Rule 22), naval gunnery strength (if any, see Advanced Rule 33B), and movement rating halved. The unit loses its ZOC (Rule 5), and cannot provide support (Rule 12A) to other units. A disrupted Army HQs is further affected as described in Rule 14M2.
-
Badly Disrupted. While badly disrupted, a unit is affected as a disrupted unit (per above), except that its attack strength and naval gunnery strength is reduced to zero, its defense strength is quartered, it cannot be used in any attempts to use special combat effects capabilities, and it is not counted for purposes of GS, DAS, or NGS support limits (Advanced Rules 20G2b, 20G2c, and 33A).
B. Nations/Sides.
The game is organized for play by two players (or by two teams of players), each controlling the forces of one of the coalitions in the war. Each side consists of one or more nations.
-
Central Powers. The Central Powers side controls all German and Austro-Hungarian forces and all forces of neutrals which join the Central Powers.
-
Entente. The Entente side controls all British, French, Russian, and Serbian forces and all forces of neutrals which join the Entente.
-
Neutrals. Nations which have not joined the Central Powers or the Entente are neutral and are controlled by neither player. Note: The nations which historically have joined one side or the other (and those nations still remaining neutral) at the start of a scenario are listed in the deployment instructions for that scenario (Rule 42B). If a neutral nation is attacked by one side, it automatically joins the other side. Neutral nations may also join one side or the other as described later in the States of War and Nations rules (Rules 39 and 41).
-
Powers. Britain, France, and Germany are "Great Powers". Britain, France, Germany, the United States, Russia, AustriaHungary, Italy, the Ottoman Empire, and Japan are "Major Powers". All other nations are "Minor Powers". Exception: When the home district of a great power or major power is conquered (per Rule 41), that nation immediately becomes a minor power.
-
Nationalities/Contingents. Each nation has forces from one or more contingents under its command; these contingents constitute a single nationality for purposes of the rules. The contingents under each nation's command are listed in that nation's section of Rule 41. For example, the Austro-Hungarian nationality includes the Austro-Hungarian Common Army/Navy, Austrian, Hungarian, and Foreign Volunteer contingents. Note that the counters of each contingent have their own particular color code as listed on the Unit Colors Summary/Identification Chart (on the last page of each GameSpecific Rules Booklet).
C. Game Mechanics.
-
Fractions. Unless stated otherwise, always retain fractions. For example, half of 7 is 3 1/2.
-
Cumulative Effects. Unless stated otherwise, all effects to units' strengths and all modifications to die rolls are cumulative. For example, a unit halved in strength twice is quartered in strength.
-
Tables and Die Rolls. Players use the various tables on the charts to resolve a variety of activities. For example, players resolve ground combat through use of the Ground Combat Results Tables. In general (unless otherwise specified in a rule), a player uses a table as follows:
-
Determine all appropriate conditions for the use of a table, as specified in the rules or on the table. For example, various types of terrain can modify the attack strengths of units, and players must take these into account when resolving ground combat.
-
Roll one or two dice as appropriate. All tables requiring the roll of two dice are identified as such in the rules. All other tables require the roll of only one die. For example, the Ground Combat Results Tables require the roll of one die while the Antiaircraft Fire Table requires the roll of two dice.
-
Modify the roll by all appropriate modifiers as given in the rules or on the table. For example, various types of terrain can modify the ground combat resolution die roll. Note that the Ground Success Table has many different modifiers for the various activities that use this table. On any table, die rolls modified above the highest number or below the lowest number are treated as the highest or lowest number, respectively. For example, a modified roll of 7 on the Aerial Bombing Table is treated as a 6.
-
Use the modified die roll to find the result on the table. Implement the result as specified in the rules.
- Accumulation. Each player receives various abilities on a turn-by-turn basis. A player may not accumulate these abilities from turn to turn unless specifically allowed by the rules. For example, a player may move 15 REs of units by rail per turn (per Rule 7A) on a specific rail net. The player may not accumulate this ability from turn to turn. If the player does not move any units by rail in a turn, he cannot move 30 REs in the following turn.
D. Markers.
Some counters in the game are markers. (The various marker types are illustrated on the Unit Identification Chart.) For example, a resource point counter is a marker. Markers are not units, of any type. Markers are used to assist in the play of the game. Players may manufacture additional markers as needed. Note: Not all markers referred to in the rules may be present in an individual game (unique markers for every game function which requires a marker will be provided when the games of The Great War series are taken as a whole, but some of these markers may not make it into an individual game). When the rules call for a marker's use, but no marker of that type is in the game, use any mutually agreed upon marker.
E. Geography.
The Great War series uses maps with two different scales: 16miles-to-the-hex and 64-miles-to-the-hex. (Note: For convenience, the rules refer to these as the "European Maps" and "Non-European Maps", respectively.) Maps covering the main areas of conflict in Europe and the Middle East are at 16-miles to the hex and are identified by number (for example, The Great War Map 2). Maps covering secondary areas of conflict in Africa, the Americas, and Asia are at 64-miles to the hex and are identified by letter (for example, The Great War Map WS). Additionally, if Optional Rule 44 is used, various maps from GR/D's Europa game series may be used to expand the playing area. (Note that all Europa maps are 16-miles to the hex.) In general (unless otherwise specified in the rules), the same rules apply to both map scales. The hexes on the maps are numbered. When specific hexes are referred to in the rules, charts, and orders of battle they are identified by map and hex number (in the format "map # (or letter): hex #"); further, if the cited hex also contains a city, fortress, resource center, oasis, or island name, that name is listed as an aid in locating the hex. Examples: A) St. Niklaas (GW2:0619) refers to hex number 0619 (which contains the town of St. Niklaas) on The Great War Map #2. B) E26:3012 refers to hex number 3012 on Europa Map #26. C) WS:0773 refers to hex number 0773 on The Great War Map WS. The Great War maps show the international borders as they existed at the start of World War I (28 July 1914). The term "game map" (or just "map") refers to the maps in play according to the set-up instructions for the scenario being played (Rule 42B).
-
Terrain. The map represents the topography of the playing area; it is referred to as terrain in the game. Each hex has a type of terrain which affects the movement and combat of all forces in the game. The various terrain types are illustrated on The Great War Master Terrain Key Chart; and their effects on movement and combat are listed on the Terrain Effects Chart (TEC).
-
Cities. The term cities includes all cities (point cities, partial hex cities, and full hex cities), plus all fortresses and resource centers.
-
A multi-hex city is any combination of adjacent partial and full city hexes. For example, Paris (circa GW2:1229) is a multi-hex city consisting of one full and three partial city hexes. Note that, for game purposes, a multi-hex city may consist of a cluster of several adjacent cities. For example, the Ruhr area of Germany (circa GW2:1113) is a single multi-hex city in the game, even though it is actually made up of several separate cities.
-
A major city is any partial, full, or multi-hex city.
-
A major city hex is any hex of a major city.
-
Districts. The land area of the map is divided into districts. Countries with a small on-map area, such as Belgium, consist of a single district: the country itself. Larger countries consist of several districts as listed in the appropriate section of Rule 41 (Nations). The concept of districts is used in various rules (most importantly, for the placement of reinforcements (Rule 16) and activation of garrisons (Rule 37F)).
-
Islands. The map depicts several islands, which belong to various nations. Unless indicated otherwise, any island that is connected by narrow straits to a nation, or to an island owned by a nation, belongs to that nation. Further, an island connected in this manner is part of the internal district to which it is connected (unless the presence of a border indicates otherwise). For example, the island of Veglia (GW2:5006 and 5106) is part of Austria-Hungary and is in the Austria district. All other islands either have the names of their owning nations next to their names (or the presence of an international border clearly delineates the nation to which they belong) and are part of the district to which they are closest.
-
Adjacent. Some rules depend upon whether or not units are adjacent to an item (like a unit). In these cases, the unit is adjacent if the hexside between the two hexes is not prohibited terrain.
-
Weather Zones. The map is divided into several weather zones (Rule 36A1 covers weather zones in detail). Weather zone A is also called the Arctic. Weather zones F and G collectively are also called the Desert. (The Arctic and the Desert are covered in Rules 37C and 37D.)
F. Theaters and Commands.
The territory on the maps and the orders of battle (OBs) are divided into theaters and commands. The theaters and their command subdivisions are:
-
West Theater: British Isles/North Sea, France/West Germany, Italy/West Austria, and Iberian Peninsula commands.
-
East Theater: East Germany/West Russia, East Austria/South Russia, Romania, Scandinavia/North Russia, and Central Russia commands.
-
South Theater: Balkans, West Turkey/Aegean, Middle East, Caucasus, Near East, and Arabia commands.
-
Africa Theater: NW Africa, West Africa, Central Africa, South Africa, and East Africa commands.
-
Asia Theater: Persia/Turkestan/India, Siberia, Japan, China, and Southeast Asia commands.
-
North America Theater: Canada, USA, Central America, and Caribbean commands.
-
South America Theater: Brazil, Southern South America, Western South America, and Northern South America commands.
-
Pacific Theater: NW Pacific, NE Pacific, Australia, and South Pacific commands. Various rules apply to certain theaters only. For example, as shown on the Intrinsic AA Summary (on the Air Combat Charts and Tables Chart), there is more intrinsic AA in the West theater than in other theaters. Throughout the rules and the OBs a command is referred to using the convention "theater name (command name)". For example, when the OB cites "WEST (FRANCE/WEST GERMANY)" it refers to the France/West Germany command of the West theater. The territory which comprises each command (on-map land and sea hexes and off-map holding boxes) is listed in the appropriate game-specific rules booklet. The scenarios in each game-specific rules booklet (under Rule 42B) list which commands the players control. A player treats all commands under his control as a unified command. He uses his forces there as he wishes, without regard to their historical command assignments. The OBs divided forces by command for historical interest and to facilitate scenario play. When the OBs denote that forces transfer between commands under the player's control, the player simply ignores these transfers. A player must, however, transfer forces to or from commands he does not control, as specified by the OBs. For example, if the Central Powers player controls only the West (France/West Germany) command and the OB requires forces to transfer from that command to the East (East Germany/West Russia) command, the Central Powers player must transfer those forces there. A player's forces may not voluntarily enter or attack any hex outside the commands that player controls. A unit forced to enter such a hex (such as due to retreat after combat) is eliminated from play instead.
G. Isolation.
A unit or hex is isolated if the owning player cannot trace an overland supply line (Rule 11B) of any length from the item to any of his regular sources of general supply (Rule 11C2a). Players determine the isolation status of all units and relevant hexes three times per player turn, at the start of each initial phase, combat phase, and reaction combat phase. Once judged isolated, an item remains isolated until isolation status is checked again.
Rule 4 — Sequence of Play
The game is played in a series of game turns, each representing one half of a month (approximately two weeks). Each game turn consists of an Entente turn, followed by a Central Powers turn.
A. Player Turn Sequence.
Each player turn consists of the following phases.
-
Initial Phase. Both players determine the general supply and isolation status of their units and hexes. The phasing player flips over his inactive Army HQs so their active sides are face up, receives reinforcements, and performs replacement, repair, and other activities. The non-phasing player may rebuild units. Both players may fly air missions.
-
Movement Phase. The phasing player moves his naval units, and the other player may move naval units in reaction. The phasing player moves his ground units. Both players may fly air missions.
-
Combat Phase. Both players determine the isolation status of their units and hexes. Both players may fly air missions and allocate naval gunfire support. The attacker (phasing player) expends combat supply and resolves bombardments made by his forces. The defender (non-phasing player) expends combat supply, resolves counter-bombardments made by his forces, and attempts to commit reserves. The attacker resolves attacks made by his units.
-
Reaction Movement Phase. The reacting (non-phasing) player moves his naval units, and the other player may move naval units in reaction. The reacting player picks one of his Army HQs and checks to see if it remains active. If it fails this check he flips over the Army HQs so its inactive side is face up. If the Army HQs remains active, the reacting player moves his ground units (using reaction movement) which are within the zone of influence (ZOI) of that HQs. The reacting player repeats this process until he has checked all of his Army HQs and moved all eligible units. (Army HQs and ZOIs are covered in Rule 14M.) Both players may fly air missions.
-
Reaction Combat Phase. This is the same as the combat phase except that: 1) the attacker and defender are reversed (the reacting (non-phasing) player is now the attacker and the phasing player is now the defender), 2) bombardments (and counter-bombardments) can not be made, and 3) only units within the ZOI of an active friendly Army HQs may attack.
-
Exploitation Phase. The phasing player moves his naval units, and the other player may move naval units in reaction. The phasing player moves his c/m, water-only, cavalry, light, mountain, and infantry units using exploitation movement. Both players may fly air missions. Note: The introductions to the Advanced Air and Naval Rules (Rules A17 and 27), cover the sequencing of air and naval activities in detail. The Master Sequence of Play Summary Chart shows the sequence of play in detail for all activities and references the appropriate rules section for each activity.
B. Phasing.
During the Entente player turn, the Entente player is the phasing player and the Central Powers player is the non-phasing player. During the Central Powers' player turn, these roles are reversed.
C. Restrictions.
Unless noted otherwise, activities may not be conducted outside this sequence. The activities mentioned above are explained in the following rules.
Rule 5 — Zones of Control & Ownership
A. Zones of Control (ZOCs).
The zone of control (ZOC) of a unit represents the control a unit exerts over nearby terrain. ZOCs affect many activities in the game, as covered in the appropriate rules. For example, ZOCs affect the movement and retreat of enemy units (Rules 6A and 9F2). Most units exert a ZOC in the hex they occupy. Some units also exert a ZOC through the six hexsides of the hex the unit occupies into the six surrounding, adjacent hexes. A unit prohibited from entering a specific terrain type or crossing a specific type of hexside does not exert a ZOC into that hex or through that hexside. For example, a unit prohibited from crossing a high mountain hexside does not exert a ZOC through any high mountain hexside. (Rule 6 covers prohibited terrain in detail.) The following units never have a ZOC, not even in the hex they occupy:
-
Army HQs, Corps HQs, and Art XX HQs. All other units have a ZOC in the hex they occupy. A nonartillery unit which has a ZOC in the hex it occupies and has a printed combat strength greater than 0, also has a ZOC in adjacent hexes if it is:
-
A divisional unit (excepting those divisional units with the unsupported indicator).
-
A divisional unit with the unsupported indicator; or a brigade, brigade grouping, regiment, regimental grouping, or cadre (regardless of support status); but only in hexes in weather zones A, F, and G (that is, in the Arctic or Desert—Rules 37C and 37D). For example, a rifle brigade in a hex on the boundary between weather zones A and B has a ZOC in adjacent hexes in weather zone A (as weather zone A is in the Arctic), but does not have a ZOC in adjacent hexes in weather zone B (as weather zone B is in neither the Arctic nor the Desert). Note that battalions, battalion groupings, remnants, units with a printed combat strength of 0 (regardless of size), and artillery units (regardless of strength or size) never have ZOCs outside the hex they occupy. Under certain conditions, units with a ZOC may have reduced ZOCs. For example, a unit with a ZOC which is unsupported (Rule 12A), or whose nation is shaken (Rule 40B), has a reduced ZOC. Reduced ZOCs are the same as standard ZOCs, except for their effects on the movement of enemy units (Rule 6A). A unit with a ZOC may temporarily lose its ZOC, depending upon certain activities. For example, a unit with a ZOC which is disrupted (Rule 3A5); which uses accelerated movement (Rule 6B), rail or river movement (Rules 7A and 7C), air transport (Advanced Rule 20H), or naval transport (Basic Rule 26B or Advanced Rule 31); or whose nation is in collapse (Rule 40C); loses its ZOC. When a unit under-takes such an activity, it looses its ZOC as specified in the appropriate rule. A unit which loses its ZOC does not have a ZOC for any game purpose until it regains its ZOC.
B. Ownership.
Players own land hexes at the start of the game and can gain and lose ownership of land hexes during play. A player can gain ownership of a hex in either of two ways:
-
If at least one his units with a ZOC both occupies and exerts a ZOC in the hex, regardless of the presence of enemy ZOCs exerted into the hex from adjacent hexes.
-
If at least one of his units exerts an uncontested ZOC into the hex. A unit with a ZOC exerts an uncontested ZOC in a hex if no unit of the opposing side exerts a ZOC in the hex. Special:
-
To gain ownership of a hex containing an enemy-owned city (Rule 3E2), a friendly unit with a ZOC must occupy the hex. In general, unless otherwise specified in a rule, when a player gains ownership of a hex, he immediately owns the hex for all game purposes. For example, if an Entente unit entered an enemy-owned hex containing a port and gained ownership of that hex, the port there is now Entente-owned, and Entente forces may use it from that point on.
Rule 6 — Movement
All phasing units may move during the movement and exploitation phases. Certain non-phasing units may attempt to move during the reserve commitment portion of the combat sequence of the combat phase or reaction combat phase. Nonphasing (reacting) units within the zone of influence of an activated Army HQs may move in the reaction movement phase. The owning player may move any or all of his units in the appropriate phases, but he is never required to move any unit. A unit's movement rating is the number of movement points (MPs) the unit may normally spend in each phase. A unit may move up to the limit of its movement rating, as modified by the type of movement (as covered later subsections of this rule), disruption (Rule 3A5), terrain (per the Terrain Effects Chart (TEC)), ZOCs (Rule 6A), and general supply status (Rule 11F). A unit spends MPs as it moves from hex to hex. For each hex entered, the unit spends a varying amount of MPs, depending upon the current weather and the type of terrain in the hex being entered. The TEC lists the movement effects of hexes during each type of weather: c/m and artillery units use one set of costs; other units use a second set of costs; and exceptions are shown in a third set of costs. Example: Units entering a mountain hex during clear weather would spend: 6 MPs for a c/m or artillery unit, 2 MPs for a mountain unit, and 3 MPs for all other units. A unit must spend MPs to cross hexsides that have MP costs listed on the TEC. The MP cost to cross a hexside is in addition to the cost to enter the hex, as shown by the plus sign (+) in front of the cost. For example, it costs a unit 2 MPs to cross a unfrozen river or canal hexside, in addition to the cost of the hex it is entering. A unit may not enter a prohibited hex or cross a prohibited hexside. Prohibited terrain—any terrain that is prohibited for a unit to enter—is listed as such on the TEC. For example, no unit may enter a glacier hex. In general, a unit may not enter an enemy-occupied/ owned hex. This is a hex that is both owned by the enemy and is also occupied by an enemy unit. Exceptions: Units may enter enemyoccupied/owned hexes if they overrun the enemy units there (Rule 6F), or if the enemy units in the hex are under siege (Advanced Rule 15G), or if they are making an airborne or amphibious landing in the hex (Advanced Rules 24 and 32). Note that a unit can enter a hex that is enemy-owned, but not enemy-occupied. Also note that a unit can enter an enemyoccupied hex if it is not enemy-owned. (This situation in which the enemy occupies but does not own a hex can occasionally occur, such as a unit becoming disrupted when it makes an airborne or amphibious landing.) A unit may always move a single hex (except into or across prohibited terrain) in a movement, reaction movement, or exploitation phase in which it may move. (Note that this singlehex movement ability does not apply to reserve commitment movement during the combat or reaction combat phase.) To do so, the unit spends all of its MPs and enters an adjacent hex, even if the cost to do so exceeds the number of MPs the unit has available that phase. It may move through enemy ZOCs, or into enemy-harassed hexes (Advanced Rule 20G2d), when using this one-hex movement ability. A unit may not spend MPs for any other purpose when using this ability. A unit with a movement rating of 0 cannot move from the hex it occupies. Weather affects movement, per Rule 36 and the TEC. Units may also move by special forms of movement such as rail or river movement (Rule 7), air transport (Advanced Rule 20H), and naval transport (Basic Rule 26B or Advanced Rule 31), as covered in the separate rules.
A. Effect of ZOCs on Movement.
When a unit exits a hex that is in an enemy ZOC, it must spend a number of MPs to leave the hex, in addition to the terrain costs of movement. The ZOC costs are given on the ZOC Movement Costs Table (on the Ground Combat Charts and Tables Chart).
B. Accelerated Movement.
During the movement phase (only), a unit may use accelerated (accel) movement. Accel movement allows a unit to move faster than regular movement, but imposes restrictions on the unit.
- Good Road Areas. In areas with good roads (i.e. everywhere in Germany, Austria-Hungary, Russian Poland, Romania, Denmark, The Netherlands, Belgium, Luxembourg, France, Switzerland, Italy, Great Britain, Ireland, and the USA), a unit may use accel movement in the following types of terrain:
-
Roads: When moving on a road, any type of terrain. (Road movement is covered in Rule 7B.)
-
Hexes: When not moving on a road, any type of terrain except mountain, forest, unfrozen swamp, wooded swamp, ravines, or prohibited.
-
Hexsides: When not moving on a road, any type of terrain except unfrozen/unfordable major river, unfrozen great river, mountain, high mountain/high mountain pass (regardless of weather condition), unfrozen narrow straits, or prohibited.
- Poor Road Areas. Areas with poor roads (i.e. everywhere that does not have good roads), a unit may use accel movement in the following types of terrain:
-
Roads: When moving on a road, any type of terrain.
-
Hexes: When not moving on a road, only in clear terrain, intermittent lake/salt lake, canal intensive, bocage, and stony desert.
-
Hexsides: When not moving on a road, only wadi, minor canal/river/canal/seasonal river (frozen or not), frozen major river/great river/all lake/narrow straits, or escarpment. Exception: Cavalry, light, mountain, and irregular units (Rules 14D, 14E, 14F, and 14L) may use accel movement in poor road areas in the same types of terrain they may use accel movement in good road areas. Designers' Note: WWI units were not as road-dependent as their WWII counterparts. In the case of cavalry, light, mountain, and irregular units numerous examples can be found of long force marches through bad terrain followed an attack on enemy forces that can only be recreated in the game by allowing them use of accel movement.
- Effect and Restrictions. A unit using accel movement has its printed movement rating doubled. For example, a unit with a printed movement rating of 5 would have its movement rating doubled to 10 when using accel movement. A unit using accel movement is restricted:
-
It may spend MPs only for accel movement, operational rail movement (Rule 7A2), river movement (Rule 7C), or naval transport (Basic Rule 26B or Advanced Rule 31).
-
All MP costs for operational rail movement, river movement, and naval transport are doubled.
-
If it has a ZOC, it loses its ZOC for the entire movement phase.
- Fatigue. If a unit using accel movement starts, or ends, its movement adjacent (Rule 3E5) to an enemy unit with a ZOC; or moves adjacent to an enemy unit with a ZOC at any point during its movement; or enters an enemy-owned hex at any point during its movement; it will receive fatigue hits. (ZOCs are covered in Rule 5.) At the end of the unit's accel movement, place one fatigue hit on the unit for every 2 MPs (or fraction thereof) over its printed movement rating that it moved. Exception: If the unit is artillery, cavalry, or an Army HQs (per Rules12B, 14D, and 14M), place one fatigue hit on the unit for every 1 MP over its printed movement rating that it moved. Fatigue hits affect combat and overruns as described below:
-
Attacking: When an attacking force includes units with fatigue hits, or traces combat supply through an Army HQs (Rule 11D) with fatigue hits, shift the combat odds ratio down one level (for example, from 5:1 to 4:1) for every two fatigue hits (or fraction thereof) on the unit or Army HQs with the most fatigue hits.
-
Defending: When a defending force includes units with fatigue hits, or traces combat supply through an Army HQs (Rule 11D) with fatigue hits, shift the combat odds ratio up one level (for example, from 3:2 to 2:1) for every two fatigue hits (or fraction thereof) on the unit or Army HQs with the most fatigue hits.
-
Overrunning: When a force containing units with fatigue hits executes an overrun (Rule 6F), shift the overrun odds ratio down one level for each fatigue hit on the unit with the most fatigue hits.
-
Being Overrun: When a force containing units with fatigue hits is overrun (Rule 6F), shift the overrun odds ratio up one level for each fatigue hit on the unit with the most fatigue hits. Remove fatigue hits by spending MPs to rest. For every 1 MP a unit spends resting (doing nothing) during a movement, reaction, or exploitation phase, remove 1 fatigue hit from the unit. Exception: If the unit is artillery, cavalry, or an Army HQs (per Rules12B, 14D, and 14M), for every 2 MPs a unit spends resting, remove 1 fatigue hit from the unit. Note that a unit which spends MPs in a phase to rest may not use accel movement during that phase. Example #1: A 1-2-5 rifle brigade in the rear (not adjacent to an enemy unit with a ZOC) uses accel movement to move to the front. It spends a total of 8 MPs and ends its movement adjacent to an enemy unit with a ZOC. (Note that since its printed movement rating of 5 is doubled to 10 for accel movement, it could have spent up to 2 MPs more.) Since it moved adjacent to an enemy unit with a ZOC and exceeded its printed movement rating of 5 by 3 MPs, it receives 2 fatigue hits. (Note that if the unit had been artillery, cavalry, or an army headquarters it would have received 3 fatigue hits. Further note that if the unit had not moved adjacent to an enemy unit with a ZOC, or entered an enemy-owned hex, it would not have received any fatigue hits at all.) Example #2: A player declares an attack in which he has three attacking units. One of these units has 1 fatigue hit and two have no fatigue hits. The defender has two defending units, one with 1 fatigue hit and one 3 fatigue hits. The combat odds ratio is determined to be 8:1 (per Rule 9A). This is then modified upward 2 levels because the defending force includes a unit with 3 fatigue hits, and modified downward 1 level because the attacking force includes a unit with 1 fatigue hit. The net effect of fatigue is therefore to modify the combat odds ratio upward 1 level to 9:1. Example #3: This is the same situation as example #2 except that the attacker is now tracing combat supply to an Army HQs with 3 fatigue hits. The 8:1 attack would still be modified upward 2 levels as the defender's situation has not changed; but it would now be modified downward 2 levels due to the 3 fatigue hits on the attacker's Army HQs. Attacker and defender fatigue is thus cancel each other out, and the combat odds ratio remains 8:1.
C. Reserve Commitment Movement.
During the combat and reaction combat phases, the defending player may attempt to commit (move) reserves to reinforce hexes under attack. This reserve commitment movement may only be attempted if the combat is resolved on the Positional Ground CRT. Note that reserve commitment movement may not be used to reinforce a hex if the combat is resolved on the Mobile Ground CRT. Use the following procedure to resolve reserve commitment attempts:
-
After the attacker announces the attack, determines the CRT which will be used, and totals his attack strength, the defender announces if he will attempt to commit reserves to the combat. The defender may attempt to commit units from any one stack of his units which are within 2 hexes of the hex under attack, so long as these units are not themselves in an enemy ZOC.
-
For each unit in the designated stack, the defender rolls a die and consults the Ground Success Table (on the Ground Combat Charts and Tables Chart). Note that a +2 die roll modifier applies to this die roll if the unit is adjacent to the attacked hex. If the attempt succeeds, the unit may move as explained below; if the attempt fails, the unit may not move. Units using reserve commitment movement have their movement ratings modified (round fractions down):
-
C/M and Water-Only Units: Normal.
-
Cavalry Units: Half normal.
-
Light, Mountain, Infantry, Irregular: One third normal.
-
All Other Units: One fifth normal. (C/m, water-only, cavalry, light, mountain, infantry, and irregular units are defined in Rules 3A2, 14B2, 14D, 14E, 14F, 14H, and 14L.) Note that a unit whose modified re-serve movement rating rounds down to zero cannot move. A unit using reserve commitment movement may spend MPs only for regular movement and only to move to the attacked hex it was designated to reinforce. If it does not have sufficient MPs to enter the attacked hex, it may not move. Note that it cannot use accelerated movement (Rule 6B), overrun (Rule 6F), rail/river movement (Rules 7A and 7C), or naval transport (Basic Rule 26B or Advanced Rule 31), or spend MPs for construction, demolition, repair, or railroad engineering (Rules 13A1, 13A2, 13A3, and 13B3). A unit which uses reserve commitment movement is immediately disrupted (per Rule 3A5) upon completion of that movement. All reserve commitment movement associated with one combat must be completed (and the combat resolved) before beginning any reserve commitment movement associated with another combat. Designers' Note: Reserve commitment is allowed for positional combat as fortifications usually slowed the pace of the attack sufficiently that the armies of the day could commit operational reserves in time to make a difference. The more fluid nature of mobile combat, ensured that the only reserves that realistically could affect the combat's outcome were tactical (inhex) ones.
D. Reaction Movement.
Reacting (non-phasing) units within the zone of influence (ZOI) of an active Army HQs may move in the reaction movement phase. (Army HQs and ZOIs are covered in rule 14M.) Note that Army HQs themselves cannot move during reaction movement. All reaction movement associated with one Army HQs must be completed before beginning any reaction movement associated with another Army HQs. Suggestion: As this occasionally may result in some confusion regarding which units have already moved; designate units which have moved in the phase (and thus cannot move again) with any convenient marker if you find this helpful. A unit using reaction movement may spend MPs only for regular movement (including for overruns per Rule 6F below). Note that it cannot use accelerated movement (Rule 6B), rail/river movement (Rules 7A and 7C), or naval transport (Basic Rule 26B or Advanced Rule 31), or spend MPs for construction, demolition, repair, or railroad engineering (Rules 13A1, 13A2, 13A3, and 13B3).
E. Exploitation Movement.
All phasing units may move during the exploitation phase, but have their movement ratings modified for exploitation movement in the same manner as for reserve commitment movement (Rule 6C). A unit using exploitation movement may spend MPs only for regular movement (including for overruns per Rule 6F below) and for naval transport (Basic Rule 26B or Advanced Rule 31). Note that it cannot use accelerated movement (Rule 6B) or rail/river movement (Rules 7A and 7C), or spend MPs for construction, demolition, repair, or railroad engineering (Rules 13A1, 13A2, 13A3, and 13B3).
F. Overruns.
- General. During the movement, reaction movement, and exploitation phases, units eligible to move in a phase may overrun enemy units in that phase. (Note that when Advanced Rule 8C2 (Overstacking) is used, that overstacked units may not overrun enemy units.) The moving player performs an overrun by moving units into a single hex adjacent to the enemy units to be overrun; the overrunning units may not exceed the stacking limit of the hex being overrun. (Stacking limits are covered in Rule 8.) All overrunning units must be able to enter the hex being overrun. The overrunning units must have a total attack strength sufficient to achieve at least 10:1 odds against the enemy units. Compute the overrun odds as follows:
-
Total the modified attack strengths of all units overunning the hex. Disruption (Rule 3A5), terrain (per the Terrain Effects Chart), fortifications (per the Fortifications Effects Chart), general supply status (Rule 11F), and support (Rule 12A) can modify the attack strengths of units. Artillery units and heavy cavalry units can have their attack strengths further modified as described in Rules 12B and 14D1.
-
Total the modified defense strengths of all units in the hex being overrun. (Note: If using Advanced Rule 8C2 (Overstacking), ignore overstacked units when determining the defense strength of the hex.) Disruption, terrain and fortifications, general supply status, and support can modify the defense strengths of units.
-
Calculate the overrun odds ratio. Compare the total attack strength to the total defense strength in the form overrunning units/units being overrun. Round this ratio down to a whole number in favor of the units being overrun. For example, an attack strength of 116 overunning a defense strength of 8 is 116:8, which rounds down to 14:1. Modify the odds ratio up or down by the net effect of any odds ratio shifts required by fatigue (Rule 6B4). Note that the final, modified odds ratio must be 10:1 or greater for the overrun to occur. Example: An overrun is calculated at 14:1. Defender fatigue shifts the odds ratio up one level, while attacker fatigue shifts the ratio down five levels. The net effect is thus to shift the odds ratio down four levels to 10:1, still enough to overrun the hex. Had the odds ratio been shifted to 9:1 or less, the overrun could not occur. Units being overrun lose their ZOCs at the instant of overrun. Each overrunning unit must then spend MPs sufficient to enter the hex being overrun, paying all terrain, ZOC, and overrun MP costs. (Note that ZOC costs are not paid due to units in the hex being overrun, but are paid due to enemy units in the adjacent hexes.) Each unit participating in an overrun must pay overrun MP costs, as given on the Overrun Movement Costs Table (on the Ground Com-bat Charts and Tables Chart). A unit with insufficient MPs to pay the full MP costs for an overrun may not participate in the overrun, even if it has not moved at all in the phase. Overrunning units may use the road movement rate when executing an overrun if all other considerations for road movement are met. (Roads and road movement are covered in Rule 7B.) The units in the hex being overrun are completely eliminated and removed from play (even if they have cadres or remnants), and the overrunning units may advance into the hex. (Note that this includes all units in any overstock in the hex.) This advance is optional, but each overrunning unit must spend the required MPs to enter the hex even if it does not advance. After executing an overrun, the units may continue moving if they have sufficient MPs remaining. A unit with a defense strength of 0 may be overrun at 12:1 odds by any unit with an attack strength greater than zero.
-
Retreat before Overrun. A unit that may attempt to retreat before combat (Rule 9I) may use this ability when enemy units overrun the hex it occupies. When the overrun is announced, these units may immediately attempt to retreat (per Rule 9F2), using the retreat before combat rule, at the owning player's option. The overrun odds are then recalculated (if necessary), and the overrun resolved. If all units in a hex being overrun successfully retreat before combat, then the overrunning units do not pay the overrun MP cost for the overrun attempt.
-
Same-Hex Overruns. Under various conditions (as described in later rules), units from both sides may end up in the same hex. (This can occur as the result of certain reinforcement activities per Rule 16 and the OB (for example, if the Irish Rebellion occurs, Central Powers-controlled Irish Rebel units may appear in Entente-occupied hexes in Ireland); but more usually occurs as a result of a siege (Advanced Rule 15G) or due to units making an airborne or amphibious landing in an enemy-occupied hex (Advanced Rules 24 and 32). In the movement, reaction movement, or exploitation phase, when units from both sides are in the same hex, the units eligible to move in that phase that are in the hex (up to the stacking limit for the hex) may overrun the enemy units there, if the units achieve overrun conditions (per above, ignoring overrun MP costs). As with all other overruns, other friendly units in other hexes may not join in this overrun.
Rule 7 — Transportation Lines
The are three types of transportation lines: railroads, roads, and navigable inland waterways. A unit may use a railroad or road only when moving in hexes directly connected to one another by the railroad or road. The scenario start-up instructions (Rule 42B) may specify that some railroads or roads may not exist beyond a certain point (the roadhead or railhead, as appropriate) at the start of the game. Use roadhead and railhead markers to show this. A railroad or road may be used up to the roadhead/railhead hex (inclusive), but not beyond it.
A. Railroads.
Units may move by rail on rail lines. There are two types of rail lines: high-volume and low-volume. For rail movement, the only difference between the lines is their effect on rail capacity. Note: All adjacent hexes of a multi-hex city (Rule 3E2) are connected by high-volume rail lines. Units of the phasing player may use rail movement only in the movement phase. A unit moving by rail moves at a faster rate, ignoring regular terrain costs. To use rail movement, a unit must be on a rail line. When using rail movement, a unit is under the following restrictions:
-
It may not enter or leave a hex in an enemy ZOC. However, an enemy ZOC (including its MP costs) in a hex is negated for rail movement purposes (only) if a friendly unit with a defense strength greater than zero occupies the hex throughout the movement phase. This unit must start in the hex and may not leave the hex during the movement phase.
-
It may move by rail only in friendly-owned rail hexes, and only if a line of friendly-owned rail hexes can be traced from the unit to a friendly-owned rail marshaling yard (see below).
-
If it has a ZOC, it loses its ZOC from the instant it starts to move by rail to the end of its rail movement.
-
Rail Marshaling Yards. On the European maps, each hex containing at least one major city, fortress, resource center, major port, or great port, and each hex on the islands of Corsica and Sardinia containing a minor port, is a rail marshaling yard if the port, resource center, fortress, or city is on a rail line. On the non-European maps, rail marshaling yards are marked as such (as illustrated on The Great War Master Terrain Key Addendum.) Rail marshaling yards are used for the purposes of rail nets (Rule 7A5) and bombing (Advanced Rule 20G1a). Some rules require two rail marshaling yards, cities, or items to be connected to one another. They are connected if a rail line of any length can be traced between them; this line is traced in the same manner as the rail sub-element of a supply line (per Rule 11B3a).
-
Operational Rail Movement. A unit may use operational rail movement, moving several hexes for each MP spent, as given on the Rail Movement Rates Table (on the Ground Combat Charts and Tables Chart). The unit may mix both rail movement and regular movement in a movement phase. For example, a unit could move overland to a rail line, move by rail, and then continue moving overland.
-
Strategic Rail Movement. A unit may use strategic rail movement, moving up to 200 hexes by rail. The unit must start and end its movement on a rail line and may not otherwise move in the movement phase. During the player turn it uses strategic rail movement, it may not attack during the combat phase and may not move during the exploitation phase. (Note: If you find it helpful, use a marker of your choice to indicate which units have used strategic rail movement in a player turn.)
-
Capacity. For each rail net (see Rule 7A5 below), each player has a rail capacity, measured in REs. This is the maximum number of REs of capacity the player may use on that net in a turn to maintain supply depots and to move units. Each supply depot the player maintains (i.e. has present) on a rail net in a turn use 2 REs of that rail net's capacity for that turn. (Supply depots are covered in Rule 11C1.) Each unit a player moves by rail on a net in a turn uses capacity equal to the unit's RE size (Rule 3A3) from that rail net's capacity for the turn. Note that artillery and c/m units count double their RE size against rail capacity. For example, a rifle regiment moving by rail counts as 1 RE, while a tank regiment counts as 2 REs. If a unit uses a low-volume rail line at any time during its rail movement, it counts double its RE size against rail capacity that turn. Note that the size of artillery and c/m units is doubled twice, once for being artillery or c/m and once for using a lowvolume rail line. On each rail net, a unit only counts against rail capacity once per turn, even if it makes separate rail moves during its turn. Example: A rifle brigade (2 REs) moves by rail, then moves overland to another rail line, and then moves by rail again. It uses high-volume lines only, and thus counts as 2 REs against the player's capacity for that net.
-
Rail Net: A rail net consists of all rail hexes within the listed territory (as displayed on the map and defined under Rule 3F (Theaters and Commands) in the appropriate Game-Specific Rules Booklet.)
-
Capacity: This lists the indicated player's starting capacity on the net, in REs, on the specified date. A player's capacity on a net may change as detailed in sections 7A5a through 7A5g below. Keep track of rail capacities and any gains and losses on paper. A unit using rail movement on a net counts against the owning player's capacity for that net. If a unit uses rail movement on more than one net in a turn, it counts against the player's capacity of each net used. Example: A rifle brigade (2 REs) moves from France to a destination in Spain. Thus, the brigade uses 2 REs on the NW Europe Standard Gauge Net and 2 REs on the Iberian Gauge Net.
a. Temporary Capacity Increase. A player may spend Res Pts (Rule 11G) to temporarily increase his rail capacity on a rail net. To do so, he must own at least two connected, unisolated rail marshaling yards on the net, with the Res Pts to be spent at any of these yards. The player spends Res Pts as he moves units during his movement phase to increase his capacity on a rail net that player turn (only). He may increase the capacity for a net by up to a maximum of half the net's capacity at the start of the player turn. For each Res Pt spent, the net's capacity is increased by 10 REs (or fraction thereof) that player turn. Example: The Entente player has a capacity of 30 REs on the SW Europe Standard Gauge rail net. He may increase its capacity by up to 15 REs, and he does so, spending 2 Res Pts.
b. Permanent Capacity Building. A player may spend Res Pts (Rule 11G) to permanently build up his rail capacity on a rail net. To do so, he must own at least two connected, unisolated rail marshaling yards on the net, with the Res Pts to be spent at any of these yards. The player spends the Res Pts in his initial phase. For each connected, unisolated rail marshaling yard on a net, the player may spend 3 Res Pts and the capacity on the net is permanently increased by 1 RE. Exceptions:
-
If Lille (GW2:0623) is not Entente-owned, or is isolated, it costs the Entente player 4 (vice 3) Res Pts for each 1 RE capacity increase built on the NW Europe Standard Gauge rail net.
-
If Warszawa (GW4:2611) is not Entente-owned, or is isolated, it costs the Entente player 4 (vice 3) Res Pts for each 1 RE capacity increase built on the NE or SE Europe Standard Gauge or West Russia Broad Gauge rail nets.
-
If the USA has joined the Entente side, it costs the Entente player 2 (vice 3) Res Pts for each 1 RE capacity increase built on any Entente rail net (regardless of the status of Lille or Warszawa). Designers' Note: Northeastern France (Lille area) and Western Poland (Warszawa area) were the centers of the French and Russian railroad industries, respectively. With their loss (Lille in 1914 and Warszawa in 1915) locomotive production almost ceased, rail car production plummeted, and even production of basic steel rails dropped by nearly half in those countries. USA entry into the war gave the Entente access to the huge American railroad industry (larger than the rest of the world combined), and by 1918 this had mostly eliminated the problems associated with the loss of Lille. Historically, US entry had little effect on Russia's rail industry problems (this was mostly due to lack of effort on the Entente's part rather than lack of ability).
c. Permanent Capacity Increase via the OBs. The orders of battle occasionally will specify that rail capacity increases are received on certain rail nets. The player must own at least two connected, unisolated rail marshaling yards on the net, or he forfeits the increase.
d. Capacity Transfer. Players have a limited ability to transfer rail capacity between rail nets they control. Transfers may be made as follows:
-
No transfers may be made that would result in the capacity of the transferring net being reduced below its voluntary minimum capacity. (Each rail net's voluntary minimum capacity is listed in rail net portion of the appropriate section of Rule 41 (Nations).) For example, the voluntary minimum capacity of the Great Britain Standard Gauge rail net is 90 REs (as listed in Rule 41K4).
-
The rail nets must be the same gauge (Rule 7A8).
-
The rail nets must be connected, or it must be possible to trace a naval element of a supply line (see Rule 11B3b) from a rail marshaling yard on one net to a rail marshaling yard on the other net.
-
A maximum of 3 REs of capacity may be transferred from one rail net to another per turn.
-
1 Res Pt (Rule 11G) must be spent for every 3 REs (or fraction thereof) of capacity transferred. This Res Pt may be spent in any unisolated, connected rail marshaling yard in either the transferring or receiving rail net. If the above conditions are met, simply deduct the rail capacity from the transferring rail net and add it to the receiving rail net. The turn that rail capacity is transferred, however, it cannot be used on either the transferring or receiving rail net.
e. Capacity Reduction due to Supply Depot Activation. Each time a player activates a supply depot in a rail hex of a rail net (per Rule 11C1), his rail capacity on that net is permanently reduced by 1 RE. (This capacity reduction represents the inherent inefficiency of military-run railroads (which the supply depots represent).)
f. Capacity Loss and Gain due to Rail Marshaling Yard or Supply Depot Capture. Capacity on a rail net may be gained or lost through the capture of rail marshaling yards and supply depots. (Supply depots are covered in Rule 11C1.) A rail marshaling yard or supply depot is captured when the enemy player gains ownership of its hex. When the enemy player captures (or recaptures) a rail marshaling yard or supply depot, the (previously) owning player loses 2 REs of rail capacity from his rail net and the capturing player gains 1 RE of capacity for his net. Exception: If there is less than 2 REs of capacity on a net, the owning player loses all capacity on that net, and the capturing player gains no capacity. When a rail marshaling yard or supply depot is captured, the capacity that the capturing player gains cannot be used that turn; it may be used in following turns. If a player has lost ownership of all rail marshaling yards on a rail net, his remaining rail capacity on that net immediately goes to zero. Further, any active supply depots the player has in rail hexes of that net are immediately deactivated and the rail capacity assigned to those depots eliminated. Note that in these instances the enemy player gains no capacity.
g. Capacity Loss due to Rail Net Deterioration. Capacity on a rail net may be lost through the general deterioration of the net caused by wartime operating conditions. Each production cycle (as shown on the Game Calendar and defined in Rule 16) each rail net with a capacity of 21 REs or more that has enemy units present on it must be checked for deterioration. Note that rail nets with capacities of 20 REs or less are not checked, nor are rail nets with no enemy units present. Roll a die for each net, modifying the die roll by +1 for every 2 REs of railroad engineer units present in any rail hexes of the net and by -1 for every 2 friendly supply depots present in any rail hexes of the net); results are:
-
1 through 6: Deterioration: Immediately deduct 1 RE from the current capacity of the net.
-
7 or more: No Deterioration: The rail net's capacity is unaffected. Special:
-
When the Entente player checks the NW Europe Standard Gauge rail net (only) for deterioration, if Lille (GW2:0623) is not Entente-owned, or is isolated, increase the loss due to deterioration by 1 RE.
-
When the Entente player checks the NE or SE Europe Standard Gauge or West Russia Broad Gauge rail nets (only), if Warszawa (GW4:2611) is not Entente-owned, or is isolated, increase the loss due to deterioration for that rail net by 1 RE. Example: It is the Feb I 15 production cycle and the Entente player must check his NW Europe Standard Gauge rail net for deterioration. He rolls a 6; modifies the roll by +3 as he has 7 REs of railroad engineer units present in hexes of the NW Europe Standard Gauge rail net; further modifies the roll by -5 as he has 11 supply depots present in hexes of the net; yielding a final, modified die roll of 4. This causes a loss of 1 RE of capacity from the rail net. Note that had Lille not been Ententeowned, or been isolated, his RE loss due to deterioration would have increased to 2 REs. Also check for rail net deterioration during the first initial phase following each use of temporary capacity increase (Rule 7A5a above). Check a rail net for deterioration once for each Res Pt spent to temporarily increase the capacity of the net during the previous player turn. Results are as per above. Designers' Note: Wartime demands on all the combatants' rail systems meant that normal maintenance and repair work was delayed, deferred, and often outright ignored more and more as the war went on. The greatly increased rail traffic, often using lines not engineered for such weight or volume, stressed the rail infrastructure greatly; and by 1917 the rail systems of France, Italy, Russia, and Austria-Hungary had either collapsed or were threatening to do so. In particular, the emergency marshaling of assets that section 7A5a above represents, almost always resulted in severe wastage of rolling stock. To give just one example, the historical shifting of Central Powers forces to the Romanian theater in 1916 resulted in over 150 locomotives and nearly 2,000 rail cars either known wrecked, burned out, or just disappeared from inventory.
-
Rail Breaks. A unit may break a rail line in a hex by spending 2 MPs in the hex. Exception: A railroad engineer unit may break a rail line by spending 1 MP in the hex. Bombing and naval bombardment (Advanced Rules 20G1a and 33C1d) may also break a rail line. A unit may not use rail movement to enter or leave a hex in which the rail line is broken. Breaks may be repaired (Rules 13A3 and 13B2), and a rail line may be used in the turn it is repaired. Use a rail line hit marker to mark a broken rail line in a hex. Use line cut markers to mark a broken stretch of rail line. For example, if the rail line in a stretch of 8 hexes is broken, place a line cut marker at each end of the stretch of broken rails with the arrowheads on the markers positioned so they point at each other.
-
Obstructed Rail Lines. Rail lines in hexes captured (or recaptured) from the enemy are obstructed (use hit markers to show this), and must be cleared by engineer units (see Rules 13A3 and 13B2) before a player may use rail movement to enter or leave those hexes. A cleared rail hex may be used in the same turn it is cleared. Designers' Note: A rail break represents physical destruction of the rails the trains run on. Even if a rail line is captured with no physical damage, however, the engineers have a lot of work to do to return the line to service: switches must be reset, water towers refilled, coal yards replenished, and, most importantly, the personnel who will operate this infrastructure repositioned. Clearing a rail line represents all of this.
-
Gauge. The railroads in play on the maps use many different rail gauges: standard, broad, meter, narrow, and Iberian. Most rail lines are standard gauge; the exceptions are listed in Rule 41 under the nation who controls them at the start of World War I. A unit which uses two or more different gauge rail lines as part of its rail movement must pay a trans-shipment cost when it crosses from one gauge to another: 1 MP for operational rail movement, and 20 hexes of its 200 for strategic rail movement. Railroad engineer units may convert a rail hex from one gauge to another per Rule 13B3a.
-
Isolated Sections of a Rail Net (Optional Rule). Note: Isolated sections of a rail net often occur during play. This usually results in one large section of the net and one (or more) very small (and short-lived) sections of the net, the game effects which can be safely ignored. Occasion-ally, a rail net may be separated in a way which is not easy to overlook, however. For example, if the Entente player makes an amphibious landing along the German North Sea coast and this results in a longlived enclave separated from the main front in France, it would be distorting if he were able to use the entire capacity of his NW Europe Standard Gauge rail net (most of which would actually be in France) in the enclave. Players must maintain separate capacities for sections of their rail nets which become divided from each other by hexes that are not friendly-owned. When a rail net is separated into two or more sections isolated from each other, calculate the rail capacity of each resulting section using the following procedure:
-
Determine the number of friendly-owned rail marshaling yards in each section of the net. The section with the most rail marshaling yards is the "home" portion of the net; all other sections are "orphans".
-
Determine the RE capacity of each orphan section of the net. For each orphan section multiply the number of rail marshaling yards in that section by 2 REs; to this add 2 REs for each supply depot in a rail hex in the orphan section of the net; the resulting total is the rail capacity for the orphan section of the rail net. For example, an orphan section of a rail net which contains 4 rail marshaling yards (2 REs each) and 1 supply depot (2 REs) would have a rail capacity of 10 REs.
-
Determine the RE capacity of the home section of the net. From the pre-isolated rail capacity of the net subtract the calculated capacities of all now orphaned sections; the result is the rail capacity of the home section of the net. Example: A rail net with a capacity of 70 REs is separated into three sections isolated from each other. The two orphan sections are calculated to have capacities of 9 and 10 REs; the home section of the rail net thus now has a rail capacity of 51 REs (70 - 19 (9 + 10)). If a rail net is divided into two or more sections isolated from each other, treat each section as a separate rail net when spending Res Pts to temporarily increase capacity (Rule 7A5a). When using this rule, players must specify which section of a net at which each RE of permanent capacity is built, added per the OB, or transferred to or from another eligible net (Rules 7A5b, 7A5c, and 7A5d). Treat the home and orphan sections of a rail net as a single rail net when rolling for rail net deterioration (Rule 7A5g). However, apply any rail capacity losses due to rail net deterioration to the home section of the net. Exception: If the deterioration was the result of spending a Res Pt to increase rail capacity, apply any rail capacity loss to the orphan section of the rail net where the Res Pt was spent.
B. Roads.
A unit moving along a road pays the MP cost for clear terrain for each hex it enters; the actual terrain costs for hexes entered and hexsides crossed are ignored. Road movement has the same limitations as regular movement. For example, a unit moving along a road must spend additional MPs to exit a hex in an enemy ZOC. A unit may always use a road. Roads may be used in any phase in which a unit may move. In addition to roads printed on the map, each rail line is also a road. Even when a unit is prohibited from using a railroad in a hex, it may still use the rail line there as a road. Note: Roads may not be broken and do not have to be cleared.
C. Navigable Inland Waterways.
Note: This is a basic rule when playing a scenario set which uses the non-European maps, but should be treated as an optional rule when playing other scenarios. Units may move by river movement along navigable inland waterways.
-
Definition. All river (including major and great river), canal (including minor canal), and lake hexsides are inland waterways. Lake hexsides are navigable unless frozen. On the European maps, river and canal hexsides (all types) are navigable unless they are frozen or are adjacent to a mountain hex (in which case the hexside is presumed to have rapids). On the non-European maps, river/canal hexsides which are navigable when not frozen are marked as such (as illustrated on The Great War Master Terrain Key Addendum). Note that no inland waterway hexside is navigable when frozen. (Freezing is covered in Rule 36E.)
-
Procedure. Units of the phasing player may use river movement only in the movement phase. A unit moving by river movement moves at an accelerated rate (ignoring regular terrain costs), moving several navigable inland waterway hexsides for each MP spent as given on the River Movement Rates Table (on the Ground Combat Charts and Tables Chart). To use river movement, a unit must be in a hex adjacent to a navigable inland waterway hexside. It begins its river movement by entering this hex-side, and then moves along a line of connected navigable inland waterway hexsides to its destination hexside. On arrival at its destination hexside, the player places the unit in an adjacent land hex. Note that the movement from destination hexside to adjacent hex uses no MPs. Example: A 1-2-5 rifle regiment at Pavia (GW2:4121) begins river movement by entering the adjacent 4121/4221 hexside (note that it could have entered the 4121/4122 hexside instead). It then moves down the Po river, connected hexside to connected hexside, until it reaches the 4516/4615 hexside, ending its movement in the adjacent hex 4615 (note that it could have entered hex 4516 instead). It has entered 16 inland waterway hexsides and thus has spent 2 MPs.
-
Restrictions. When using river movement, a unit is restricted:
-
It may not enter a navigable inland waterway hex-side that is blocked. A hexside is blocked to river movement if: 1) it is adjacent to a hex containing enemy coast defenses (per the Coast Defenses Summary (on the Naval Combat Charts and Tables Chart)) or 2) it is in the naval combat zone of an enemy naval group (Advanced Rule 28B).
-
It may move by river movement only if a line of unblocked navigable inland waterway hexsides can be traced from the unit to a friendly-owned river transport marshaling yard (see below).
-
It may not end its movement in an enemyoccupied/owned hex.
-
If it has a ZOC, it loses its ZOC from the instant it starts to move by river movement to the end of its movement by river movement.
-
River Transport Marshaling Yards. On the European maps, each major city hex that is adjacent to a navigable inland waterway hexside is a river transport marshaling yard. On the non-European maps, river transport marshaling yards are marked as such (as illustrated on The Great War Master Terrain Key Addendum.) Each river transport marshaling yard has a river movement capacity (see 7C5 below) of 1 RE.
-
Capacity. For each inland waterways net (see 7C6 below), each player has a river movement capacity, measured in REs, which is the maximum number of REs that he may move on that net in a turn. Each unit a player moves by river movement on a net in a turn uses capacity equal to the unit's RE size (Rule 3A3) from that net's capacity for the turn. Note that artillery and c/m units count double their RE size against river movement capacity. On each inland waterways net, a unit only counts against river movement capacity once per turn, even if it makes separate river moves during its turn.
-
Inland Waterway Net. Each group of connected navigable inland waterway hexsides constitutes a separate inland waterway net. The river movement capacity a player has on a specific net is the sum of the capacities of the river transport marshaling yards he owns on that net. For example, the navigable inland waterway hexsides along the Po, Mincio, Adda, Ticino, Dora Baltea, and Tanaro rivers (circa GW2:4615, 4416, 4119, 4121, 3924, and 4224, respectively) and lakes Garda and Maggiore (GW2:4216 and 3820) constitute a separate inland waterway net; and this net has a river movement capacity of 1 RE (due to the river transport marshaling yard at Torino (GW2:3926)). A unit using river movement on a net counts against the owning player's capacity for that net. If a unit uses river movement on more than one net in a turn, it counts against the player's capacity of each net used. Note: Unlike rail capacity on a rail net, a player cannot spend Res Pts to temporarily or permanently increase his river movement capacity; nor may he transfer river movement capacity between inland waterway nets; nor do his inland waterway nets suffer deterioration. Designers' Note: River movement is crucial to some of the historical campaigns in Africa and Mesopotamia as due to the bad terrain and dearth of railroads/roads in those areas it is almost the only way to move a force there with any speed. River movement is probably almost as important in Europe, but mostly for supply and production, as barge traffic moves a large fraction of the bulk raw materials for the factories and a considerable amount of general war supplies (background activities the players have little or no control over in The Great War). The rules, therefore, give players direct control of about 10% of the available waterlift in Europe and about 75% outside of Europe. That no capacity is lost (it merely changes hands) when river transport marshaling yards are captured, reflects two concerns: in Europe, there is a huge amount of waterlift remaining even if the 10% under player control is lost, while outside Europe, very little loss of watercraft historically occurred (mostly because native populations were extremely loath to destroy assets absolutely essential to the well-being of the local economies).
Rule 8 — Stacking
Only a limited number of units may stack in a hex. Note that an unlimited number of markers may stack in a hex.
A. Stacking Limit.
Note: This is summarized on the Stacking Summary (on the Ground Combat Charts and Tables Chart).
- Regular. The maximum regular stacking limit for a hex is:
-
6 units of any unit size and unit type, plus
-
6 REs of non-divisional units of any unit type, plus
-
4 REs of artillery units, or 1 artillery division and 2 REs of artillery units, or 2 artillery divisions, plus
-
1 fortress unit of any unit size. Examples: Each of the following combinations could stack in a hex: a) 6 divisions, 6 regiments, 4 artillery regiments, and 1 fortress brigade; b) 5 divisions, 3 brigades, 1 artillery division, 4 artillery regiments, and 1 fortress regiment; c) 4 cadres, 2 brigades, 2 regiments, 4 remnants, 4 battalions, 2 artillery divisions, and 1 fortress division.
- Mountain. The maximum stacking limit for a mountain hex (except in the Arctic/Desert) is:
-
4 units of any unit size and unit type, plus
-
4 REs of non-divisional units of any unit type, plus
-
2 REs of artillery units, or 1 artillery division, plus
-
1 fortress unit of any unit size.
- Arctic/Desert. The maximum stacking limit for any hex in the Arctic or Desert (per Rules 37C and 37D) is:
-
2 units of any unit size and unit type, plus
-
2 REs of non-divisional units of any unit type, plus
-
1 RE of artillery units, plus
-
1 fortress unit of any unit size.
- Exceptions. Certain units never count against stacking limits. These are:
-
Restricted movement units (Rule 14B).
-
Army HQs (Rule 14M).
-
Corps HQs (Rule 14N).
-
Transport units (Rule 14O).
-
Leaders (Rule 14P).
-
Elite brigade units (Rule 14Q). Designers' Note: Regular stacking is based on the fact that divisional frontages in World War I averaged about 3 miles in the defense and about 1 mile in the attack; this averages to about 8 divisions per hex. Numerous examples of stacking exceeding this can be pointed out. For example, during the Battle of the Somme in 1916, the British packed up to 42 divisions into a single hex; but only about a third of these were attacking at any one time, the remainder were in reserve waiting to be fed into the line. In game terms these situations are accounted for by the reserve commitment and overstack rules (Rules 6C/8C2).
B. Effects.
The stacking limit is in force at the end of each movement, combat, reaction movement, reaction combat, and exploitation phase; and at the end of the reserve commitment portion of each combat sequence. A player may not move his units so that they violate the stacking limit in any hex at the end of these phases or sequence. If, as a result of combat, a unit must retreat in violation of stacking, it must continue to retreat until the stacking limit is no longer violated. If it cannot do so, it is eliminated instead. The stacking limit is also the limit on the number of units that may overrun, attack, or bombard (Rules 6F, 9, and 12C) that hex from an adjacent hex. Examples: 1) Units in two clear terrain hexes attack enemy units in a mountain hex outside the Arctic/Desert. Since the hex under attack is a mountain hex, only units up to the mountain stacking limit may attack the hex from each of the two hexes, even though more units may be stacked in these hexes. 2) Units in a mountain hex outside the Arctic/Desert attack units in a clear hex in the Desert. Since the hex under attack is in the Desert, only units up to the Arctic/Desert stacking limit may attack the hex from the hexes outside of the Desert. Note that the stacking limit is not in force in the initial phase, when reinforcements and replacements enter play. Reinforcements and replacements may enter play in violation of the stacking limit during the initial phase, but only if the stacking limit will not be violated at the end of the following movement phase.
-
To attack out of an overstack, they must have spent the entire preceding movement or reaction movement phase (as appropriate) in the overstack.
-
The number of units that may attack (Rule 9) or bombard (Rule 12C) from an overstack is limited to the stacking limit (Rule 8A) for the hex containing the overstack. Note that this is a separate limit from the other nonoverstacked units in the hex.
-
Their attack strengths are modified (in addition to any other modifications) when attacking or bombarding (Rules 9A and 12C): The attack strengths of artillery units are halved; the attack strengths of non-artillery units are quartered.
-
Their defense strengths are ignored when determining losses (Rule 9D); but note that they are affected by whatever combat result is achieved in the attack. Further, the overstacked units in a hex may not be eliminated to satisfy any loss requirement until after all normallystacked units in the hex have been eliminated. Finally, if they are included in an attack resolved on the Positional Ground CRT, and the combat result is AX, BX, BXM, DX, or DXM, the attacker (only) must lose one and half times the strength normally required by those results.
-
If they attack and are forced to retreat (Rule 9F2), they are eliminated instead (any cadres/remnants resulting from this elimination must then retreat).
-
They may not advance after combat (Rule 9F3).
-
They may not use any special combat effects capabilities (Rule 10).
-
They are counted at twice their normal RE size (Rule 3A3) for purposes of combat supply (Rule 11D).
-
They are not counted for purposes of artillery support (Rule 12A).
-
They may not perform any construction, repair, demolition, or railroad engineering (Rules 13A1, 13A2, 13A3, and 13B3).
C. Corps HQs and Stacking.
-
Basic Rules. Players may use Corps HQs to help with stacking in congested portions of the map. (Corps HQs are covered in detail in Rule 14N.) To use a Corps HQs, move a Corps HQs counter to the hex in question, then place the units there in a box on a copy of the The Great War Corps Marker Display, and write the identification of the Corps HQs on the box. Treat all units in a Corps HQs box as being in the hex occupied by the HQs. Units assigned to a Corps HQs box may be removed from the box and placed back on the map in the Corps HQs hex at any time. Note: Since the Corps Marker Display will be written on when used, consider making multiple copies for use when playing the game. Save the original without writing on it.
-
Overstacking (Advanced Rule). A player may establish an overstacked condition (an overstack) in any hex that contains his units and one or more of his Corps HQs. (Note that a player may create an overstack at any time, including during initial deployment, garrison activation, reinforcement placement, etc.) The player must establish an overstack when he has units in excess of normal stacking limits in such a hex, placing all units over these limits in the overstack portion of one or more of his Corps HQs in the hex. He may establish an overstack in a hex even if normal stacking limits are not violated. Note that units may create an overstack when advancing after combat. When a player establishes an overstack in a hex, he places the units comprising the overstack in the overstack section of the appropriate Corps HQs box on the corps marker display. (The Corps HQs box may also contain normally stacked units in the other section of the box.) Note: If you have a lot of units in an overstack, consider moving a second Corps HQs counter into the hex. You can then place this Corps HQs counter in the overstack section of the first Corps HQs counter's box on the corps marker display, and place the overstack units in the second Corps HQs counter's box on the corps marker display. At the moment the overstack is established, the player chooses which units are overstacked in the hex. There-after, other units in the hex can voluntarily enter the over-stack at any time during phases in which the owning player can move or attack. Units in the overstack, however, must spend 1 MP to leave the overstack itself. Exception: Units present in an overstack from which they or any other unit attacked in the previous combat (or reaction combat) phase, must spend 2 MPs (vice the normal 1) to leave the overstack during the next phase in which they may move. Special: Units that are exempt from stacking (per Rule 8A4) can leave an overstack without MP cost. When a unit leaves the overstack, remove it from the display and place it with the normally-stacked units in the hex. Units that retreat into a hex containing a friendly Corps HQs in violation of the normal stacking limit are overstacked in that hex. Establish an overstack per above, or add the units to an overstack already present in the hex. Units in an overstack operate differently than other units:
-
They may not overrun enemy units (Rule 6F).
-
They are ignored when determining the defense strength of a hex for purposes of overrun or combat (Rules 6F and 9A).
Rule 9 — Combat
During the combat phase, the phasing player's units may attack enemy units. In this phase, the phasing player is the attacker and the non-phasing player is the defender. During the reaction combat phase, the reacting player's units within the zone of influence (ZOI) of an active army headquarters (HQs) may attack enemy units. (Army HQs and ZOIs are covered in Rule 14M.) In this phase, the reacting player is the attacker and the non-reacting player is the defender.
A. Procedure.
An attack consists of one or more phasing units attacking a hex that contains enemy units. In a combat or reaction combat phase, the attacking player may make a series of attacks, one after another, in any order. Attacking is voluntary; units are not required to attack. The attacker does not have to announce all of his attacks before resolving any attack. For each attack, follow this procedure:
-
Determine which of the two ground combat results tables (CRTs) (on the Ground Combat Charts and Tables Chart) the attack will be resolved on. If the attacked hex contains mountain terrain, a major city, or a fortification of any type (except fieldworks), use the Positional Ground CRT; in all other cases use the Mobile Ground CRT. Exceptions: A) If the attacker is infantry-capable (per Rule 14H), always use the Mobile Ground CRT. B) If the combat's hex is mountain terrain and contains no fortification (excepting fieldworks), and one side (attacker or defender), but not both, is mountain/infantry-capable (per Rule 14H), the side which is mountain/infantry-capable may chose which CRT is used (this is an exception to "A").
-
Total the modified attack strengths of all units attacking an adjacent enemy-occupied hex. Disruption (Rule 3A5), attacking from an overstack (Advanced Rule 8C2), terrain and fortifications (per section 9H below), general and combat supply status (Rule 11F), and support (Rule 12A) can modify the attack strengths of units. Artillery units and heavy cavalry units can have their attack strengths further modified as described in Rules 12B and 14D1. To this total, add the strength of any ground support bombing (Basic Rule B17B5 or Advanced Rule 20G2b) and offensive naval gunfire support (Basic Rule 26C or Advanced Rule 33A) in the hex.
-
If the combat will use the Positional Ground CRT, resolve any attempt by the defender to commit reserves to the combat (as described in Rule 6C).
-
Total the modified defense strengths of all units in the attacked hex. (Note: If using Advanced Rule 8C2 (Overstacking), ignore overstacked units when determining the defense strength of the hex.) Disruption, terrain and fortifications, general and combat supply status, and support can modify the defense strengths of units. To this total, add the strength of any defensive air support bombing (Basic Rule B17B4 or Advanced Rule 20G2c) and defensive naval gunfire support (Basic Rule 26C or Advanced Rule 33A) in the hex.
-
Resolve any attempts by the attacker and by the defender by their units to use special combat effects capabilities (as described in Rule 10).
-
Calculate the combat odds ratio. Compare the total attack strength to the total defense strength in the form attacker : defender. Round this ratio down in favor of the defender to correspond to a combat odds ratio on the ground CRT being used. For example, an attack strength of 34 attacking a defense strength of 9 is 34:9, which rounds down to 3:1. Modify the odds ratio up or down (to the left or right on the CRT) by the net effect of any odds ratio shifts required by fatigue (Rule 6B4) and successful attempts to use special combat effects. Example: An attack is calculated at 3:1. Defender fatigue shifts the odds ratio up three levels, while a spectacularly successful attempt by the defender to use gas effects capability shifts the ratio down one level. The net effect is thus to shift the odds ratio up (to the right on the CRT) two levels to 5:1.
B. General Restrictions.
The following general restrictions apply to combat:
-
No unit may attack or be attacked more than once per combat phase or reaction combat phase.
-
No unit may attack into a prohibited terrain hex or across a prohibited terrain hexside.
-
All units defending in a hex must be attacked collectively, with their defense strengths combined. Units in a hex may not be attacked individually.
-
Each attack must be against the units occupying a single hex. Two or more hexes may not be attacked in a single attack. Units in the same hex may attack into different hexes, but even in this case each attacked hex requires a separate attack.
-
A unit may not split its attack strength, such as to attack more than one hex.
-
The stacking limit of the attacked hex limits the number of units that may attack the hex from adjacent hexes (see Rule 8B).
-
Any attack at odds higher than those allowed on a particular ground CRT is resolved at the highest odds column that can be used on that CRT. For example, an attack at 9:1 odds on the Mobile Ground CRT would be resolved on the 6:1 column unless the attacking units were half or more infantry, in which case the attack would be resolved on the 9:1 column. Any attack at odds less than 1:4 is an automatic AE: Attacker Eliminated (Mobile Ground CRT) or AD: Attacker Destroyed (Positional Ground CRT) result, as appropriate.
C. Combat Results.
Combat results may affect the attacking units, the defending units, both sides, or neither. When a combat result occurs, the owning players immediately apply it to their affected units. Note that the two ground CRTs have different combat results.
- Mobile Ground CRT Combat Results. The possible results are:
-
AE: Attacker Eliminated/DE: Defender Eliminated. Eliminate all affected units: reduce any unit with a cadre (or remnant) to its cadre/remnant strength; remove from play all other units. Retreat all surviving affected units.
-
AH: Attacker Half Eliminated/DH: Defender Half Eliminated. Eliminate units so that at least half the total strength (attack strength for the attacker, defense strength for the defender) of the affected units is eliminated. Retreat all surviving affected units.
-
AR: Attacker Retreats/DR: Defender Retreats. Retreat all affected units.
-
AQ: Attacker Quarter Eliminated: Eliminate units so that at least one quarter of the total attack strength of the attacker is eliminated. Note that the surviving attacking units do not retreat. Exception: If the attacker is infantry-capable (per Rule 14H), this result becomes AS (per below) instead.
-
AS: Attacker Stopped. The attack is inconclusive; neither side takes losses or retreats. Designers' Note: Infantry units can change an AP result to an AS result as their emphasis on small unit tactics meant that when an attack went sour, it was usually recognized earlier and called off sooner than in the old days of massed rifle attacks controlled at the army-level.
-
HX: Half Exchange. Eliminate the side with the lower printed combat strength (or the defender if both sides are equal in strength). Retreat all surviving units of this side. From the other side, eliminate units so that the total strength loss equals at least half the total strength loss of the eliminated side. Example: An attack of 6 attacking strength points (SPs) against 12 defending SPs results in an HX. The attacker, being the weaker side, eliminates his 6 SPs, and must retreat any surviving units. The defender must eliminate at least 3 SPs.
-
EX: Exchange. Eliminate the side with the lower printed combat strength (or the defender if both sides are equal in strength). Retreat all surviving units of this side. From the other side, eliminate units so that the total strength loss at least equals the total strength loss of the eliminated side. Example: An attack of 15 attacking strength points (SPs) against 6 defending SPs results in an EX. The defender, being the weaker side, eliminates his 6 SPs, and must retreat any surviving units. The attacker must eliminate at least 6 SPs.
- Positional Ground CRT Combat Results. The possible results are listed below. Note: When a result requires one side to lose half its total strength, that side must eliminate units totaling half or more of its total strength.
-
AD: Attacker Destroyed/DD: Defender Destroyed. Eliminate all affected units: reduce any unit with a cadre (or remnant) to its cadre/remnant strength; remove from play all other units. Retreat all surviving affected units.
-
AL: Attacker Loss/DL: Defender Loss. Eliminate units so that half the total strength (attack strength for the attacker, defense strength for the defender) of the affected units is eliminated. Retreat all surviving affected units. From the other side, eliminate units so that the total strength loss equals at least one quarter the total strength loss mandated for the first side. For both sides: When eliminating units, eliminate all non-artillery units before eliminating any artillery unit. Example: An attack of 120 (80 artillery, 40 non-artillery) strength points (SPs) against 50 (30 artillery, 20 non-artillery) SPs results in an AL. The attacker must eliminate at least 60 (half of 120) SPs, including all 40 non-artillery and at least 20 artillery, and retreat. The defender must eliminate at least 15 (one quarter of 60) SPs, all of which must be non-artillery.
-
AX: Attacker Exchange/DX Defender Exchange. Eliminate units so that half the total strength of the affected units is eliminated. From the other side, eliminate units so that the total strength loss equals at least one half the total strength loss mandated for the first side. Neither side is required to retreat, but the side which suffered the larger strength point loss may do so at that player's option. For both sides: When eliminating units, eliminate all non-artillery units before eliminating any artillery unit. Example: An attack of 120 (80 artillery, 40 non-artillery) strength points (SPs) against 50 (30 artillery, 20 non-artillery) SPs results in an AX. The attacker must eliminate at least 60 (half of 120) SPs, including all 40 non-artillery and at least 20 artillery. The defender must eliminate at least 30 (half of 60) SPs, including all 20 non-artillery and at least 10 artillery. The attacker, having suffered the larger strength point loss, may retreat at his option. Exception: If the attacker is rifle assault-capable (per Rule 14R), a result of DX becomes DXM (per below) instead.
-
DXM: Defender Exchange Modified. This is the same as DX (per above) except that: #1) the defender must retreat, and #2) the attacker must eliminate units so that his total strength loss equals at least equals the strength loss mandated for the defender. Example: An attack of 120 (80 artillery, 40 non-artillery) strength points (SPs) against 50 (30 artillery, 20 non-artillery) SPs results in a DX, but this is modified to DXM as the attacker is rifle-assault capable. The defender must eliminate at least 25 (half of 50) SPs, including all 20 non-artillery and at least 5 artillery, and retreat all surviving defending units. The attacker must eliminate at least 25 SPs, all non-artillery. Designers' Note: Rifle assault units use their high-morale and lavish suite of supporting arms to push the attack more aggressively than regular rifle units. This usually results in higher attacker casualties, but often results in the taking of more ground as well.
D. Losses.
Calculate all combat losses using the printed strengths of the involved units. Disruption (Rule 3A5), attacking from an overstack (Advanced Rule 8C2), terrain and fortifications (per section 9H below), supply status (Rule 11F), and support (Rule 12A) may modify strengths for combat resolution, but these factors are not considered for losses. When determining losses, always use the attacker's attack strengths and the defender's defense strengths. Air units and naval gunfire may aid units in combat (Basic Rules B17B4, B17B5, and 26C or Advanced Rules 20G2b, 20G2c, and 33A). However, the bombing strengths of air units and the gunnery strengths of naval units are not included when determining losses. Air and naval units are never eliminated due to ground combat resolution. Ignore Army HQs units and Corps HQs units (Rules 14M and 14N) when eliminating units to satisfy mandated losses. Instead, Army and Corps HQs in a combat are eliminated if there are no other friendly units in their hex upon completion of ground combat resolution (that is after all losses have been taken and after all movement after combat (per section 9F below) has been completed). Which of his units a player eliminates to satisfy a combat result are at his discretion. However, if the combat result is AL, AX, BX, BXM, DX, DXM, or DL, a player must eliminate all his non-artillery units before eliminating any of his artillery units. Note that the cadres/remnants resulting from the elimination of non-artillery units in a combat (per Rule 9E) do not themselves have to be eliminated before artillery units may be eliminated. Exception (Optional): For purposes of losses (only) treat field artillery units (Rule 12B1) as non-artillery units. Designers' Note: Losses of heavy artillery (the dominant type of artillery in the game) and siege artillery in positional combat were usually low (many more of these guns were lost to bombardment). However, fairly large numbers of field artillery and mortars could be lost during such a battle. Special: When using Advanced Rule 8C2 (Overstacking) modify the loss rules as follows: 1) Ignore the defense strengths of overstacked units when determining losses (but note that they are affected by whatever combat result is achieved in the attack),
- The overstacked units in a hex may not be eliminated to satisfy any loss requirement until after all normally-stacked units in the hex have been eliminated, and 3) If overstacked units are included in an attack resolved on the Positional Ground CRT, and the combat result is AX, BX, BXM, DX, or DXM, the attacker (only) must lose one and half times the strength normally required by those results.
E. Cadres and Remnants.
Various units can take losses in combat and remain in play at reduced strengths. These units have cadre or rem printed on the back of their counters. When such a unit is eliminated in combat, it is reduced (flipped over) to its cadre or remnant instead of being removed from play. When calculating the total strength loss in a combat, the strength of a unit reduced to cadre/remnant is counted fully. For example, an attacking 9-12-5 rifle division reduced to a 4-5-5 cadre is counted as a strength loss of 9 (attack strength), not 5 (the difference between its full and cadre attack strengths). Note that the only difference between cadres and remnants is RE size (see Rule 3A3). When a rule applies to cadres it also applies to remnants, even if not explicitly stated.
F. Movement After Combat.
-
Declarations. If a combat result mandates that a player retreat his units from a hex, and retreating these units (per Rule 9F2 below) would leave the hex vacant of units from his side, the opposing player must state (truthfully) if he will advance at least one of his units that participated in the combat into the hex (per Rule 9F3 below). If the player declines to advance, then the mandated retreat is canceled. Example #1: A combat result mandates that the defender must retreat from a hex. (Note that implementing a defender retreat result will always result in a hex vacant of units of the defending side.) The attacker must declare his intent regarding advance after combat into the hex. If he elects not to advance, the requirement for the defending units to retreat is canceled. Example #2: A combat result mandates that the attacker must retreat. The attacking units are divided between two hexes: Y and Z. Hex Y contains nothing but attacking units, while the hex Z contains both units that attacked and units that did not attack. A retreat from hex Y would leave the hex vacant of units of the attacking side. A retreat from hex Z would not leave the hex vacant (as the units which not attack do not have to retreat). The units which attacked from hex Z must retreat. The defender must declare his intent regarding advance after combat into hex Y. If he elects not to advance, the requirement for the attacking units in hex Y to retreat is canceled.
-
Retreats. When a unit must retreat, the owning player moves it one hex away from the hex it occupied during combat, in accordance with the following priorities:
-
To a hex not in any enemy ZOC and not in violation of stacking. (ZOCs and stacking are covered in Rules 5 and 8, respectively.)
-
To a hex not in an enemy ZOC but in violation of stacking.
-
To a hex in an enemy ZOC (regardless of stacking). A unit that retreats to a hex in an enemy ZOC is reduced to cadre/remnant if it has a cadre/remnant. If it does not have a cadre/remnant (or is already a cadre or remnant) it is eliminated. If there are multiple hexes with the same retreat priority that a unit could retreat to, the unit must retreat to the hex closest to a friendly supply depot. Further if there are two or more supply depots equidistant, the retreat must be towards an operational supply depot in preference to a non-operational supply depot. (Supply depots are covered in Rule 11C1.) When a retreating unit violates the stacking limit, it must continue to retreat, per the above priorities, until it reaches a hex where it does not violate the stacking limit. If it cannot do this, it is eliminated. Exception: When using the advanced rule on overstacking (Rule 8C2), a unit may end its retreat in a hex in violation of stacking if it can be added to an overstack in that hex. A unit with no retreat route except into or across prohibited terrain or into enemy-occupied/owned hexes is totally eliminated, even if it has a cadre or remnant. Defending units retreating to a friendly-occupied hex that is subsequently attacked in the same combat phase contribute nothing to the defense of the hex: Their defense (combat) strengths are ignored during the attack and for all exchange purposes, and they are ignored for special com-bat effects capabilities (Rule 10), support (Rule 12A), AA (Basic Rule B17C or Advanced Rule 22), or anything else called into play during the attack. These units do, however, suffer all adverse effects of the subsequent attack. Some units may ignore enemy ZOCs when retreating if they retreat to a friendly-occupied/owned hex. These units are:
-
All non-artillery units with a printed attack strength of 8 or greater. A unit's strength is determined after implementing any losses, but before any retreats. For example, an 8-11-5 rifle division may retreat in this fashion, but the same division reduced to its 3-5-5 cadre cannot.
-
All units with a printed movement rating of 6, 7, or 8 (regardless of their attack strength). Note: Only units in the above categories have this special retreat ability. All other units, included units stacked with units with this special retreat ability, do not have this ability. Special: When using Advanced Rule 8C2 (Overstacking), units which attack from an overstack and are forced to retreat are eliminated instead (any cadres/remnants resulting from this elimination must then retreat).
-
Advances. Attacking units may advance after combat into the attacked hex, up to the stacking limit, if the combat clears the hex of enemy units. Defending units may advance after combat into adjacent hexes, up to the stacking limit, if the combat clears all enemy units from the hex advanced into. Example: An attack made from three hexes fails disastrously (an AE is rolled). After implementing the combat result, only one of the hexes still contains units belonging to the attacking side (these units did not attack and therefore were not affected by the combat result). The defender may advance units from the attacked hex into either or both of the two hexes now completely cleared of enemy units. Advance after combat is voluntary. The units must advance immediately upon resolution of the attack into the vacated hex (or hexes), before any other attack is resolved. Special: When using Advanced Rule 8C2 (Overstacking), units advancing after combat are not limited to the stacking limit; they may advance into a hex in excess of the stacking limit if the excess units can be placed in an overstack in the hex. Also, units in an overstack may not advance after combat.
-
Multiple-Hex Retreats/Advances. In the West Theater prior to Feb I 15, and in all other Theaters prior to Feb I 16, if the combat result is an AE, AH, DH, or DE, the affected units must retreat 2 hexes and the other side's units are eligible to advance up to 2 hexes. A multiple-hex retreat/advance is carried out as follows (the normal rules governing retreat and advance after combat apply unless otherwise stated):
-
All units that must retreat are retreated one hex.
-
Units eligible to advance after combat may then advance into any hexes vacated due to the total elimination of the units in the combat or by retreat per step 1 above.
-
All units that must retreat are retreated a 2nd hex.
-
Units that advanced after combat in step 2 above may then advance a 2nd time into any hexes not containing enemy units. Designers' Note: During the early war period of open maneuver, the armies on both sides appeared to be completely paranoid about enemy forces getting astride their lines of communication. When things went badly, and a force had to retreat, it often did so pell-mell. This panic was a major contributing factor in the Russian defeats at Tannenberg and in central Poland in 1914-15, in the German retreat from the Marne in 1914, and the 1915 Serbian campaign.
- Movement after Combat and Overruns. A unit or stack required to retreat due to combat, may retreat into an enemyoccupied hex if able to overrun (Rule 6F) the units in the hex. Implement the effects of enemy ZOCs on retreats (per section 9F2 above) before the overrun odds are calculated. Calculate the overrun odds as normal, but ignore movement point costs. A unit or stack making its second advance in a multiple hex advance after combat may enter a hex containing enemy units if able to overrun the units in the hex. Implement this overrun in the same manner as an overrun in conjunction with a retreat.
G. Zero-Strength Units and Marginal Units.
-
Zero-Strength Units. A unit with an attack strength of 0 may not attack by itself. It may participate in an attack made by other units, whereupon it is affected by the results of the attack (including advance after combat). A unit with a defense strength of 0 is automatically eliminated when attacked, unless it is stacked with at least one unit with a defense strength greater than 0. A unit with a combat strength of 0 is subject to all limitations of this rule.
-
Marginal Units (Optional Rule). A unit with a printed attack strength of 0 has a marginal attack capability: Treat such units as having a printed attack strength of 0.5. A unit with a printed defense strength of 0 has a marginal defense capability: Treat such units as having a printed defense strength of 0.5. Example: A 0-2-X unit would have an attack strength of 0.5; and a 1-0-X unit would have a defense strength of 0.5; but a 0-X unit would still have a combat strength of zero.
H. Terrain, Fortification, and Weather Effects.
The terrain and fortifications in the defender's hex, the terrain of the hexsides across which the attack is made, and the current weather affect combat resolution. The combat effects columns on the Terrain Effects Chart (TEC) and Fortifications Effects Chart summarizes these effects. Note that weather effects are also summarized on the TEC. (Weather is covered in detail in Rule 36.) AEC refers to armor effects, as explained in Rule 10A. In general, terrain and fortifications may affect combat by halving or quartering some or all of the attacking units; further, terrain, fortifications, and weather may affect combat by applying modifications (such as -1) to the die roll used to resolve the attack. Note that all terrain, fortification, and weather effects are cumulative.
I. Retreat Before Combat.
Combat/motorized and cavalry units (Rules 3A2 and 14D) with a printed movement rating of 7 or 8, and irregular units (Rule 14L) may attempt to retreat before combat. Special: Oversnow units (Rule 14G) with a printed movement rating of 7 or 8 may attempt to retreat before combat during snow weather (only). When resolving an attack against a hex containing any defending units that may attempt to retreat before combat, the attacking player must indicate all forces that are attacking the hex. The defending player chooses which, if any, of his units that can attempt to retreat before combat will attempt to do so. The defending player then determines the success of each attempt as follows: He rolls a die for each unit attempting to retreat and consults the Ground Success Table (on the Ground Combat Charts and Tables Chart); note that there are no modifiers to this die roll. If the attempt succeeds, the unit retreats; if the attempt fails, it does not retreat. Follow the regular rules of retreat (Rule 9F2) for retreat before combat. Once allocated to an attack, the attacking forces may not be reallocated to a different attack or withheld from attacking, even if all defending units in the attacked hex retreat before combat. If any defending units remain in the hex, the attack is resolved normally. If all defending units in the hex retreat before combat, the attacking units may advance into the hex, the same as for advance after combat (Rule 9F3).
J. Contested Hexes.
If upon resolution of a combat using the Positional Ground CRT, at least one surviving attacking unit both occupies and exerts a ZOC in the attacked hex and at least one surviving defending unit both occupies and exerts a ZOC in any adjacent hex, the attacked hex does not change ownership per Rule 5B; instead, ownership of the hex is contested. (Place a contested hex marker in the hex to show this.) A contested hex has the following effects:
-
Non-infantry units which enter a contested hex (either as a result of the advance after combat which established the contested hex or by any means subsequent to this) may become disrupted. Note that infantry units (Rule 14H) are never disrupted when entering a contested hex. For each non-infantry unit that enters a contested hex, roll a die and consult the Ground Success Table (note that there are no modifiers to this die roll); results are: Success: the unit is not disrupted, or Failure: the unit is disrupted. (Disruption effects are covered in Rule 3A5). Disrupted units in a contested hex cannot recover from disruption while in such a hex (this is an exception to the normal rule that disrupted units recover from disruption during each friendly initial phase).
-
A contested hex is owned by neither side. Note that this means that the facilities (cities, transportation lines, airbases, ports, factories, resource centers, etc.) in the hex cannot be used by either side.
-
In general, a unit may not enter (or retreat into) an enemy-occupied/contested hex. This is a hex that is both contested and is also occupied by an enemy unit. Exceptions: Units may enter enemy-occupied/contested hexes if they overrun the enemy units there (Rule 6F), or if the enemy units in the hex are under siege (Advanced Rule 15G), or if they are making an airborne or amphibious landing in the hex (Advanced Rules 24 and 32).
-
Fortifications in a contested hex are ignored for all purposes (just treat the hex as if it had no fortifications). Note that the fortifications in a contested hex are not reduced (Rule 15B) upon hex capture; instead, they are reduced when a player gains uncontested ownership of the hex (per below).
-
Construction, demolition, repair, and railroad engineering (Rules 13A1, 13A2, 13A3, and 13B3) cannot be undertaken in a contested hex.
-
Attacks into contested hexes are resolved using the Mobile Ground CRT, and have a -1 applied to the combat resolution die roll (in addition to any other modifiers). A player gains uncontested (i.e. normal) ownership of a contested hex when either of the following occur (remove the contested hex marker when either condition occurs):
-
One or more of his units with a ZOC remains in continuous occupation of the hex for one complete game turn. Example: The Central Powers player occupies a contested hex with a unit with a ZOC in the reaction combat phase of the Entente half of the Jun I 15 game turn. If he succeeds in continuously holding the hex with at least one unit with a ZOC until the end of the reaction combat phase of the Entente half of the Jun II 15 game turn, he will gain ownership of the hex at that time.
K. Same-Hex Combat.
Under various conditions (as described in later rules), units from both sides may end up in the same hex. (This can occur as the result of certain reinforcement activities per Rule 16 and the OB (for example, if the Irish Rebellion occurs, Central Powerscontrolled Irish Rebel units may appear in Entente-occupied hexes in Ireland); but more usually occurs as a result of a siege (Advanced Rule 15G) or due to units making an airborne or amphibious landing in an enemy-occupied hex (Advanced Rules 24 and 32). In the combat or reaction combat phase, when units from both sides are in the same hex, all attacker units (i.e. all phasing units in the combat phase and all non-phasing units in the reaction combat phase) in the hex (up to the stacking limit for the hex) must attack the enemy units in the hex. (They cannot attack another hex, nor may they not attack at all.) If such an attack is mandated during the reaction combat phase, the attack may be made even if the attacking units are not in the zone of influence of a friendly Army HQs. Friendly units in other hexes may also join in the attack, per the above combat rules. Exception: If all enemy units in the hex are under siege (per Advanced Rule 15G), friendly units in the hex (up to the stacking limit for the hex) may (but are not required to) attack the enemy units in the hex. Resolve any same-hex combat as follows.
- Same-Hex Non-Siege Combat. Use the standard combat rules with the following modifications:
-
Units with an attack strength of zero are required to attack in this case. (they are "included in the attack" per Rule 9G.) If there is no ground unit in the attack with an attack strength greater than zero, the attacking units are automatically eliminated. (Note that this occurs even if there is ground support or naval gunfire support available for the attacking units). Example: A 6-8-4 parachute machinegun brigade air drops in a hex occupied by an enemy unit. The parachute machinegun brigade becomes badly disrupted in the drop and thus has a combat strength of 0 (per rule 3A5). No other friendly unit attacks the hex, so the parachute machinegun brigade is eliminated, since it attacked at zero strength.
-
On an AQ, AS, or AX result, the attacking units in the enemy-occupied hex must also retreat. All other units treat the result normally.
-
Retreating units are subject to the effects of all ZOCs they enter, including the ZOCs of enemy units in the hex from which the retreat is conducted. Example: A marine rifle regiment makes an amphibious landing in a hex occupied by an enemy supported rifle division. During the combat phase, the marine rifle unit must attack, and the combat result requires it to retreat. Since any hex it can enter is in the ZOC of the rifle division in the landing hex, the marine rifle unit is eliminated.
-
If both sides have units remaining in a hex after combat resolution (as may occur, for example, if combat takes place on the Positional Ground CRT and neither side is required to retreat), the attacking units which remain in the hex are under siege (per Rule 15G) upon conclusion of the combat.
- Same-Hex Siege Combat. Note that this can only occur when using Advanced Rule 15G (Siege). Use the standard combat rules with the following modification:
- Besieged units may attack sieging enemy units in their hex (only); they may not attack enemy units in adjacent hexes. Note that sieging units are under no such restriction; they may attack enemy units in both the sieged hex and adjacent hexes. The sieging player may attack besieged units with his units in the besieged hex and in adjacent hexes.
L. Incremental Odds (Optional Rule).
Note: Use of this option requires a 10-sided die. If the odds ratio is 2:1 or greater, the attacker may use incremental odds. When calculating the combat ratio (Rule 9A), round to the nearest tenth of a point. To use incremental odds, roll a 10-sided die. If the die roll is equal to or less than the decimal fraction, then round the combat ratio up to the next whole number; if the die roll is more than the decimal fraction, then round the combat ratio down to the next whole number. Example: An attack strength of 48 attacking a defense strength of 20 would result in a ratio of 2.4:1. As this exceeds 2:1, incremental odds may be used. A 4 is rolled on a 10-sided die. The combat ratio is thus rounded up to 3:1 and the combat is resolved on the 3:1 column of the CRT. If a 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 0 had been rolled, the combat ratio would have been rounded down to 2:1, and the combat resolved on the 2:1 column of the CRT instead. Designers' Note: Most of the historical offensives on the western front work out as being somewhere between 2:1 and 4:1 attacks. Use of this rule went a long ways to encouraging playtesters to make attacks at the lower end of this scale (as they were always hoping the incremental odds die roll would go in their favor).
Rule 10 — Special Combat Effects
Various unit types have special combat effects capabilities that may be used to attempt to modify a combat's outcome, as described below. These capabilities are summarized on the Special Combat Effects Capabilities Summary (on the Ground Combat Charts and Tables Chart). Immediately after the combat odds ratio for an attack is calculated, both sides announce all attempts they will make to use special combat effects capabilities in that combat. The attacker announces all attempts he will make and designates the attacking units which will make each attempt. The defender then announces all attempts he will make and designates the defending units which will make each attempt. Note that two or more units may combine to make a specific attempt. For each attempt to use a special combat effects capability, the player making the attempt rolls a die and consults the Ground Success Table. Note that each special combat effects capability has its own list of applicable die roll modifiers. If the attempt succeeds, modify the combat resolution die roll by +1 if the attacker made the attempt, or by -1 if the defender made the attempt. If the attempt also results in a column shift, shift the combat odds ratio for the attack one column to the right if the attacker made the attempt, or one column to the left if the defender made the attempt. Note that multiple attempts to use some types of special combat effects capabilities are allowed and that the combat resolution die roll can therefore be modified by +1 for each such attempt which succeeds. For example, up to two attempts to use EEC can be made by the attacker in a combat, and if both attempts succeeded, the combat resolution die roll for that combat would be modified by +2. If the attempt fails, the attempting units may be eliminated (as described on the Ground Success Table). Note: The elimination of a unit in this manner does not require the combat odds to be recalculated. Example: An attack in 1916 on a defending force of German units in a full city hex containing a fort is calculated at 3:1, -3. The attacker announces he will use the three combat engineer regiments and one siege engineer brigade he has in his attacking force to make two attempts to use EEC (with the first attempt using two combat engineer regiments and the other using one combat engineer regiment), and one attempt to use SEC (using the siege engineer brigade). The defender then announces he will make one attempt to use GEC using the gas engineer regiment (1 RE of GEC) he has in the defending force. The attacker resolves his attempts using the Ground Success Table. He rolls a 5 for the first EEC attempt, and modifies the die roll to 6 as the attempting force is equal to a brigade in size, which means the attempt succeeds and the combat resolution die roll will be modified by +1. For the second EEC attempt, the player rolls a 2, which means the attempt fails disastrously with the combat engineer regiment which made the attempt being eliminated. For the SEC attempt, the player rolls a 5, modifies this to a 6 as the attempting units equal one X, which means the attempt succeeds and the combat resolution die roll will be modified by an additional +1. As the SEC attempt was an asterisked success, he rolls again to see if the attempt also results in a column shift; he rolls a 5, which means it does, and the combat odds ratio will be shifted one column to the right (higher). The attacker has succeeded in changing the attack to a 4:1, -1. The defender next resolves his GEC attempt using the Ground Success Table. He rolls a 6, an asterisked success, and rolls again, another 6. This results in the combat resolution die roll being modified by a -1 and the final odds ratio being shifted one column to the left (lower). The final odds ratio for the combat is, therefore, 3:1, -2. If a side succeeds in using a specific special combats effects capability (excepting GEC) to modify the combat resolution die roll, the first RE from that side eliminated to satisfy required combat losses must be taken from units capable of using that special combat effects capability. Example: The attacker succeeds in using AECA to modify the combat resolution die roll. The combat result is EX. The first RE the attacker eliminates to satisfy the exchange requirement must be from units capable of using AECA. Unfortunately, he has only two AECA capable units in the attacking force, a battalion (1/2 RE) and a brigade (2 REs). As the battalion cannot satisfy the required loss alone, the player must eliminate the brigade instead.
A. Armor/Antitank Effects Capability.
Various units have armor and antitank capabilities as shown on the Unit Identification Chart (UIC). There are three categories of these effects:
-
AECA: Armor Effects Capability in the Attack. AECA expresses the ability of an attacking unit to use armor effects.
-
AECD: Armor Effects Capability in the Defense. AECD expresses the ability of a defending unit to use armor effects.
-
ATEC: Antitank Effects Capability. ATEC expresses the ability of a defending unit to use antitank effects when the attacker has units capable of using AECA in the attack. A unit can be either fully capable (full) or one half capable (1/2) in any of these categories as shown on the UIC. When calculating the RE size of a force making an attempt to use one of these capabilities, count a fully capable unit at its printed RE size, and count a one half capable unit at half its printed RE size. Example: A player attempts to use AECA. He commits the following units to the attempt: one tank regiment ("full" and thus 1 RE of AECA) and two engineer tank regiments ("1/2" and thus 1/2 RE of AECA each). The total RE size of his force for the purpose of the AECA attempt is thus 2 REs (one brigade equivalent). Weather affects AEC (both AECA and AECD), but not ATEC, as listed on the Terrain Effects Chart. There is no AEC at all in mud weather. AEC is reduced in winter and snow weather. (Weather is covered in detail in Rule 36.) During times of reduced AEC, halve the RE size of all units attempting to use AEC. Continuing with the example from the previous paragraph, if the force of one tank regiment and two engineer tank regiments were to make the AECA attempt during winter or snow weather, the total RE size of the force for purposes of making the AECA attempt would be halved to 1 RE (one regiment equivalent). The attacker may make a maximum of 2 attempts to use AECA per combat. The defender may make a maximum of 1 attempt to use AECD per combat. ATEC may only be used if the attacker has AECA capable units present in the attack. Note that the attacker need not make any attempt to use AECA in order for the defender to attempt to use ATEC. Further, a defender may not attempt to use both AECD and ATEC in the same combat. The number of ATEC attempts the defender may make is equal to the number of REs of units with AECA capability the attacker has participating in the attack plus one, up to a maximum of 3 attempts. Again continuing with the example from the previous paragraphs, if the attacking force includes one tank regiment and two engineer tank regiments (a total of 3 REs of AECA capable units), the defender may make up to 3 attempts to use ATEC (assuming he has at least 3 ATEC capable units present). If he makes even one attempt to use ATEC, however, he may not attempt to use AECD (even if he has AECD capable units present). The Terrain Effects Chart lists several terrain types as "no AEC". This means that AECA may not be used by a unit attacking into such a hex or across such a hexside; and AECD may not be used by a unit when defending in such a hex. ATEC is unaffected and may be used in such a hex if the attacking force includes one or more units capable of AECA, even though AECA may not be used due to the terrain. Designers' Note: Armor effects in WW I are limited (as compared to WW II) as tank technology is new and in many respects still unreliable, and the doctrine to effectively use the tank en masse is either missing or in embryonic form. The shock of this new weapon, however, sometimes had an effect all out of proportion to its actual numbers. Thus in the game a single tank battalion added to a multi-corps attack can sometimes yield a +1.
B. Cavalry Effects Capability (CEC).
CEC represents the ability of attacking heavy cavalry units (Rule 14D1) to charge enemy units. When heavy cavalry units are included in an attack resolved on the Mobile Ground CRT, the attacker may attempt to use CEC. A maximum of 1 attempt may be made per combat. Designers' Note: Cavalry charges still worked on occasion in WW I, especially in the more open eastern and southern theaters. The tactic was still considered of such importance in 1918, that when several British cavalry units in Palestine converted back from rifles to sabers/lances it was viewed as increasing their combat ability! Note that CEC attempts against defenders in a hex where no AEC is allowed (whether due to the terrain type, weather, or presence of fortifications) are virtual suicide unless all de-fending units are unsupported and nonmachinegun units.
C. Engineer Effects Capability (EEC).
EEC represents the ability of attacking combat engineer units, assault engineer units, flamethrower units, engineer tank units, and assault engineer tank units (Rules 13D, 13E, 13F, and 14C3) to use their engineer abilities to overcome enemy fortifications. When units of these types are included in an attack on a major city or any fortification (except fieldworks), the attacker may attempt to use EEC. A maximum of 2 attempts may be made per combat. Assault engineer units, flamethrower units, and assault engineer tank units have their RE size doubled for purposes of EEC. For example, an assault engineer regiment would count as 2 REs for EEC.
D. Gas Effects Capability (GEC).
GEC represents the ability of gas heavy mortar units, gas heavy artillery units, and gas engineer units (Rules 12B8 and 13H) to release chemical gases to disorganize enemy defenses. When units of these types are included in an attack, or are defending in a hex, the owning player may attempt to use GEC. Each side may make a maximum of 1 attempt per combat. Note that gas units are never eliminated as a result of a failed attempt to use GEC. Designers' Note: Playtesters have asked why there is no bonus for first time use of gas. While it is true that the first use of gas en masse in the West at Ypres was wildly successful, the magnitude of success was also totally unexpected; and the Germans failed to exploit it properly. The bonus given for making gas attacks against Russian, Italian, and minor power units reflects the fact that these countries had gas masks of inferior quality for much of the war. For example, a British technical team in 1917 reported that nearly 70% of all Italian gas masks were effectively useless; although this was an improvement over the 90% reported a year earlier. The uselessness of Italian gas masks was also a major factor in the success of the Central Powers 1917 Caporetto offensive, during which the short opening gas attack achieved almost 100% neutralization of the Italian artillery.
E. Siege Effects Capability (SEC).
SEC represents the ability of siege engineer units (rule 13G) to use their mining and tunneling abilities to breach enemy fortifications. When siege engineer units are included in an attack on a major city or any fortification (except fieldworks), the attacker may attempt to use SEC. Special: A siege engineer unit may not make an SEC attempt during the same turn in which it moves. A maximum of 1 attempt may be made per combat. To reflect the large amount of construction material and high explosive a SEC attempt requires, the units making an SEC attempt must trace an overland supply line (Rule 11B1) to a friendly-owned Res Pt (Rule 11G) and spend the Res Pt for the attempt. Designers' Note: Siege engineers are subterranean mining units. They use specialized equipment to build tunnels (saps) under enemy lines and fortifications and then set off explosives in the tunnels to destroy the enemy emplacements above. When properly done, as for example by the British at Messines on the western front in 1917, it can devastate the defender.
Rule 11 — Supply
Supply affects the abilities of units in movement and combat. For most game functions, units operate to their full extent if they are in general supply; they operate less effectively if they are out of general supply. Furthermore, units must be in combat supply in order to bombard (Rule 12C), attack (Rule 9A), or defend at full strength.
A. Supply Lines.
The supply conditions of units depend upon the tracing of supply lines. A supply line may not be traced into an enemyoccupied/owned hex, into a hex in an enemy ZOC, unless the hex is occupied by a friendly unit, into a prohibited terrain hex, or across a prohibited terrain hexside.
B. Tracing Supply.
Units may be either in or out of general supply. Both sides check the general supply status of their units during the initial phase of each player turn. Units out of general supply at this time are out of general supply throughout the entire player turn. During the combat and reaction combat phases, units may be either in or out of combat supply. Both sides determine the combat supply status of their units participating in a combat at the start of that combat. The bombarding player (only) checks the combat supply status of his units participating in a bombardment at the start of that bombardment. Units out of combat supply at this time are out of combat supply throughout the resolution of the combat or bombardment. (Note that units have their combat supply status determined at the start of each attack or bombardment, and not at the start of the combat/reaction combat phase. It is possible that the results of earlier combats or bombardments in a phase, such as through the elimination or retreat of units, may affect the combat supply determination of later combats/bombardments in the phase.) A unit is in general supply or combat supply if a supply line can be traced from the unit to a supply source:
-
When determining general supply, a supply line may have up to three elements: overland, road, and railroad/naval; and they must be traced in that order.
-
When determining combat supply, a supply line may only have one element: overland. The Supply Line Summary (on the Ground Combat Charts and Tables Chart) lists the maximum length, in hexes, of the different elements. (Note: The maximum length of the overland and road elements can be extended by transport units, as described in Rule 14O.)
-
Overland. The overland element of a supply line must be traced to an Army HQs (Rule 14M) or to a supply source. An overland supply line may be traced through both friendly and enemy-owned hexes. Each wooded rough, mountain, forest, unfrozen swamp, wooded swamp, ravines, sand, and permafrost tundra hex counts as 2 hexes when tracing overland supply lines. When tracing an overland supply line across an unfrozen major river, fordable great river, high mountain in clear weather, karst, and high mountain pass in non-clear weather, salt desert, unfrozen narrow straits, or impassable escarpment hexside, this hexside itself counts as 1 hex against the length of the supply line. These penalties do not apply if the overland supply line is traced along a road or across a ferry. (Ferries are covered in Advanced Rule 34I).
-
Road. The road element of a supply line must be traced from an Army HQs to a friendly operational supply depot or to a supply source. (Supply depots are covered in Rule 11C1.) No more than one Army HQs may trace to the same supply depot. A road element of a supply line may only be traced along roads through friendly-owned hexes. Exception: The first hex traced may be from an Army HQs overland (per above) to a road; in this instance the hexside traced across, and hex traced into, may be of any terrain except that prohibited to a non-motorized unit.
-
Railroad/Naval. The railroad/naval element of a supply line must be traced from a friendly operational supply depot to a supply source. It may be traced along any combination of railroad and naval sub-elements.
a. Railroad Sub-Element. A railroad sub-element of a supply line may only be traced through friendly-owned hexes, and only along rail lines which may be used for rail movement by that player. It may be traced an unlimited length along highvolume rail hexes, but it may be traced through only a maximum of 7 low-volume rail hexes. Note that the low-volume rail hexes traced through need not be consecutive, or even in the same railroad sub-element. Special: If a player has less than 10 REs of overall capacity on a rail net (see Rule 7A4) at the start of a player turn he treats all rail hexes of that net as low-volume rail hexes for purposes of tracing supply (only) during that player turn. Rail breaks and rail obstruction hits (Rules 7A6 and 7A7) do not block the tracing of a railroad sub-element of a supply line.
b. Naval Sub-Element. A naval sub-element of a supply line is traced through sea hexes. It may start at any functioning, friendly-owned port and be traced through any number of sea hexes to any other functioning, friendly-owned port. (Ports are illustrated on The Great War Master Terrain Key Chart and described in detail in Rules 26B1 (Basic Naval Rules) and 30A (Advanced Naval Rules). A port is functioning unless it has maximum damage per the Port Summary (on the Naval Combat Charts and Tables Chart).) Special: Some of these ports are located inland on rivers or canals. A player may trace a naval sub-element of a supply line along inland waterway hexsides (Rule 7C1) to and from these ports so long as no hexside between the port and the open sea is blocked (Rule 7C3). Only a limited number of units may trace a naval subelement of a supply line through a specific major, standard, minor, or marginal port. (Note that an unlimited number of units may trace a naval sub-element of a supply line through a great port.) These limits are as follows:
-
60 REs: Through a specific major port.
-
30 REs: Through a specific standard port.
-
15 REs: Through a specific minor port.
-
3 REs: Through a specific marginal port. Special: Each hit of damage on a port reduces the number of REs which may trace a naval sub-element of a supply line through that port by 3 REs. When using the basic naval rules (only), players are restricted when tracing naval sub-elements of a supply line into or through sea hexes in various sea areas: 1) Only the Central Powers side may trace such a line in sea areas where the Central Powers historically had naval dominance: that is, in the Baltic Sea and the Turkish Straits, 2) Neither the Central Powers nor the Entente may trace such a line in areas where neither side had naval dominance: that is, in the Black Sea or Adriatic Sea, and
- Only the Entente side may trace such a line in sea areas where the Entente historically had naval dominance: that is, all sea areas except the Baltic Sea, Turkish Straits, Black Sea, and Adriatic Sea. When using the advanced naval rules (only), various naval considerations may stop the tracing of a naval sub-element of a supply line. These considerations are defined in the naval rules, and their impact on naval sub-elements of a supply line is summarized in Rule 34K. Designers' Note: The 6-hex overland + road limit on a supply line in good weather reflects the fact that WWI logistics moved at the speed of the horse cart (once beyond the rail heads) and centuries of military experience showed that this limited an army's effective operational radius to about 100 miles in good weather. Only in the western theater did this appreciably change during the war, with the Entente approaching something like WWII levels of motor transport in their supply services by war's end.
C. General Supply.
-
Supply Depots. Supply depot markers are used to regulate the distribution of general supply. Supply depots have two sides: operational and non-operational. (The operational side of the marker is shown on the Unit Identification Chart; the other side is the non-operational side.) During the setup phase at the start of each scenario, and during any friendly initial phases thereafter, players may activate supply depots in rail hexes of rail nets in commands they control up to the limits of their rail capacity for a net. (Rail capacity and rail nets are covered in Rules 7A4 and 7A5. Note that each supply depot a player maintains (i.e. has present) on a rail net in a turn uses 2 REs of that rail net's capacity for that turn. Further note that each time a player activates a supply depot in a rail hex of a rail net, his rail capacity on that net is permanently reduced by 1 RE. Finally, note that this means that a player may not activate a supply depot on a rail net for which he has a rail capacity of less than 3 REs.) When a supply depot is activated on a rail net, place its marker, operational side up, in any unisolated, friendly-owned rail hex of that net. Operational supply depots may form part of a supply line, but may not move; non-operational depots may move, (per below), but may not form part of a supply line. A player may flip his supply depots between their operational and non-operation sides in any friendly initial phases. A supply depot may move by strategic rail movement (only). Note that this means that it cannot move by any other form of movement (including naval transport). It requires no rail capacity for this move (as it is using its maintenance rail capacity). A supply depot may use rail movement only within rail hexes of the rail net where it was activated. Note that this means that a supply depot can never move from one rail net to another rail net. When a hex containing a supply depot becomes enemyowned, the depot there is captured (and removed from the map). Note that this supply depot capture will result in the owning player losing rail capacity and the capturing player gaining capacity on the rail net where the depot was located (per Rule 7A5f). A player may voluntarily deactivate (remove from the map) any of his supply depots at any time during an initial, movement, combat, or exploitation phase where he is the phasing player, and at any time during a reaction movement or reaction combat phase where he is the reacting (non-phasing) player. A player must immediately deactivate supply depots on a rail net when rail capacity losses (per Rules 7A5f and 7A5g) would cause his capacity on the net to drop below that necessary to maintain the depots on the net. Example: The Entente player has 17 REs of capacity on his SW Europe Standard Gauge rail net and has 7 supply depots in rail hexes of this net during a turn. These depots require 14 REs of rail capacity to maintain each turn, leaving him with 3 REs of capacity on this net for other purposes. During the turn, the Central Powers player captures 2 Entente rail marshaling yards, causing the Entente player to lose 4 REs of capacity from the net. As this capacity loss would drop the Entente player's capacity for the net to 13 REs (1 RE less than is needed to maintain his 7 supply depots), the Entente player must immediately deactivate one of his depots on the net. Designers' Note: It may seem extreme that each supply depot require 3 REs of rail cap (2 REs for maintenance, 1 lost to inefficiency) when all they do is provide general supply, but the historical record shows that the almost complete dependence on the horse in all armies of this period mandated a huge amount of fodder being moved forward by the rail system; this amounted to between a third and a half of all military rail traffic.
a. Regular General Supply Sources. Any major city (Rule 3E2) or factory in production (Rule 37B1) is a regular general supply source if it is connected (per Rule 7A1) to another major city and/or factory in production. (Note that a factory located in a major city hex is connected to that major city.) Special: A major city or factory can be used as a regular general supply source only if the enemy has not owned it. (Note: A multi-hex major city is not considered to have been enemy-owned until all hexes in the city have been enemy-owned.) Once a city or factory has been owned by the enemy, it may no longer be used as a regular general supply source, even if the player regains ownership of the city or factory.
b. Special General Supply Sources. A unit drawing general supply from a special general supply source is treated as being in general supply for the entire player turn. However, use of these sources does not negate or defer the number of turns a unit has been out of general supply. Example: A Central Powers unit has been out of general supply for one turn, and would now be starting its second turn out of general supply. However, the unit draws general supply from a Res Pt (per below): it is in general supply for the current player turn but still has started its second turn out of general supply for general supply purposes. If isolated, it would not be checked for elimination (per Rule 11F), as it is in general supply. i). Resource Points (Res Pts). Each Res Pt (Rule 11G) is a special source of general supply for all units which can trace an overland supply line to it. A Res Pt used to provide general supply in this manner is removed from play at the end of the initial phase in which it is used to provide general supply. ii). General Supply Points (GSPs). Each GSP is a special source of general supply for 1 RE of units. A unit may use friendly GSPs if it can trace an overland supply line to them. GSPs are generated at friendly operational supply depots which can trace a supply line to a regular general supply source. The number of GSPs that can be generated at a supply depot is limited by how the railroad/naval element of the supply line from the depot is traced, as follows:
-
Up to 16 GSPs: If it is traced only along high-volume rail lines and only through major or great ports.
-
Up to 8 GSPs: If it is traced along low-volume rail lines for no more than 7 hexes and/or through 1 or more standard ports in addition to major/great ports.
-
Up to 4 GSPs: If it is traced along low-volume rail lines for 8-14 hexes and/or through 1 or more minor ports in addition to major, great, and standard ports.
-
One GSP only: If it is traced along low-volume rail lines for 15 or more hexes and/or through 1 or more marginal ports. GSPs are generated in a player's initial phase, after both players have checked the general supply status of their units. (Note that this means a unit cannot draw on a GSP in the initial phase in which the point was generated.) Use status markers to denote the presence and amount of GSPs in a hex. Note: A player is not required to generate GSPs at his supply depots. Unless the player is supplying a cut off (or amphibious/airborne) force by air or naval transport, or conducting a campaign in an area with a poorly developed rail net, he will have no need for these points and will simply waste time calculating and placing his allotment. Once generated, a GSP remains in play for three initial phases: the initial phase in which it was generated and the next two initial phases. It is removed at the end of the third initial phase. For example, if a Central Powers GSP was generated in the initial phase of the Dec I 14 Central Powers player turn, it remains in play throughout the initial phase (and player turn) of the Entente Dec II 14 player turn and to the end of the initial phase of the Central Powers Dec II 14 player turn. See Rule 11H for common features of GSPs/Res Pts. iii). Improved Fortresses. Each improved fortress (Rule 15B) is a special source of general supply for up to 15 REs of units in the fortress' hex. Note that the units must be in the fortress' hex in order to use this special general supply source. If a fortress is isolated when its special general supply ability is used, the fortress may become depleted. The enemy player checks this after supply is determined by rolling a die and consulting the Ground Success Table (note that there are no modifiers to this die roll); if the attempt succeeds, the fortress is depleted. A depleted fortress has no special general supply ability; it is replenished (regains its special general supply ability) during any friendly initial phase in which a supply line can be traced from the fortress to a regular general supply source. Once a fortress has been owned by the enemy, it may no longer be used as a special general supply source, even if it is recaptured.
D. Combat Supply.
Each friendly-owned Res Pt (Rule 11G) is a source of combat supply for up to 30 or 150 REs of friendly units, as follows:
-
150 REs: Each Res Pt stacked with an active Army HQs (Rule 14M). Note that the Army HQs must be active side face up; it may not be inactive.
-
30 REs: Each Res Pt not stacked with an active Army HQs. A supply line traced to a Res Pt used to provide combat supply may only have one element: overland. A Res Pt used in this manner is removed from play at the end of the bombardment segment or combat segment of the combat phase or reaction combat phase in which it is used to provide combat supply. Note that this means that a Res Pt used to provide combat supply for bombardment in a phase cannot be used to provide combat supply for attack in same phase. Artillery units (Rule 3A2) and overstacked units (Advanced Rule 8C2) count at twice their normal RE size for purposes of combat supply (only). Note that this means that an overstacked artillery unit would count at four times its normal RE size. For example, a heavy artillery regiment (1 RE in size) would count as 2 REs for purposes of combat supply if in a normal stack or 4 REs if in an overstack. Special: Each combat and reaction combat phase, each side may have up to 2 REs of units in each command they control draw combat supply from a Res Pt without expending the Res Pt. Within each command, all of a side's units must trace a supply line to the same Res Pt; the Res Pt may not provide combat supply to any other units that phase. A side may use this ability for a maximum of 2 REs of units per command (not per Res Pt).
E. Nationality Restrictions.
A unit may not trace a supply line to an Army HQs of a different nationality, or to a regular general supply source outside its home territory, or to a resource point stacked with an active Army HQs of a different nationality. (Each nation's home territory is listed under that nation's section of Rule 41.) Exception: Units of a minor power (Rule 3B4) may also trace supply lines to regular general supply sources of nations they cooperate with. (Cooperation is covered in Rule 15E.) Example: Belgian units (and only Belgian units) may trace supply lines to Belgian Army HQs and factories and to major cities in Belgium. As the minor power of Belgium cooperates with the major power of France, Belgian units may also trace supply lines to French factories and major cities in France. When the railroad sub-element of a supply line (Rule 11B3a) is traced (in whole or in part) over a rail net controlled by a noncooperating nation, every 2 high volume rail hexes (or fraction thereof) of the foreign rail net count as 1 low-volume rail hex. Exception: Nations that cooperate may trace over each other's rail nets without restriction. (The rail nets a nation controls are listed under that nation's section of Rule 41.) Example: A British force operating in France traces a railroad sub-element of a supply line along 13 high-volume rail hexes of the NW Europe Standard Gauge Rail Net (which net is controlled by France, not Britain); the 13 hexes traced along the French rail net therefore count as 7 low-volume rail hexes.
F. Supply Effects.
A unit in general supply operates normally except its attack and defense strengths are halved. A unit, regardless of its general supply condition, always bombards, attacks and defends at full strength if it is in combat supply. A unit out of general supply has its abilities restricted, depending upon the number of consecutive turns the unit is out of general supply. A turn out of general supply consists of two consecutive player turns. (Example: An Entente unit is first judged out of general supply in the Central Powers initial phase of the Dec I 14 game turn. Its first turn out of general supply consists of the Dec I 14 Central Powers player turn and the Dec II 14 Entente player turn.) Use supply status markers to mark the turns units are out of general supply.
-
First Turn out of General Supply (U-1). On the first turn out of general supply, a unit has its attack and defense strengths quartered if (and only if) the unit is isolated; if the unit is c/m, it also has its movement rating halved (regardless of isolation status). A unit's AA strength, special combat effects capabilities, and (for a non-c/m unit) movement rating are unaffected.
-
Second and Subsequent Turns out of General Supply (U-2 or later). On the second and subsequent turns out of general supply, a unit (whether isolated or not) has its attack and defense strengths quartered, and its AA strength and movement rating halved. A unit with a ZOC has a reduced ZOC; a unit with a reduced ZOC has no ZOC. The unit is no longer capable of special combat effects; it is treated as having no capability for AECA, AECD, ATEC, CEC, EEC, GEC, or SEC.
-
Elimination from Lack of General Supply. During each initial phase, starting with the second turn out of general supply, the unit is checked for elimination if it is both out of general supply and isolated (Rule 3G) at that time. (It need not have been isolated in preceding turns.) For each unit, roll a die and modify the die roll as follows: +3 if the unit is in a major city hex (Rule 3E2) or an improved fortress (Rule 15B). -1 during frost, winter, or snow weather. (This modifier is not used if the unit is in a major city hex or an improved fortress.) Using the modified die roll, consult the Ground Success Table (on the Ground Combat Charts and Tables Chart):
-
A success means the unit survives the check and remains in play.
-
A failure means the unit is eliminated.
G. Resource Points (Res Pts).
Res Pts are used for various purposes, such as to in-crease a player's rail capacity (Rule 7A5), to provide com-bat supply (Rule 11D), and to construct various items (Rule 13). A Res Pt marker is used to show Res Pts. The owning player may freely build up or break down his Res Pt markers at any time, as long as the total number of Res Pts in each hex does not change. For example, a player may break a 2 Res Pt marker down to two 1 Res Pt markers. See Rule 11H for common features of Res Pts/GSPs.
H. Common Features of Logistics Items.
Res Pts (Rule 11G) and GSPs (Rule 11C2bii) collectively are known as logistics items. A logistics item does not count against stacking, does not have a combat strength, and does not have a ZOC. Such an item in a hex is ignored when combat or overrun occurs; it is never eliminated or retreated as a result of such actions. A player may voluntarily eliminate any of his logistics items at any time during movement, combat, and exploitation phases where he is the phasing player, and at any time during reaction movement and reaction combat phases where he is the reacting (non-phasing) player. Friendly-owned logistics items in a hex captured by the enemy may either be destroyed or captured. The player capturing the hex rolls one die for each logistics item in the hex and consults the Ground Success Table (note that there are no modifiers to this die roll): Success means the item is captured; Failure means the item is eliminated. A logistic item has no overland movement ability. Instead, a logistics item may move by rail or river movement, may be carted by ground units, and may be transported by air and/or naval units.
-
Rail/River Movement. A logistics item may move by rail (Rule 7A) by itself (note that this uses rail capacity), in which case it may move a maximum of 40/200 hexes when using operational/ strategic rail movement. A logistics item may move by river (Rule 7C) by itself (this uses river capacity), in which case it may move a maximum of 40 hexsides when using river movement.
-
Cartage by Ground Units. Each Army HQs (Rule 14M) may carry up to 9 REs of logistics items. Each transport unit (Rule 14O) may carry up to 6 REs of logistics items. All other ground units may carry general supply points (GSPs), only, up to twice their RE size. Exception: One divisional unit per side, per command, may carry a single resource point each turn in lieu of GSPs. Ground units (excepting Army HQs and transport units) carrying logistics items have MPs deducted from their movement ratings as follows:
-
Deduct 1 MP when the unit carries GSPs up to its RE size.
-
Deduct 2 MPs when the unit carries GSPs greater than its RE size.
-
Deduct 3 MPs when the unit carries a resource point. When a movement rating is to be halved or doubled, these MPs are deducted first. A unit may pick up logistics items at any time during its movement as long as its RE-limit is not exceeded; it may drop off logistics items at any time during its movement. Note that a unit can carry logistics items and still use accelerated movement. When retreating, units may carry logistics items up to their maximum limits.
-
Air and Naval Transport. Naval units may transport logistics items between ports and beaches as covered in Rule 26B (or Rule 31 when using the advanced naval rules). When using the advanced air rules, air units may transport/airdrop logistics items as covered in Rule 20H.
-
Combining forms of Movement. During each movement phase, a logistics item may move by operational rail movement or river movement (but not both) once, be carted by a ground unit once, and be transported by air or naval transport (but not both) once. Note that if a logistics item moves by strategic rail movement during a phase it cannot move by any other means during that phase.
Rule 12 — Artillery
A. Support.
All units possess an intrinsic combat ability as given by their printed combat strengths. However, certain units are unable to use their strengths fully by themselves, due to a lack of artillery (support). These units are unsupported. The following are supported units:
-
All divisional units, except: 1) those with the unsupported indicator (a hollow circle) in the upper left area of their counters, and 2) those with a printed combat strength of 0.
-
All artillery units.
-
All units with the self-supported indicator (a black dot) in the upper left area of their counters. All other units are unsupported. An unsupported unit has its combat strength halved, and its ZOC (Rule 5) reduced (if it has a ZOC), as long as it remains unsupported. A supported unit provides support to all unsupported units in the hex, unless the supported unit has the self-supported indicator. A unit with the self-supported indicator supports itself but no other units. Note that some divisions have self-supported indicators and thus cannot support other units. When defending, a unit providing support to other units must be stacked in the same hex with the units it is supporting. When attacking, a unit providing support must participate in the same attack as the units it is supporting, as well as being stacked in the same hex with them. Note: In the rules and the orders of battle, an asterisk following a unit's listed rating indicates the unit is supported, while a superscripted hollow circle following a division's listed rating indicates the division is unsupported. Examples: 1) "2-35* rifle brigade" means a supported rifle brigade with an attack strength of 2, defense strength of 3, and movement rating of 5, while "2-3-5 rifle brigade" means an unsupported 2-3-5 rifle brigade. 2) "4-7-5˚ rifle division" means an unsupported 4-7-5 rifle division.
B. Artillery Units.
Artillery units are defined in Rule 3A2 and listed on the Unit Identification Chart. Artillery units with heavy equipment count at double their RE size for transport purposes (Rule 3A3). Artillery units never have a ZOC outside the hex they occupy (Rule 5A). Artillery units generally have higher terrain movement costs than other units (see the Terrain Effects Chart) and are more susceptible to fatigue than most other units when using accel movement (Rule 6B). Artillery units have advantages when stacking (see Rule 8 and the Stacking Summary). Artillery units operate at full effectiveness only if their nation uses modern artillery tactics. Nations use these tactics as follows:
-
From Oct I 17 on: Austria-Hungary and Germany.
-
From Jul I 18 on: America, Britain, and France.
-
From Feb I 19 on: All other countries. Designers' Note: A country which uses modern artillery tactics has artillery command and control staffs integrated at each command level, artillery units trained in effective massed indirect fire control techniques as the norm, and regularly utilizes survey/mapping techniques to tie its artillery units to a common grid. Artillery units have their attack strengths halved for purposes of overrun (Rule 6F) and combat (Rule 9) if their nation does not use modern artillery tactics. Note that the ability of artillery units to bombard (Rule 12C) is unaffected by their nation's use, or nonuse, of modern artillery tactics. Artillery units do not defend with their full strength unless the number of non-artillery REs in their hex is at least two times the number of artillery REs there. Exception: If a nation uses modern artillery tactics, its artillery units do not defend with their full strength unless the number of non-artillery REs in the hex is at least equal to the number of artillery REs there. All artillery units in excess of this number defend with a total strength of the lower of the following values:
-
1, or
-
the artillery units' modified (per supply status, terrain, etc.) defense strength (see Rule 9A). Example #1: During the Feb I 16 turn (at which time no nation is using modern artillery tactics), a player has three 7-85 artillery regiments (3 REs) and one 3-4-5 rifle brigade (2 REs) defending in a hex. Since only two non-artillery REs are in the hex, only one artillery regiment may defend using its full defense strength. The other two artillery units defend with a total strength of 1. Thus, the total strength of the hex is 13. Example #2: A player has three German units defending in a hex during the Feb I 18 turn (at which time Germany is using modern artillery tactics): one 1-2-5 rifle regiment (in general and combat supply), one 5-7-5 artillery regiment (also in general and combat supply), and one 2-6 artillery regiment (out of combat supply and out of general supply long enough to have its defense strength quartered). Since only 1 RE of non-artillery units is in the hex, only one artillery regiment may defend using its full defense strength (and the player chooses the supplied 57-5 regiment). The other artillery regiment has a modified defense strength of 0.5, which is less than 1, and therefore defends with a total strength of 0.5. Thus the total strength of the hex is 9.5. Artillery units do not attack with their full strength unless the number of non-artillery REs participating in the attack is at least two times the number of artillery REs. Exception: If a nation uses modern artillery tactics, its artillery units do not attack with their full strength unless the number of non-artillery REs participating in the attack is at least equal to the number of artillery REs there. At all times, all artillery units in excess of the artillery to non-artillery ratio attack with a total strength of the lower of the following values:
- Field Artillery. Field artillery, motorized field artillery, mountain field artillery, light mortar, motorized light mortar, and horse artillery units are field artillery. Field artillery has its attack strength modified as follows:
-
Halved when they bombard (Rule 12C).
-
Halved when they attack a hex containing an improved great fortress, improved fortress (new), or a major city, unless the hex also contains an improved fortress (old). Designers' Note: Field artillery (2-3" guns) is light and very portable, but the small shell size is not very effective against most fortifications (except the old ones built before high explosive shells came into use).
- Heavy Artillery. Heavy artillery, self-propelled heavy artillery, mountain heavy artillery, gas heavy artillery, heavy artillery training, heavy mortar, and gas heavy mortar units are heavy artillery. Prior to the Feb I 17 game turn, a non-German heavy artillery unit that moves (by any method of movement) in a movement or reaction movement phase is disrupted (Rule 3A5) upon completion of its movement. Note that German heavy artillery is not disrupted following movement, nor is non-German heavy artillery disrupted following movement on or after Feb I 17. Heavy artillery has its attack strength modified as follows:
-
Doubled when they attack or bombard a hex containing an improved fortress (old), even if the hex also contains a major city.
-
Halved when they attack or bombard a hex containing an improved great fortress. Designers' Note: Heavy artillery (4-6" guns) is the work-horse of the artillery family; it is effective against all but the heaviest of fortifications. During the early/mid-war years, most countries' heavy artillery was obsolescent (or obsolete); which, when combined with the primitive fire direction techniques then in use, made it difficult to use the bigger guns effectively except from prepared positions. German heavy artillery was practically all new (or recently refurbish-ed) at the start of the war. Also, German fire control procedures were more flexible/responsive, with corps able to call on and receive army-level artillery support in a matter of hours (instead of the days required for most others).
- Siege Artillery. Siege artillery and siege mortar units are siege artillery. A siege artillery unit that moves (by any method of movement) in a movement or reaction movement phase is disrupted (Rule 3A5) upon completion of its movement. Siege artillery has its attack strength modified as follows:
-
Tripled when they attack or bombard a hex containing an improved fortress (old), even if the hex also contains a major city.
-
Doubled when they attack or bombard a hex containing an improved fortress (new) or a major city, unless the hex also contains an improved fortress (old). Siege artillery units may not advance after combat. Designers' Note: WW I Siege artillery (7-10" guns) primarily consisted of converted naval or coast defense guns, which, because of their heavier shells and increased muzzle velocities, were better able to penetrate fortifications. However, their greater weight, slower sustained rates of fire, ad hoc nature of their land mountings, and non-standard fire control arrangements also made it difficult to use them to full effectiveness except in set piece battles.
- Heavy Siege Artillery. A heavy siege artillery unit that moves (by any method of movement) in a movement or reaction movement phase is disrupted or badly disrupted (Rule 3A5) upon completion of its movement as follows:
-
Badly Disrupted: If the date is prior to Feb I 17, and the unit is not Austro-Hungarian or German.
-
Disrupted: If the date is Feb I 17 or later, and the unit is not Austro-Hungarian or German.
-
Disrupted: If the unit is Austro-Hungarian/German (regardless of the date). Heavy siege artillery units have their attack strengths modified as follows:
-
Quadrupled when they attack or bombard a hex containing an improved fortress (old), even if the hex also contains a major city.
-
Tripled when they attack or bombard a hex containing an improved fortress (new) or a major city, unless the hex also contains an improved fortress (old).
-
Doubled when they attack or bombard a hex containing an improved great fortress. Heavy siege artillery units may not advance or retreat after combat. Designers' Note: Heavy siege artillery (11" and up guns) is even better at attacking fortifications than siege artillery; but it is extremely difficult to use effectively in mobile combat due to the extensive site preparation and set up times required. German and Austro-Hungarian heavy siege guns, especially the excellent 30and 42-cm guns, were built expressly for siege warfare; consequently they were much more mobile (they broke down into loads that could be reassembled in hours instead of days, and each load was pulled by tractors instead of horses) than anything the Entente put into the field until late in the war.
-
Coast Artillery. When involved in ground combat, treat coast artillery units the same as heavy artillery. When using the advanced naval rules, coast artillery units may engage naval units in naval combat (Rule 33B). Designers' Note: Although most coast artillery units are made up of guns of siege (or heavy siege) artillery caliber, they are treated as heavy artillery in ground combat since: 1) their crews usually do not have the training/equipment to properly mesh with the regular artillery command and control system; and 2) their physical siting and immobile nature reduces their effectiveness versus land targets.
-
Mortars. Light mortar, motorized light mortar, heavy mortar, gas heavy mortar, and siege mortar units are mortars. As listed on the Terrain Effects Chart, mortar units are not halved when attacking into mountain hexes or across mountain hexsides. Designers' Note: Mortars can engage targets on reverse slopes better than any other kind of artillery.
-
Long Range Artillery. A long-range artillery unit is any artillery unit with an attack/bombardment range of two or more hexes. (An artillery unit with a range of 2 or more has its range printed in the upper left-hand corner of its counter, as shown on the Unit Identification Chart. (Note that when a "1" is printed in the upper left-hand corner of an artillery unit's counter, this indicates the unit has an antiaircraft (AA) strength of 1, not a range of 1.) When a long range artillery unit fires at 2-hex or greater range, its attack strength is halved for combat (but not for bombardment); it is not subject to any combat results; may not advance after combat; and may not be included in exchange calculations. Long range artillery may not attack (it may bombard) by itself when firing at 2-hex or greater range; it may attack in conjunction with other units adjacent to the defending hex. When firing at 1-hex range (i.e. adjacent to the defending hex), long range artillery is subject to combat results. Designers' Note: Long range artillery includes any gun types which can range 25,000 yards (about 14.5 miles) or more. Note that most WW I artillery could only range 7-15,000 yards (4-8 miles). A few gun types could reach 50,000 yards (29 miles) and they have a 3 hex range in the game. The special purpose guns built by Germany to shell Paris could range a whopping 74 miles (5 hexes).
-
Gas Artillery. Gas heavy mortar and gas heavy artillery units are gas artillery. When a player includes gas artillery in a combat or bombardment (Rule 12C), he may attempt to use gas effects capability (GEC) to modify that combat or bombardment (both a die roll and a column shift are possible) as described in Rule 10.
C. Bombardment.
During the bombardment segment of the combat phase (see the Master Sequence of Play Summary Chart), both sides' eligible artillery units may use their attack strengths (as modified by disruption (Rule 3A5), bombarding from an overstack (Advanced Rule 8C2b), terrain (per the Terrain Effects Chart), general and combat supply status (Rule 11F), artillery type (Rule 12B), and any special rules) to bombard, attempting to reduce enemy fortifications and disrupt enemy units prior to combat being resolved. Note that bombardments may not be made during the reaction combat phase. In each bombardment segment, the phasing player resolves all his bombardments, and then the non-phasing player resolves all his bombardments. All phasing artillery units are eligible to bombard during the combat phase. Non-phasing artillery units are eligible to bombard in a combat phase only if their hex is bombard-ed by the enemy during the phase (this bombardment by the nonphasing player is known as counterbombardment). Bombarding units (both phasing and non-phasing) must be in the zone of influence (ZOI) of an Army HQs or their attack strengths are halved for bombardment. (Army HQs and ZOIs are covered in Rule 14M.) Units which bombard in the bombardment segment of a combat phase have their combat strengths halved in the following combat segment; further, gas artillery units (Rule 12B8) used to make GEC attempts during a bombardment segment, may not be used to make GEC attempts in the immediately following combat segment.
- General Restrictions. The following general restrictions apply to bombardment:
-
No unit may bombard more than once per combat phase.
-
No unit may bombard into a prohibited terrain hex or across a prohibited terrain hexside.
-
Each bombardment must be against the units occupying a single hex. Two or more hexes may not be attacked in a single bombardment. Units in the same hex may bombard into different hexes, but even in this case each bombarded hex requires a separate bombardment
-
A unit may not split its bombardment strength, such as to bombard more than one hex.
-
The stacking limit of the bombarded hex limits the number of units that may bombard the hex from adjacent hexes (see Rule 8B).
-
Procedure. A bombardment consists of one or more artillery units bombarding a hex that contains enemy units. Bombarding units may bombard individually, or some (up to all) may combine their attack strengths to make a single bombardment. An artillery division (Rule 12B9) may bombard as a single unit, or its component artillery units may bombard individually; if they bombard individually, the combat strength modifier of the Art XX HQs is ignored. Use the Bombardment Table (on the Ground Combat Charts and Tables Chart) to resolve bombardments. For each bombardment, use the bombardment strength column that most closely matches (without exceeding) the bombardment strength of the bombarding units. Roll one die and modify the number rolled with the appropriate modifiers on the Bombardment Table. Cross-index the bombardment strength column with the modified die roll to obtain a result. Possible results are: M (miss, no effect), H (1 bombardment hit), 2H (2 bombardment hits), 3H (3 bombardment hits), and 4H (4 bombardment hits). Special: If the bombardment is made on the 50 or 100+ bombardment strength column against a hex containing a fort, improved fort, or fortress (of any type), the bombardment may affect the fortification in the hex in addition to enemy units there. In this instance check first to see if the bombardment results in the reduction of the fortification in the hex before checking the effect of the bombardment on the enemy units. (Note that if the fortification in the hex is reduced it may change the die roll modifiers applied when the player checks the effect of the bombardment on the enemy units, but it does not affect the strength of the bombarding units.) Roll one die and consult the bombardment table, but the only modifiers applied to the die roll in this in-stance are those for tactical reconnaissance and weather. If the result includes an asterisk, the fortification in the hex is reduced 1 level (as described in Rule 15B); all other results have no effect on the fortification in the hex. Then determine the effect the bombardment has on the enemy units in the hex. Use the die roll already rolled, but now apply all modifiers. Example: A player makes a bombardment during clear weather against a woods hex containing enemy units and an improved fortress (new) using a bombardment strength of 102. He resolves the bombardment on the 100+ column. As this bombardment potentially can reduce the fortress, he checks for this first. He rolls a 4, and modifies it to a 5 as he has tactical recon (Note that the minuses specified for bombarding an improved fortress (new) and a woods hex are ignored.) Crossindexing the modified die roll of 5 with the 100+ column yields a result of "4H*". As this result includes an asterisk, the fortress is reduced (and becomes unimproved per Rule 15B). The player then checks for the effect the 100+ bombardment has on the enemy units in the hex. (Note that the bombardment strengths of the bombarding units are not recalculated due to the fortress' reduction.) He uses the die roll of 4 already rolled, but now applies the -1 specified for bombarding an unimproved fortress (note that this would have been a -2 had the fortress not been reduced) and the -1 specified for bombarding a woods hex), in addition to the +1 for tactical recon. The net die roll modifier is, therefore, a -1, which modifies the die roll to 3. Cross-indexing the modified die roll with the 100+ column, yields 3 bombardment hits. Designers' Note: The +1 applied to bombardments against various nationalities (as shown on the bombardment table) reflects those nations tendency to keep their front line trenches packed with troops. Although this did result in more riflemen to repel an enemy attack, it also significantly increased casualties from enemy artillery fire. Note that Great Britain and Italy kept this as part of their tactical doctrine until almost the end of the war!
-
When an undisrupted divisional unit receives 2 bombardment hits, it is disrupted.
-
When a disrupted divisional unit receives 2 bombardment hits, it is badly disrupted. Against brigades/brigade groupings/American cadres (for convenience these are termed large non-divisional units):
-
When an undisrupted large non-divisional unit receives 1 bombardment hit, it is disrupted.
-
When a disrupted large non-divisional unit receives 1 bombardment hit, it is badly disrupted. Against all other units (for convenience these are termed small non-divisional units):
-
When an undisrupted or disrupted small non-divisional unit receives 1 bombardment hit, it is badly disrupted. Special: The defender may not allocate bombardment hits to units with a defense strength of zero; neither side may allocate bombardment hits to badly disrupted units; and neither side may allocate bombardment hits to units in an overstack unless all regularly stacked units in the hex are badly disrupted. Note: If all units in the bombarded hex are badly disrupted and bombardment hits remain to be allocated, the excess hits are ignored. Example: The CP player bombards a hex containing six Entente units (one Corps HQs, one 8-11-5 division, one 6-9-5 division, one brigade (which is already disrupted), one regiment, and one battalion) and achieves 5 bombardment hits. The CP player will allocate 3 of these hits and the Entente player will allocate 2 of these hits. The CP player allocates 2 hits to the 8-11-5 division, disrupting it; and allocates 1 hit to the already disrupted brigade, badly disrupting it. The Entente player allocates 1 hit to the 6-9-5 division, which has no effect on the division; and allocates 1 hit to the battalion, badly disrupting it. Note that the Entente player may not allocate hits to the Corps HQs as that unit has a defense strength of zero.
- Air & Naval Bombardment. Air and naval units may bombard as follows:
a. Basic Rules. Monitor and gunboat naval units (the only non-transport naval units used with the basic naval rules) are treated as water-only artillery units (per Rule 26A) and bombard normally. Air points (described in section B17A of the basic air rules) may be assigned to bombardment missions, with each air point functioning the same as an artillery unit, except air points are counted at half strength for bombardment. For example, 4 air points assigned to a bombardment mission would have a bombardment strength of 2.
b. Advanced Rules. Air units may fly aerial bombardment missions as described in Rule20G2j. Naval units may bombard as described in Rule 33C.
- Terror Bombardment. A player may bombard enemyowned major city hexes in nations which have joined his opponent's side. This is conducted in the same manner as regular bombardment except that terror hits (vice bombardment hits) result; and each terror hit reduces by 1 point the morale of the nation in which the bombarded city is located. (Morale is covered in Rule 40.) Designers' Note: The historical shelling of Paris by long-range artillery was terror bombardment.
Rule 13 — Engineers
A. Construction Engineers.
Construction engineers and other construction units may construct, demolish, and repair facilities, as described be-low. To do so they must be in general supply (Rule 11C). All construction, demolition, and repair takes place during initial and movement phases (only); no such activities may be undertaken during any combat, reaction movement, reaction combat, or exploitation phases. Also note that no construction unit can perform any construction, demolition, or repair activities while using accel movement (Rule 6B).
- Construction. Construction units may build, upgrade, and improve fortifications and extend roads. (Fortifications are covered in Rule 15B.)
a. Fieldworks. A construction unit may build field-works in any hex except prohibited terrain or a hex already containing any other type of fortification. Fieldworks cost 2 MPs to build. Once built, fieldworks remain on the map only if a construction unit remains in its hex at all times to maintain them. (The unit need not be the one that built the fieldworks, does not spend any MPs for maintenance of the fieldworks, and may spend MPs to perform other tasks in the hex.) If there is no eligible unit in the hex, remove the fieldworks from play as they have been abandoned.
b. Entrenchments. A construction unit may upgrade the fieldworks in a hex to an entrenchment. It costs 4 MPs to make this upgrade in clear or rough terrain and 6 MPs in any other terrain. Simply substitute an entrenchment for the fieldworks when the upgrade is complete. (Note that a player may build fieldworks in a hex and then upgrade them to an entrenchment in the same movement phase.) Entrenchments must be maintained in the same manner as fieldworks.
c. Forts. A construction unit may upgrade an entrenchment to a fort. The unit begins the upgrade during the initial phase. To begin the upgrade, the owning player must trace an overland supply line (per Rule 11B) from the construction unit to a Res Pt (Rule 11G) and spend it for the upgrade. (Place a fort under construction marker on the unit to show the construction.) It takes one game turn make this upgrade in clear or rough terrain and two game turns in any other terrain. For example, if the upgrade of an entrenchment to a fort in a woods hex is begun during the Central Powers initial phase of the Jul I 15 game turn, then it will be completed in the Central Powers initial phase of the Aug I 15 turn. (When completed, flip the fort marker to its completed side; and remove the entrenchment marker from the hex.) If the construction unit leaves the hex at any time before the upgrade is completed, remove the fort under construction marker from the map. Note that if the construction is not completed, for any reason, the Res Pt spent for the construction is not recovered.
d. Improved Forts. A construction unit may upgrade a fort to an improved fort. This is done in the same manner as upgrading an entrenchment to a fort, except it takes two game turns to make this upgrade in clear or rough terrain and three game turns in any other terrain. (Place an improved fort under construction marker on the unit when the construction begins. When completed, flip the improved fort marker over to its completed side; and remove the fort marker from the hex).
e. Fortresses. A construction unit may improve the condition of a fortress, changing its status from unimproved to improved. (Note that improved forts cannot be up-graded to fortresses.) This is done in the same manner as upgrading an entrenchment to a fort except it takes 6 months (12 game turns) to complete this improvement and 6 Res Pts (1 per month) must be spent for the construction. Designers' Note: Fieldworks represent quick improvements to take advantage of local terrain (falling trees to block roads, digging hasty trenches, etc.). Upgrading field-works to entrenchments represents deepening and enlarging the hasty trenches, adding barbed wire, and tying them into a coordinated system. Upgrading entrenchments to forts represents adding minefields, concrete bunkers and other strongpoints to the trench system, and deepening the depth of the defense with multiple lines. Upgrading forts to improved forts represents adding subterranean fortified positions capable of sheltering entire battalions and regiments at a time, as well as adding numerous static heavy weapons to the bunker system. Improved fortresses represent fortified camps 10-20 miles in diameter, with 360 degree defenses, multiple fort lines with numerous static machineguns and artillery pieces, and a central bastion. Unimproved fortresses have either been stripped of their MGs and artillery or have had their fort rings allowed to fall into disrepair. Several unimproved fortresses were improved during the war (including Verdun and Salonika). However, during the war no nation could afford to divert the resources construction of a new fortress would require. (Fortresses took 5-10 years to build in peacetime and required the expenditure of 15-20 resource points each.)
f. Roads. A construction unit may extend a road, moving the roadhead forward into an adjacent hex. A road may be extended into any adjacent hex except prohibited terrain, and across any adjacent hexside except major river, great river, high mountain, karst, high mountain pass, all-sea, all-lake, narrow straits, impassable escarpment, and prohibited. The construction unit begins the extension during the initial phase and must occupy the roadhead hex. The hex the road is to be extended into must be friendly-owned and in general supply throughout the construction. To begin the extension, the owning player must trace an overland supply line (per Rule 11B) from the construction unit to a Res Pt (Rule 11G) and check to see if the construction requires the Res Pt's expenditure. He checks for this by rolling a die; if the result is 1 or 2 the Res Pt must be spent for the construction; if the result if 3, 4, 5, or 6 no expenditure is required. Exception: If the road is being extended into a mountain hex, or into any hex across a mountain or river/canal hexside, a Res Pt must always be spent for the construction. (Place a road under construction marker on the unit to show the construction.) It takes 4 game turns to extend a road into a wooded rough, mountain, forest, swamp, wooded swamp, ravines, or sand hex, or into any hex type across a mountain or river/canal hex-side; in all other cases it takes 2 game turns. (When the road extension is completed, remove the road under construction marker and advance the roadhead marker 1 hex.) Designers' Note: Major road building projects were completed during the war in Albania, the Caucasus, Egypt, Greece, Mesopotamia, and Palestine.
g. Restrictions on Construction. Certain types of construction work may not be undertaken before a specified date, as follows: Restrictions on Central Powers Construction:
-
Prior to the Oct II 14 game turn, construction units may not upgrade fieldworks to entrenchments.
-
Prior to the Feb I 15 game turn, construction units may not upgrade entrenchments to forts.
-
Prior to the Feb I 17 game turn, construction units may not upgrade forts to improved forts. Restrictions on Entente Construction:
-
Prior to the Oct II 14 game turn, construction units may not upgrade fieldworks to entrenchments.
-
Prior to the Feb I 16 game turn, construction units may not upgrade entrenchments to forts.
-
Prior to the Feb I 18 game turn, construction units may not upgrade forts to improved forts. Some nations have additional restrictions on construction as described in Rule 41 (Nations). Designers' Note: Before the horrendous casualties of 1914 forced both sides to change their doctrine, construction of fortifications by active armies was limited. Field-works to take tactical advantage of terrain while you were temporarily on the defensive were OK, but anything more extensive than that was considered a sign of poor offensive spirit and actively discouraged by the high command. After all, the purpose of the active army was to attack the foe, not cower in fortifications. Even after both sides began entrenching in earnest, this philosophy lingered on. Now it was OK to build entrenchments (as to not do so was suicidal), but to build any fortification system more elaborate was still discouraged by the high command. As the deadliness of the trench warfare increased, however, the tendency of the front-line units was to expand the trench systems no matter what the high command wanted. Historically, the Entente lagged behind the Central Powers in constructing each new class of fortifications. For example, by late 1916 most of the German west front line was effectively forts, while almost the entire Entente line was still entrenchments. This was mostly due to the prevailing Entente doctrine, which stressed offensive spirit over everything else. The Italians carried this attitude to its most ridiculous extreme: At the time of the Caporetto disaster in late 1917 their front-line fortifications still mostly consisted of a single trench line (i.e. fieldworks)!
- Demolition. Construction units may demolish port capacity, bridges, and certain types of fortifications. Note that they may also break rail lines (per Rule 7A6). A construction unit may demolish an improved fort, fort, or entrenchment by spending 8 MPs in the fortification's hex. Note that they cannot demolish fortresses, and that fieldworks are demolished simply by abandoning them. Treat demolished fortifications as follows:
-
Replace a demolished improved fort or fort with an entrenchment.
-
Remove a demolished entrenchment from the map. A construction unit may demolish a bridge by spending 4 MPs in either hex adjacent to the bridge to do so. The bridge must be friendly owned or unowned. (Bridges are covered in Rule 15A1). A construction unit may demolish the capacity of a port by spending MPs in the port's hex; for every 3 MPs spent, the port receives one hit of damage. (Ports are covered in Basic Rule 26B1/Advanced Rule 30A.)
-
Repair. A construction unit may repair broken rail lines and damaged ports and clear obstructed rail lines. In all cases, the general procedure is the same: the unit must spend a number of MPs in the hex of the item to be repaired. It costs a construction unit 6 MPs to remove one hit from a port, 4 MPs to remove a hit from a broken rail line, and 2 MPs to clear an obstructed rail line in a hex. Special: If the rail line in a hex is both broken and obstructed, the break must be repaired before the obstruction can be cleared. A construction unit may repair a demolished bridge. A bridge may be repaired only if the player owns both hexes adjacent to the bridge. Repairing a bridge across a river/canal costs the construction unit 8 MPs. Repairing a bridge across a major/great river costs the construction unit 16 MPs, and it must trace an overland supply line to a Res Pt which must be expended for the repair.
-
Weather. Poor weather (mud, frost, winter, and snow) affects the abilities of construction units. (Weather is covered in Rule 36.) All MP construction, demolition, and repair costs are doubled. For example, 8 MPs are required to repair (remove a hit from) a broken rail line in poor weather. All construction, demolition, and repair costs based on turns are doubled. For example, 2 turns are required to build a fort in clear terrain during poor weather. Note: When the weather changes from good to poor (or vice versa) while a construction project is underway, only the remaining part of the work is affected by the change in weather. Example: A construction unit spends 3 MPs during good weather to partially repair a demolished bridge across a canal. As it costs 8 MPs to repair this bridge in good weather, 5 (8 - 3) MPs of work remain. The next turn the weather turns poor, doubling the MP cost of the remaining work to 10 (5 x 2) MPs. The construction unit spends 4 MPs, leaving 6 (10 - 4) MPs of work. The next turn sees the return of good weather, halving the MP cost of the remaining work to 3 MPs. The construction unit spends 3 MPs, completing the repair of the bridge at a total cost of 10 MPs spread over three turns.
-
Quick Engineering. A player may use two construction units in conjunction in order to speed construction, demolition, and repair. The construction units must be stacked together at the time their engineering abilities are to be used together. In this case, each construction unit pays half the engineering cost. For example, when two construction units are used to repair a rail line, each spends 2 MPs (half of 4) during good weather or 4 MPs (half of 8) in poor weather. When two construction units are used to build an item requiring one turn to build, then each unit spends one half its movement allowance for the construction. For example, if two 1-2-5 construction units are used to upgrade an entrenchment to a fort in a rough hex during clear weather, then each unit spends 2 1/2 MPs for the construction. Engineering costs cannot be further decreased, even if the player uses three or more construction units in conjunction, two construction units plus civilian labor (Rule 13A6), or any other combination of construction abilities. A brigade-sized construction unit (i.e., any construction unit with the brigade or brigade grouping size designation) is treated as two construction units for the purposes of quick engineering. A division-sized construction unit (i.e. any construction unit with the division or divisional grouping size designation) is treated for construction purposes (only) as if it were two construction brigades. Further, such a unit may use its construction ability in the hex it occupies and/or in any adjacent (Rule 3E5) friendly-owned hexes in general supply. Note: Construction of a fort, improved fort, or fortress must always be begun in the initial phase, even if quick engineering is used.
B. Railroad Engineers.
Railroad engineers are specialized construction units that may only perform the following engineering tasks:
-
Rail Breaks. A railroad engineer unit may break a rail line in a hex (per Rule 7A6) by spending 1 MP. (Note that all other units must spend 2 MPs to do this.)
-
Repair. A railroad engineer may repair a broken rail line or clear an obstructed rail line in the same manner as a construction engineer (Rule 13A3) except that it costs 3 MPs to remove a hit from a broken rail line, and 1 MP to clear an obstructed rail line in a hex. (Note that all other construction units must spend 4 MPs to repair a rail break and 2 MPs to clear a rail line.) When using quick engineering (Rule 13A5), the reduced MP cost applies even if only one of the units is a railroad engineer.
-
Railroad Engineering. Railroad engineer units may regauge, upgrade, and extend rail lines; collectively these tasks are known as railroad engineering. Railroad engineering is under the same general restrictions as construction (per the introductory paragraph to Rule 13A): That is, all railroad engineering takes place during initial and movement phases (only), the units performing railroad engineering must be in general supply (Rule 11C), and no unit may perform railroad engineering while it is using accel movement (Rule 6B). Poor weather affects railroad engineering in the same manner as construction (see Rule 13A4). Quick engineering and civilian labor (Rules 13A5 and 13A6) may be used in conjunction with railroad engineering. For quick engineering, only one railroad engineer unit need be present; the other unit may be a construction unit.
a. Regauging Rail Lines. A railroad engineer may regauge a cleared and unbroken rail line, changing it from one gauge to another, in the same manner as a broken rail line is repaired except that it costs 2 MPs to regauge a rail line. (Use rail gauge changepoint markers to show where rail lines change gauge.)
b. Upgrading Rail Lines. A railroad engineer may upgrade a low volume rail line to high volume. The railroad engineer unit begins the upgrade during the initial phase. To begin the upgrade, the owning player must trace an overland supply line (per Rule 11B) from the railroad engineer unit to a Res Pt (Rule 11G) and expend it for the upgrade. (Place a railroad construction marker on the unit to show the upgrade is in progress.) It takes two game turns to make this upgrade. (When completed, flip the railroad upgrade marker to its completed side.)
c. Extending Rail Lines. A railroad engineer may extend a rail line, moving the railhead forward in the same manner as a construction unit extends a road (Rule 13A1f), except that: 1) The extension always requires the expenditure of a Res Pt (increase this to two Res Pts if the rail line extension is into a mountain hex, or into any hex across a mountain or river/canal hexside), and 2) It takes eight turns to extend a rail line into a wooded rough, mountain, forest, swamp, wooded swamp, ravines, or sand hex, or into any hex type across a mountain or river/canal hexside; in all other cases it takes four game turns. (Place a railroad construction marker on the unit when the extension begins. When completed, remove the railroad construction marker and advance the railhead marker one hex.)
- Rail Capacity Deterioration. Railroad engineers can reduce rail capacity deterioration (per Rule 7A5f). Designers' Note: Historically, the most important function of the railroad engineers quickly became that of rail capacity deterioration reduction. This explains, for example, why the Entente railroad engineer units on the western front continuously increased in number (reaching 30+ regimental equivalents by late 1918), while the southern front with its numerous rail construction projects never saw more than four Entente railroad engineer regiments present at any point during the war.
C. Port Construction Engineers.
Port construction engineers are specialized construction units that may only perform the following engineering tasks:
-
Port Demolition/Repair. A port construction engineer may demolish and repair the capacity of a port in the same manner as a construction engineer (Rules 13A2, 13A3) except that it costs 2 MPs for demolition and 4 MPs for repair. (Note that all other construction units must spend 3 MPs for demolition and 6 MPs for repair.) When using quick engineering (Rule 13A5), the reduced MP cost applies even if only one of the units is a port construction engineer.
-
Port Upgrades. A port construction engineer may upgrade a minor or standard port, increasing it to a major port; or upgrade the port capacity of a major or great port by 6 REs. The port construction engineer begins the up-grade during the initial phase, must be in the hex of the port to be upgraded, and must be in general supply (Rule 11C). To begin the upgrade, the owning player must trace an overland supply line (per Rule 11B) from the port construction engineer to a Res Pt and expend it for the upgrade. (Place a port upgrade construction marker on the unit to show the upgrade is in progress.) It takes 12 game turns to make this upgrade. (When completed, remove the port upgrade construction marker, and flip the port construction engineer unit over to its zero-movement side. The port construction engineer unit is now dedicated to maintaining the port's upgraded status.) Poor weather affects port up-grades in the same manner as construction (Rule 13A4). Quick engineering and civilian labor (Rules 13A5 and 13A6) may be used in conjunction with port upgrades. For quick engineering, only one port construction engineer unit need be present; the other unit may be a construction unit. A port construction engineer may abandon its port upgrade maintenance duty during any friendly initial phase (merely flip the unit over to its mobile side). The upgraded port immediately reverts to its original status. Designers' Note: The Entente upgraded several ports during the war: Calais (standard to major) to better supply British units in Flanders, Le Treport (actually St. Valery-sur-Somme, but in same hex) (minor to major) to handle supplies going up the Somme river, Moudhros (minor to major) on Lemnos Island in the Aegean to supply the Gallipoli operations, Salonika (standard to major) which became the major Balkan supply base, and Basra (minor to major) to supply the Mesopotamian campaign.
D. Combat Engineers.
Combat engineers are construction units. Combat engineers also have the following abilities:
-
When they are included in an attack on a major city or any fortification (except fieldworks), the attacker may attempt to use the engineering effects capability (EEC) of his combat engineers to modify the combat resolution die roll as described in Rule 10.
-
They are automatically supported (Rule 12A) when attacking into or defending in a hex containing a major city or fortification (except fieldworks). When supported in this fashion, a combat engineer unit cannot provide support to other units.
E. Assault Engineers.
Assault engineers are not construction units. They have the combat abilities of combat engineers. Assault engineers also have the following abilities:
-
When they attack into a hex containing a major city or an improved fortress (of any type), their RE size is doubled for purposes of EEC (Rule 10C).
-
When they attack into a hex containing an improved fortress (old) their attack strength is tripled (even if the hex also contains a major city).
-
When they attack into a hex containing an improved fortress (new) or a major city (unless the hex also contains an improved fortress (old)), their attack strength is doubled.
-
When they defend in a hex containing a major city, improved fortress (of any type), or improved fort, their defense strength is doubled. For example, a 1-2-5 assault engineer regiment attacking a major city hex would have an attack strength of 2 and would be counted as 2 REs for EEC.
F. Flamethrower Units.
Flamethrower units are not construction units. They have the combat abilities of assault engineers. In addition, the inclusion of a flamethrower unit in an attempt to use engineering effects capability (EEC) increases the chance of success (modifies the die roll by +1), as shown on the Ground Success Table.
G. Siege Engineers.
Siege engineers are not construction units. Siege engineers have the following abilities:
-
When they are included in an attack on a major city or any fortification (except fieldworks), the attacker may attempt to use the siege effects capability (SEC) of his siege engineers to modify the combat (both a die roll and a column shift are possible) as described in Rule 10.
-
When they defend in a hex containing a major city, improved fortress (of any type), or improved fort, their defense strength is doubled.
H. Gas Engineers.
Gas engineers are not construction units. When gas engineers are included in a combat, players which have them present may attempt to use the gas effects capability (GEC) of their gas engineers to modify the combat (both a die roll and a column shift are possible) as described in Rule 10. Designers' Note: Gas engineers represent two types of units. The first type positions cylinders of poison gas along the front line, waits for a favorable wind, and then opens them up. The second type uses a variety of projectors (compressed air, etc.) to loft gas bombs into the enemy front-line trenches.
I. Divisional Engineers.
Divisional units with a printed attack strength of 5 or more have divisional engineers. Divisional engineers have limited construction abilities as follows:
-
From the beginning of the game, they may build fieldworks and maintain fieldworks/entrenchments.
-
From the Jun I 15 game turn, they may upgrade fieldworks to entrenchments. Special: A divisional engineer may maintain fieldworks and entrenchments even when at cadre strength. Note that divisional engineers have no other construction, demolition, or repair abilities. All construction MP costs are doubled when divisional engineers are used. A divisional unit may use quick engineering, but only in conjunction with another divisional engineer. A divisional engineer may not use civilian labor. Designers' Note: Until the summer of 1915 most divisions rarely had more than 1 company of engineers and had only the most basic of engineering equipment.
Rule 14 — Special Ground Units
A. Combination Unit Types.
Certain units combine two different unit type symbols and have the abilities of both. For example, a mountain light rifle unit is both a light unit (Rule 14E) and a mountain unit (Rule 14F).
B. Restricted Movement Units.
Restricted movement units never count against stacking limits (Rule 8A).
-
Rail-Only Units. The only ground movement allowed for a unit with a printed movement rating of "R' is rail movement. This rail movement uses no rail capacity (rail-only units have intrinsic locomotives and rolling stock). In combat, it may attack an adjacent hex per the standard rules; however, it may not advance after combat. A rail-only unit required to retreat may retreat only to a hex it could enter using rail movement. If there is no such hex available, the unit is eliminated instead. Note that if a rail-only unit is in a hex when the rail line is broken, the unit may not leave the hex until after the line is repaired. If required to retreat from such a hex due to combat, the rail-only unit is eliminated instead. A rail-only unit cannot use air transport (Rule 20H). A rail-only unit can use naval transport (Basic Rule 26B or Advanced Rule 31), if all the conditions of that rule are met. However, a rail-only unit can only be embarked or disembarked at a port; and the port of disembarkation must be on a rail line of the same gauge as the port of embarkation.
-
Water-Only Units. A unit with a printed movement rating of "W" may move only by water along navigable inland waterway hexsides (Rule 7C) and unfrozen coastal hexsides. (A coastal hexside is any all-sea hexside forming part of a hex containing land.) A water-only unit may use all forms of movement detail-ed in Rule 6 except accelerated movement. It has a movement allowance of 40 MPs, and spends 1 MP per navigable inland waterway hexside or coastal hexside entered. When a water-only unit ends its movement during a phase, place its counter so it straddles the hexside it occupies. ZOCs have no effect on the movement of water-only units (this is an exception to Rule 6A). However, when a water-only unit enters an enemy-interdicted navigable inland waterway/coastal hexside; or begins any phase (except an initial phase) in such a hexside; the water-only unit is subject to an immediate attack by the enemy units interdicting the hexside. (A hexside is enemy-interdicted if enemy coast defenses (per the Coast Defenses Summary on the Naval Combat Charts and Tables Chart) are present in either hex adjacent to the hexside.) For each unit subject to this attack, the enemy player rolls two dice, sums the result, and subtracts the naval gunnery strength of the coast defenses in the adjacent hexes from the sum to obtain a differential; if the differential is:
-
0 or less: The water-only unit is eliminated.
-
+1 to +5: The water-only unit is turned back; retreat it to any connected navigable inland waterway/ coastal hexside. If the attack was triggered by the unit's own movement, retreat it to the hexside it occupied prior to the attack, and deduct 5 MPs from its remaining movement allowance.
-
+6 or more: The attack has no effect. If the unit has MPs remaining, it may continue moving, including moving to enter another enemy-interdicted hex-side (even to enter the same enemy-interdicted hexside again). Example: A water-only unit enters a coastal hex-side interdicted by a 5-7-5 heavy artillery regiment (naval gunnery strength of 2.5) in one adjacent hex and a 6-9-5* rifle division (naval gunnery strength of 0.5) in the other adjacent hex. The enemy player rolls a 3 and a 5 which sums to 8; subtracting 3 (the combined naval gunnery strength of the coast defenses in the two adjacent hexes) from this yields a differential of +5: the water-only unit it therefore turned back. Water-only units may overrun enemy forces in connected navigable inland waterway/coastal hexsides (only), per the normal overrun rule (but mentally substitute "hexside" for "hex" wherever it appears in Rule 6F). Note that this includes overrunning enemy zero-gunnery strength naval units (such as naval transports). The presence on a navigable inland waterway/coastal hexside of a water-only unit with an attack strength greater than zero prevents enemy units from moving or attacking across that hexside. In combat, a water-only unit may attack an adjacent hex per the standard rules; however, it may not advance after combat. It also may attack enemy forces in a connecting navigable inland waterway/coastal hexside; and in that case, it may advance after combat. A water-only unit may (but is not required to) participate in the defense of an adjacent hex. A water-only unit required to retreat, may retreat only to a connected navigable inland waterway/ coastal hexside. If the hexside retreated to is enemy-interdicted, and the water-only unit is turned back, the unit is eliminated instead. When the advanced naval rules are used, a water-only unit may also move by naval transport (Rule 31). Designers' Note: Water-only units are river gunboats armed with MGs, mortars, and field artillery. Although uncommon on the west front, there are several of these in the East and South theaters. In the Near East command, where control of the TigrisEuphrates river system is vital, they are probably the most important units in the game.
- Zero-Movement Units. A unit with a movement rating of 0 cannot move from the hex it occupies. It cannot be transported by air or naval transport. It cannot retreat and is eliminated if required to do so.
C. Combat/Motorized (C/M) Units.
C/m units are defined in Rule 3A2 and listed on the UIC. C/m units count at double their RE size for transport purposes (Rule 3A3). C/m units generally have higher terrain movement costs than other units (see the Terrain Effects Chart). C/m units have movement advantages when using re-serve commitment/exploitation movement (Rules 6C/6E).
-
C/M Artillery Units. Some units are both c/m and artillery. These c/m artillery units use the c/m movement costs, and the artillery combat effects, of terrain.
-
Tank Unreliability. Tank, light tank, amphibious light tank, engineer tank, assault engineer tank, and flame-thrower tank units whose reverse sides bear the notation "disabled" are unreliable. An unreliable tank unit may not use accel movement (Rule 6B). Each time an unreliable tank unit moves during a phase by a means other than rail/river movement or naval transport, the owning player checks the unit for possible disruption/disablement upon completion of the movement. Further, each time an unreliable tank unit engages in combat the owning player checks for possible disruption/disablement when the combat is declared. For each affected unit, roll a die and consult the Ground Success Table (note that there are no modifiers to this die roll). Results are:
-
S: Success: The unit succeeds in moving or engaging in combat with only negligible loss due to breakdowns. Its combat strength is unaffected.
-
F: Failure: The unit suffers appreciable losses due to breakdowns. The unit is disrupted (per Rule 3A5). Special: If the unit was already disrupted, it is now badly disrupted.
-
*F: Failure: The unit suffers severe losses due to breakdowns. The unit is badly disrupted (per Rule 3A5). Special: If the unit was already disrupted or badly disrupted, it is now disabled. Flip the unit over to its disabled side. A disabled tank unit is affected as a badly disrupted unit except it has a combat strength and movement rating of 0. A disabled tank unit can be repaired during any friendly initial phase in which it is eligible to recover from disruption. The unit must be in general supply (Rule 11C) and the owning player must spend Equ Pts (Rule 16B1) for the repair as follows: 2 Equ Pts if the unit is a battalion/ battalion grouping and 4 Equ Pts if the unit is a regiment/ regimental grouping. (Note that there are no tank brigades or divisions subject to this rule.) When repaired, simply flip the unit over to its non-disabled side. Designers' Note: Early tanks were extremely prone to breakdowns, with 70-90% of the tanks ordered into combat commonly breaking down before reaching the battle area.
-
Specialized Tank Units. When attacking a hex where the combat engineer modifier is possible (per Rule 10C and the Terrain Effects/Fortifications Effects Charts), an engineer tank unit, assault engineer tank unit, or flame-thrower tank unit is treated in all respects the same as a combat engineer unit (Rule 13D), assault engineer unit (Rule 13E), or flamethrower unit (Rule 13F), respectively. Designers' Note: Most of the Entente armor in the game is shown as engineer tank since they primarily used tanks in the combat engineer role (and designed them accordingly): to clear away opposing wire defenses, to bridge the various trenches, and to knock out enemy bunkers.
-
Fast C/M Units. C/M units with a printed movement rating of 7 or 8 are fast c/m units. Fast c/m units have the following abilities:
-
They pay the same reduced ZOC and overrun movement costs as cavalry units (Rule 14D).
-
They may attempt to retreat before overrun and combat (Rules 6F2 and 9I).
-
They are treated as if they were supported (Rule 12A) (regardless of actual support status) when overrunning (Rule 6F) enemy forces in clear, rough, or stony desert terrain which does not contain any type of fortifications (except fieldworks).
-
They are treated as if they were supported (Rule 12A) (regardless of actual support status) when attacking enemy forces in clear, rough, or stony desert terrain, or when defending in such terrain, and the combat is resolved using the Mobile Ground CRT. Designers' Note: The 7 and 8 MP c/m units in the game are motorized machinegun and armor car units that proved to be exceedingly effective in mobile combat. Unfortunately, there was little use for them in deadlocked France. The units that served in Ireland, SW Africa, the Middle/Near East, and Russia, however, often had an impact far out of proportion to their actual numbers.
D. Cavalry Units.
Heavy cavalry, mounted rifle, mountain mounted rifle, mounted rifle training, irregular cavalry, mixed mounted rifle and rifle, pack transport, mountain pack transport, sleigh machinegun, horse artillery, and bike units are cavalry. Cavalry units have movement and combat advantages in certain types of terrain during clear and frost weather as summarized on the Terrain Effects Chart and described in Rule 15C (Adverse Terrain Expertise). Note, however, that their movement during mud weather is generally penalized. Cavalry units pay reduced MP costs to move through ZOCs (Rule 6A) and overrun enemy units (Rule 6F) as summarized on the ZOC/Overrun Movement Costs Tables. Cavalry units are more susceptible to fatigue than most other units when using accel movement (Rule 6B). Cavalry units have movement advantages when using reserve commitment/exploitation movement (Rules 6C/6E). Cavalry units with a printed movement rating of 7 or 8 may attempt to retreat before overrun and combat (Rules 6F2 and 9I). Designers' Note: Bicycle units are treated as cavalry as that's how they functioned in this period. Bicycle units were (usually) faster than the normal light infantry units and only marginally slower than horse-mounted units. They almost always were conversions from earlier light infantry or cavalry formations. They also had much the same advantages and difficulties that horsed cavalry had in different types of terrain: pushing the heavy military bicycles of the time (150 lbs was common) through mud was only marginally less difficult than riding a horse through it; and both bicycle and horsed troops had the same ability to make up lost time in broken terrain (by putting spurs to the horse (or pedal to the metal) over the occasional patches of open ground).
-
Heavy Cavalry Units. When heavy cavalry units are included in an attack resolved on the Mobile Ground CRT, the attacker may attempt to use the ability of heavy cavalry to charge (use cavalry effects capability (CEC)) to modify the combat die roll as described in Rule 10. Heavy cavalry units have their attack strength halved when overrunning or attacking units in a hex containing a major city or any type of fortifications (except fieldworks). Designers' Note: Cavalry in trenches in reality has close to zero attack value due to its extreme vulnerability to MG and artillery fire, but we allow you to use them at half strength to represent the historical tactic of occasionally sending them into the line as dismounted infantry. Usually when this was done, however, the loss of morale that went with the loss of the horses resulted in poor caliber riflemen.
-
Camel Units. Cavalry units which have a "C" printed in conjunction with their movement rating are camel units. Camel units have movement advantages in sand, wadi, and salt desert terrain not given to other cavalry units. Camel units are not affected by the water line of communications rule while in the Desert. (The Desert and water line of communications are covered in Rule 37D.) Camel units may not enter any hex outside the D, E, F, G, H, and I weather zones, and if forced to do so are eliminated instead. (Weather zones are covered in Rule 36.)
-
Mixed Mounted Rifle and Rifle Units. Mixed units are considered to be rifle units for purposes of exploitation movement (Rule 6E), adverse terrain expertise (Rule 15C) and tsetse fly (Rule 37I3). Note that they are cavalry units for all other purposes.
-
Horse Artillery Units. These units use the cavalry movement costs, and the artillery combat effects, of terrain.
-
Sleigh Machinegun Units. These are the only cavalry units that may operate in the Arctic (Rule 37C) without penalty. They are also over-snow units (Rule 14G).
E. Light Units.
Light rifle, mountain light rifle, amphibious light rifle, and jager machinegun units are light units. Some ski units are also light units (see Rule 14G). Light units have movement and combat advantages in certain types of terrain during clear and frost weather as summarized on the Terrain Effects Chart and described in Rule 15C (Adverse Terrain Expertise). Light units pay reduced MP costs to move through ZOCs (Rule 6A) and overrun enemy units (Rule 6F) as summarized on the ZOC and Overrun Movement Costs Tables. Light units have movement advantages when using reserve commitment/exploitation movement (Rules 6C/6E). Designers' Note: WW I light units are not the stripped down motorized units of WW II. In WW I they are THE elite units of the infantry, and the French/German terms for them ----chasseur: master of the chase/jager: hunter---describe their functions well. Most of these units were recruited from mountainous/forested areas and included large numbers of hardy, self-reliant personnel accustomed to taking the initiative. Note that these are normally among the first units to convert to regular infantry.
F. Mountain Units.
Any unit with the mountain symbol (a black triangle in the unit symbol box) is a mountain unit. For example, a mountain rifle unit is a mountain unit. Some ski units are also mountain units (see Rule 14G). Mountain units have movement and combat advantages in certain types of terrain (especially in mountain terrain) as summarized on the Terrain Effects Chart and described in Rule 15C (Adverse Terrain Expertise). Under certain conditions mountain units may use their combat advantage in concert with infantry units (as described in step 1 of Rule 9A (Combat Procedure) and Rule 14H (Infantry Units)). Mountain units have movement advantages when using reserve commitment/exploitation movement (Rules 6C/6E).
- High Mountain Units. Under normal conditions (as shown on the Terrain Effects Chart), high mountain units are the only units that can move, attack, and trace supply across high mountain hexsides (in clear weather), high mountain passes (in other weather), and impassable escarpment hexsides. (Weather is covered in Rule 36.) However, high mountain units may guide other mountain units (only) so that they also can move, attack, and trace supply across such hexsides. Note that they cannot guide non-mountain units. The following restrictions apply:
-
They may guide mountain units up to 4 times their RE size. Example: A high mountain regiment (1 RE) could guide up to 4 REs of other mountain units.
-
They must be stacked with the mountain units to be guided. Further, they may only guide mountain units during movement if they move with them. For example, a high mountain battalion stacked with a mountain brigade in clear weather could guide the brigade across an adjacent high mountain hexside for purposes of tracing an overland supply line as long as they remain stacked together. However, it could not guide the brigade across the hexside during movement (or during retreat after combat) unless it moved (or retreated) across the hexside with the brigade. High mountain units are also over-snow units (Rule 14G).
- Mountain Artillery Units. These units use the mountain movement costs of terrain, and the most advantageous of the artillery or mountain combat effects of terrain. Designers' Note: Europa players will note that there are major differences in how mountain units are portrayed in WW I versus WW II. In particular, we allow WW I mountain units greater freedom to move and attack across high mountain, high mountain pass, and karst hexsides than is allowed in WW II; and artillery units are allowed to move and attack in mountain terrain in WW I during snow weather, but are prohibited from doing so in WW II. Three key differences between the two wars are our justification for the these changes. 1st: WW I units had little or no motorized tail; they moved almost entirely by foot or horse; thus they could move over mountain terrain easier than practically all WW II units (even the supposed ‘leg’ ones). 2nd: The average WW I foot soldier was greater accustomed to hardship than his WW II counterpart (one fact illustrates this dramatically: the combat load for a WW I soldier aver-aged 100 lbs, versus about 60 lbs in WW II; even though the WW I soldier was smaller and more malnourished on average than his WW II counterpart). 3rd: There was a need in WW I to make these kinds of attacks that just was not there in WW II (as no long-term campaign was fought in the high alpine regions during WW II). Just how important this last point was is illustrated by a picture in one of the volumes of the official Italian history of the war which shows a regiment of infantry in harness pulling a 25-ton 12” howitzer almost straight up a 3,000 foot cliff to a firing platform (and the firing platform was made by leveling off a 100-foot high chunk of solid marble by hand after first cutting about 10,000 steps into the mountainside to get to it). High mountain units were quite active on the Italian front during WW I, with several brigade/division-level attacks across high mountain hexsides by guided mountain units. (Note that the guide function is apparent even in the name given to many of the Austrian high mountain units: Berg-fuhrer (mountain leader).) In late 1916 Italy tried to use a rifle division guided by alpini (mountain light rifle troops) for such an attack (across a glacier hexside during a snow-storm!), but the division suffered 90% casualties from frost-bite just reaching its assembly area. It was not until after this debacle that Italy formed its own high mountain units.
G. Over-Snow Units.
Ski, ski machinegun, snowshoe, high mountain, and sleigh machinegun units are over-snow units. Over-snow units have movement and combat advantages in all types of terrain during snow weather as summarized on the Terrain Effects Chart and described in Rule 15C (Adverse Terrain Expertise). Over-snow units with a printed movement rating of 7 or 8 may attempt to retreat before overrun and combat during snow weather (Rules 6F2 and 9I). Note that sleigh machinegun units are also cavalry units (Rule 14D5). Ski and ski machinegun units are also either light units (Rule 14E) or mountain units (Rule 14F) depending on their nationality/contingent, as follows:
-
Bavarian, Wurttemburger, Austro-Hungarian, Swiss, Norwegian, and Swedish ski and ski machinegun units are also mountain units.
-
All other nationalities ski and ski machinegun units are also light units. Designers' Note: Snowshoe units show up in the eastern theater and the Caucasus. The US expeditionary forces dispatched to North Russia and Siberia in 1918 were also snowshoe equipped. (Reindeer) sleigh machinegun units show up in northern Russia in 1918-19.
H. Infantry Units.
The following are infantry units:
-
All Infantry, mountain infantry, marine infantry, infantry machinegun, and mountain infantry machinegun units.
-
All units with a printed movement rating of 8.
-
All assault engineer and amphibious assault engineer units with a printed movement rating of 6. Designers' Note: The German 6-MP Sturm battalions were the first units to use stosstruppen tactics on a systematic basis and were the prototype for all the stoss units which followed. The 8MP units stipulation covers a number of late-war pursuit units (armor car, light tank, bicycle, etc.) that routinely used infiltration tactics. To simulate the spread of infantry tactics that would have occurred had the war continued into 1919, the following units are also infantry units on or after the listed date:
-
Feb I 19: All c/m and cavalry units (Rules 3A2 and 14D) with a printed movement rating of 6 or more.
-
Apr I 19: All light and mountain units (Rules 14E, 14F) with a printed movement rating of 6 or more.
-
Jun I 19: All rifle and mountain rifle divisions with a printed defense strength of 12 or more and all nondivisional rifle, mechanized rifle, and mountain rifle units with a printed defense strength of 5 or more. Infantry units pay reduced MP costs to move through ZOCs (Rule 6A) and overrun enemy units (Rule 6F) as summarized on the ZOC/Overrun Movement Costs Tables. Infantry units have movement advantages when using reserve commitment/exploitation movement (Rules 6C/6E).
- Infantry-capable. Infantry units have special abilities in combat due to their use of infiltration (stosstruppen) tactics. When at least half of the REs of units a side has in a combat are infantry, that side is infantry-capable during that combat. The REs of participating artillery units are not counted for this calculation. When the attacker in a combat is infantry-capable:
-
The combat is resolved using the Mobile Ground CRT, even if the Positional Ground CRT would normally be mandated.
-
The 7:1, 8:1, or 9:1 odds columns of the Mobile Ground CRT can be used if the attacker can muster the requisite combat strength to achieve these odds. Note that these odds columns on the Mobile Ground CRT can only be used if the attacker is infantry-capable.
-
The combat effects of any fortifications in the attack-ed hex are lessened as shown on the Fortification Effects Chart. For example, if the attacker is infantry-capable, the combat resolution die roll modifier due to the presence of a fort, improved fort, or fortress (of any type) is -1 instead of the normal -2.
-
The combat resolution die roll for that combat is modified by +1.
-
Combat results of "AQ" become "AS" instead. When the defender in a combat is infantry-capable:
-
The combat resolution die roll for that combat is modified by -1.
-
Combat results of "BX" become "BXM" instead.
-
Mountain/Infantry-capable. Under certain conditions, mountain units (Rule 14F) and infantry units may use their special combat abilities in concert. If a combat's hex is mountain terrain and contains no fortification (excepting fieldworks), and one side (attacker or defender), but not both, is mountain/infantry-capable, the side which is mountain/infantrycapable may chose which ground com-bat results table (Mobile or Positional) is used to resolve the combat. A side is mountain/infantry-capable during a combat when at least half of the REs of units the side has in the combat are mountain units and/or infantry units. The REs of participating artillery units are not counted for this calculation. Note that mountain/infantrycapable is a different status than infantry-capable. For example, an attacker who is mountain/infantry-capable, but is not infantry-capable, does not gain the +1 combat die roll resolution modifier given to an attacker who is infantry-capable.
-
Required Losses. If a side is infantry-capable (mountain/infantry-capable) during a combat which is resolved using the Mobile Ground CRT, and the combat results in losses to that side, at least half of all that side's losses must be taken from infantry units (mountain units or infantry units), if possible.
I. Marine Units (Advanced Rule).
Marine rifle, marine infantry, naval troops, amphibious light rifle, and amphibious assault engineer units are marine units. Note that the British amphibious light tank unit (Rule 41K6g) is not a marine unit. When using the advanced naval rules, marine units have special coastal raid and amphibious landing abilities as described below. Note that coastal raids and amphibious landings cannot be made when using the basic naval rules. Designers' Note: Naval troops units in The Great War are really low-grade marine rifle units. Typically, each such counter either includes a battalion or so of real marines in its makeup, or it consists primarily of naval ratings with at least some familiarity with naval landing party tactics (and remember that in WW I most navies had a LOT of practice in gunboat diplomacy carried out by ad hoc naval landing formations). Units formed from naval troops for garrison or coast defense purposes are shown as static units.
-
Coastal Raid. Marine units (only) may make surprise attacks on coastal defenses (CDs); these are coastal raids. In a coastal raid, an eligible unit attempts to disrupt enemy coast artillery, heavy siege artillery, and siege artillery units in a hex. Up to one eligible unit per coast artillery, heavy siege artillery, or siege artillery units in the hex may attempt a coastal raid in the hex. For example, if a hex contains 2 coast artillery units and 1 heavy siege artillery unit, then up to 3 eligible units may raid the hex. To make a raid, a marine unit must have an amphibious landing planned for the hex containing the CD (per Rule 32C). Its transporting naval group (NG) must use night movement (Rule 34A2) to enter the hex containing the enemy CD to be raided. When the NG does this, units carried by the NG that will raid the CDs in the hex resolve their raids before the CD fires on the transporting NG. For each raiding unit, designate a coast artillery, heavy siege artillery, or siege artillery unit in the hex as a target, roll a die and consult the Ground Success Table (note that there are no modifiers to this die roll). If the raid succeeds, the targeted unit is disrupted (or badly disrupted if it was already disrupted) per Rule 3A5. If the raid fails, the marine unit may be eliminated (per the Ground Success Table). When the raid is complete, the naval sequence resumes as normal, including combat between the NG and the CD in the hex, if the CD can fire. The raiding unit is not required to make an amphibious landing in the hex, although it may do so if possible. However, if it does not make an amphibious landing, its transporting NG must spend 2 MPs in the hex after the raid, before it can spend MPs for any other purpose. Designers' Note: There were no specialized marine commando or ranger units during WW I. However, coast artillery neutralization was still attempted on occasion by various marine detachments and naval landing parties. This was attempted during the historical Gallipoli landings and was part and parcel of all of the various British plans for landing on the Belgian coast, forcing the Baltic, seizing German North Sea coast islands, etc.
-
Amphibious Landings. Marine units have special abilities when making amphibious landings. (Amphibious landings are covered in Advanced Rule 32.) These are:
-
Marine units are intrinsically amphibious. (Note: Intrinsically amphibious units can make amphibious landings from any type of water transport; nonamphibious units must use specialized landing craft or river transports to do so.)
-
Marine units (except naval troops units) attack at full strength, and naval troops units attack at half strength (instead of being quartered like everyone else) when making amphibious landings.
J. Fortress Units.
Fortress and mountain fortress units are fortress units. Note that siege artillery, siege mortar, and heavy siege artillery units are not fortress units. One fortress unit of any size may always stack in a hex in addition to any other units (Rule 8A).
K. Training/Replacement Units.
Any unit with the training symbol or replacement symbol as part of its unit type symbol is a training/replacement unit. For example, a heavy artillery training unit is a training/replacement unit. Note that march brigades (Rule 16C8) are training/replacement units (as their counters use the replacement symbol). Most training/replacement units normally will be off-map in various garrisons (representing their dedication to reinforcement/replacement activities). Rule 37F4 (Trng/Repl Forces Garrisons) details how these forces may be released for on-map operations. Note that a player's use of these forces onmap may negatively affect his flow of reinforcements and replacements (for which see Rule 16C9).
L. Irregular Units.
Irregular rifle units and irregular cavalry units are irregular units. Irregular units operate differently from other units as described below:
-
Irregular units pay reduced MP costs to move through ZOCs (Rule 6A) and to overrun enemy units (Rule 6F) as summarized on the ZOC/Overrun Movement Costs Tables.
-
An irregular unit, regardless of its unit type, may move the same as a light unit (Rule 14E) or mountain unit (Rule 14F) as the owning player wishes. Note that an irregular cavalry unit accrues fatigue hits due to accel movement (Rule 6B4) as a cavalry unit even while moving as a light/mountain unit.
-
Irregular units have movement advantages when using exploitation movement (Rule 6E).
-
Irregular units have their attack and defense strengths halved when they participate in combat that is resolved using the Positional Ground CRT.
-
An irregular unit may attempt to retreat before combat and overrun (Rules 6F and 9I); it MUST attempt to retreat if the opposing force musters 3:1 or better odds and there is an allowable hex to retreat to; if a mandatory attempt to retreat fails, the unit is disrupted (Rule 3A5) following the attempt.
-
Irregular units may not voluntarily attack at less than 3:1 odds unless non-irregular units constitute half or more of the attacking strength. (Note that some attacks, such as those by irregular units against enemy units in hexes where the irregulars appear, are mandatory.)
-
An irregular unit participating in a combat (attacking or defending) may not be eliminated to satisfy losses until all non-irregular units on their side in the combat have been eliminated (or reduced to cadre/remnant). Designers' Note: Irregular units in the WW II sense of guerrilla bands operating behind the enemy lines were rare in WW I. (The comitadj bands of Serbian guerrillas being the only real exception - for which see the Serbian nation-specific rules.) Far more common were irregulars using guerrilla tactics and living off the land, but operating in support of (or at least in loose concert with) regular forces (such as some of the Cossack units in Poland, the Arabs in Palestine, or the Kurds and Armenians in the Caucasus). The remaining unsubdued native African forces (Berbers and Sanussi) are really irregulars rather than guerrillas as well; when finally subdued by the Europeans it was not by means of anti-partisan sweeps, but by direct defeat in open battle followed by occupation of their home areas. Irregulars historically were very good at massacring civilians and POWs, and at causing havoc among poorly-equipped enemy rear-area forces; but normally showed a decided lack of enthusiasm for making anything but 'sure-thing' attacks, and frequently just melted away when faced with superior enemy strength.
M. Army HQs.
Army HQs represent the command and logistic staffs needed for large forces to operate at full effectiveness. Army HQs regulate reaction movement and reaction combat, and are the most efficient means of putting units in combat supply (as described below and in Rules 6D and 11D). An Army HQs is a non-motorized unit (Rule 3A2), has a combat strength of 0, is 3 REs in size, and has HE (Rule 3A4), has an AA value as listed on the Intrinsic AA Summary (on the Air Combat Charts and Tables Chart), and may carry up to 9 REs of logistics items (per Rule 11H2); it does not have a ZOC (not even in the hex it occupies), does not count against the stacking limit, and may not advance after combat (Rules 5, 8A, and 9F3). Army HQs of differing nationalities may not stack together.
- Active/Inactive. Army HQs have an active side and an inactive side (as shown on the Unit Identification Chart). An active Army HQs exerts a zone of influence (ZOI), covering the hex the HQs occupies and every hex within two hexes of the HQs. The ZOI of non-German Army HQs covers only units of the same nationality (per Rule 3B5) as the HQs exerting the ZOI. For example, a British Army HQs does not exert a ZOI over French units. Note that the ZOI of a German Army HQs covers all Central Powers units, not just German units. During reaction movement/reaction combat, units within the ZOI of an active Army HQs are the only units that may move and attack. Note that Army HQs themselves may not move during reaction movement. (Reaction movement is covered in detail in Rule 6D.) Res Pts (Rule 11G) stacked with an active Army HQs are the most efficient source of combat supply (Rule 11D). All Army HQs enter play active side up. Thereafter, a player flips his Army HQs between their active and inactive sides as follows:
-
At the start of his initial phase, the phasing player flips over all his inactive Army HQs so their active sides are face up.
-
During the reaction movement phase, the reacting (nonphasing) player checks his Army HQs to see if they remain active (this is an activation check); for each HQs he rolls a die and consults the Ground Success Table. Note that die roll modifiers may apply to this check; these are listed in the appropriate nation-specific and/or scenario rules (Rules 41 and 42B). If the attempt succeeds, the Army HQs remains active; if the attempt fails, the Army HQs is flipped over so its inactive side is face up. After making an Army HQs activation check, all reaction movement of units in that HQs ZOI must be completed before the next HQs is checked.
-
Army HQs Disruption. Army HQs may become disrupted (Rule 3A5). When a disrupted Army HQs is checked during the reaction movement phase to see if it remains active, modify the check die roll by -1. If units participating in a combat trace combat supply to a Res Pt stacked with a disrupted Army HQs, modify the combat resolution die roll as follows: -1 if the attacker’s Army HQs is disrupted; +1 if the defender’s Army HQs is disrupted.
-
Army HQs Coordination (Advanced Rule). A player may attempt to coordinate the actions of two or more of his Army HQs during the reaction movement phase. The player announces which Army HQs will attempt to coordinate their actions. He then makes a single check to see whether all of these Army HQs remain active or become inactive (vice the normal one check per HQs), applying a -1 modifier (in addition to any other applicable modifiers) to the check die roll for each HQs past the first involved in the attempt. If the coordination attempt succeeds, the player may carry out all reaction movement of units in the ZOIs of all the coordinating Army HQs before moving on to the next Army HQs activation check. Designers' Note: Coordinating HQs is hard to pull off, but with a good leader (see below) and a bit of luck, it allows a player to position his assets for maximum effect during the following reaction combat phase. Some of the most successful offensives of the war are best simulated in terms of multipleHQs coordination and attack in reaction, followed up by a maximum offensive in the players next regular combat phase.
N. Corps HQs.
-
Basic Rules. Corps HQs are used to help with stacking in congested portions of the map and to regulate overstacking (as listed in Rule 8C). They are labeled with the IDs of actual corps for historical flavor. A Corps HQs is a non-motorized unit (Rule 3A2), has a combat strength of 0, is 1 RE in size, and has a movement rating equal to the slowest unit in its box on the corps marker display (or 8 when moving by itself); it does not have HE, has no AA value, does not have a ZOC (not even in the hex it occupies), and does not count against the stacking limit (Rules 3A4, 5, and 8A).
-
Limited Intelligence (Advanced Rule). Corps HQs are also used to implement limited intelligence. Corps HQs have a known side and an unknown side (as shown on the Unit Identification Chart). A corps (the Corps HQs and all units in the corresponding box on the Corps Marker Display) which is known, may be examined freely by the enemy player; and if he asks his opponent for the composition of such a corps, his opponent must answer truthfully. An unknown corps cannot be examined by the enemy player; and his opponent is free to tell him anything (or nothing) if he is asked its composition. (It is suggested that players keep known and unknown corps on separate Corps Marker Displays with unknown displays covered by a sheet of paper or similar object.) If an unknown corps contains units which exert ZOCs into adjacent hexes (Rule 5), the owning player must truthfully inform his opponent of this at the instant the first enemy unit moves adjacent to the corps. Players may attempt to overrun (Rule 6F) unknown enemy corps. To do so, the overrunning player announces his intention and points out his units making the overrun. The overrunning units must have sufficient MPs remaining to make an overrun at 10:1 odds. His opponent then com-pares the overrunning strength to that of his hidden units; if this is at least 10:1, he reveals the contents of the corps and the overrun proceeds normally. If the overrunning strength is less than 10:1, the overrunning units must end their movement and the corps remains unknown. The status (known or unknown) of a corps when it enters play is determined by the distance from the corps entry hex to the closest enemy unit: If the closest enemy unit is within 3 hexes, the corps enters play known, otherwise the corps enters play unknown. An unknown corps becomes known (and the Corps HQs counter is flipped over to its known side) when:
-
It is an initial phase, and the corps is within 3 hexes of an enemy unit.
-
The corps is revealed by a successful strategic reconnaissance air mission (per the Advanced Air Rules
-
Rule 20F1).
-
It is the start of a combat sequence (per Rule 9A) and the corps is a participant in the combat. A known corps becomes unknown (and the Corps HQs counter is flipped over to its unknown side) when:
-
It is an initial phase, and there are no enemy units within 3 hexes of the corps. Designers' Note: Both sides usually had pretty good intelligence regarding their opponents forces in the battle area (within 3 hexes of the front) through tactical air reconnaissance, radio intercepts, and (especially) local patrolling. Once a unit left the battle area, however (and especially when they transferred between commands or spent some extensive time refitting back in the national homeland), they often were 'lost' for months at a time.
O. Transport Units.
Motorized transport units, pack transport units, and mountain pack transport units are transport units. Transport units may transport cargo and extend supply lines as described below. Transport units never count against the stacking limit (Rule 8A), but any units they transport do count against the stacking limit.
-
Mode. Transport units have two modes: transport and supply line. A transport unit is in transport mode when the side of the counter with a movement rating is face up; and it is in supply line mode when the side of the counter with the notation "Extend Supply Line" is face up. A transport unit always enters play in transport mode. Thereafter, a player may change his transport units from one mode to the other (flip them from one side to the other) in his initial phases. A transport unit in transport mode may transport cargo, but it may not extend supply lines. A transport unit in supply line mode may not transport cargo, but it may ex-tend supply lines. A transport unit in supply line mode may not move; and, if forced to retreat, it is eliminated instead.
-
Transport of Cargo. Transport units in transport mode may transport cargo: i.e. logistics items (per Rule 11H2) and certain categories of units as listed under the various transport unit types below. Each transport unit can transport up to 3 REs of units, or up to 6 REs of logistics items. Special: A transport unit may not transport any cargo while disrupted. (Disruption is covered in Rule 3A5.) Example: An undisrupted transport unit may transport up to 3 REs of units, or up to 3 REs of a mixture of units and logistics items, or up to 6 REs of logistics items. A transport unit may transport units in the movement, reaction movement, and exploitation phases only. Note that it may transport logistics items in all phases of a turn. A transport unit, and any cargo it is transporting, has movement abilities based on its transport type as listed be-low. Note that transport units cannot transport units during the combat and reaction combat phases and thus cannot impart any of their abilities to other units in these phases. A transport unit may pick up cargo at any time during its movement as long as its RE-limit is not exceeded; it may drop off cargo at any time during its movement. The trans-port unit and all cargo being transported are treated as a single unit with a unit type and movement rating as shown on the transport unit's counter, and a combat strength and RE size equal to the combined strength of the transport unit and any cargo it is transporting. For example, a 0-6 mountain pack transport regiment (1 RE) transporting a 2-3-5* rifle brigade (2 REs) and four GSPs (1 RE), is treated as a 2-3-6* mountain pack transport unit 4 REs in size. A unit cannot both move by itself and be transported by a transport unit in a phase. Note that this means that a unit which moves by itself during a phase may not subsequently be transported by a transport unit in the same phase; nor may a unit transported by a transport unit in a phase subsequently move by itself during the same phase.
a. Motorized Transport Units. A motorized transport unit is c/m (Rule 3A2); it may carry non-motorized units (but not Army HQs), artillery units without HE (Rule 3A4), and logistics items (Rule 11H). Note that artillery units count double their RE size for this purpose. Prior to Feb I 17, motorized transport units are restricted, in that:
-
They may not use accel movement (Rule 6B).
-
Their movement ratings are halved during reserve commitment movement (Rule 6C) and exploitation movement (Rule 6E). Designers' Note: Early-war trucks were lightly built and prone to breakdowns. The 6-MP movement rating given all motor transport units is a compromise; prior to Feb I 16, 5 MPs would be more accurate; just as on or after Feb I 18, 7 MPs would be a more accurate representation.
b. Pack Transport Units. A pack transport unit is a cavalry unit (Rule 14D); it may carry non-motorized units without HE (Rule 3A4) and logistics items (Rule 11H).
i. Mountain Pack Transport Units. A mountain pack transport unit is also a mountain unit (Rule 14F). Mountain pack transport units are the only pack transport units that may extend supply lines in mountainous terrain (i.e. rough, wooded rough, and mountain hexes). ii. Camel Pack Transport Units. A pack transport unit with a "C" following its movement rating is a camel pack transport unit. A camel pack transport unit is also a camel unit (Rule 14D2). Camel pack transport units are the only pack transport units that may extend supply lines in the Desert (Rule 37D). Designers' Note: Both sides made extensive use of pack mule/camel trains for supply work in WW I. Mules were of major importance in Italy, the Balkans, and the Caucasus; and as players will discover, they are the only way to extend your supply lines to cover some of the historical mountain offensives. The Indian Army used camels almost exclusively for supply when operating outside Europe (with each division having the equivalent of a camel pack trans-port regiment attached to it), and camels also featured prominently in the Turkish 1915 attack on the Suez Canal defenses, and during the Russian Expedition into Persia.
- Supply Line Extension. Transport units may extend the road and overland elements of supply lines (Rule 11B) as follows:
-
If the road or overland element of the supply line is traced into or through hexes containing one undisrupted transport unit in supply line mode, the maxi-mum length of that element is extended by 1 hex.
-
If the road or overland element of the supply line is traced into or through hexes containing at least three undisrupted transport units in supply line mode, the maximum length of that element is extended by 2 hexes. Note that disrupted transport units may not extend supply lines; that transport units can never extend a road or overland element of a supply line by more than 2 hexes; and that a transport unit used to extend the overland element of a supply line may not be used to extend the road element of a supply line (and vice versa). Example: During mud weather the overland and road elements of a supply line are limited to 2 hexes (as shown on the Supply Line Summary). However, if the overland element of the supply line is traced into or through a hex containing an undisrupted transport unit in supply line mode, the overland element could be up to 3 hexes in length; if the road element of the same supply line were traced into or through a hex containing a second undisrupted transport unit in supply line mode, the road element of the supply line could also be up to 3 hexes in length.
P. Leaders.
Each major power has one or more leader counters (leaders). These have been labeled with the names of the more prominent of each country's WW I leaders, but they actually represent the effect exerted by the nation's overall higher military leadership (i.e. general staff). Each leader has three leadership ratings (ranging from -1 to 1) printed on its counter (as shown on the Unit Identification Chart). These numbers represent the leader's ability to influence the activation check of Army HQs and the combat resolution die roll as described below. Leaders can be off-map in the available leader pool (back at the general staff), or on-map assigned to a specific Army HQs (at the front exercising their influence). Show that a leader is assigned to an Army HQs by stacking it on top of the Army HQs counter. Only one leader may be assigned to each Army HQs. The owning player may switch his leaders between on-map and off-map during his scenario setup and any of his initial phases. Note that this means that a leader assigned to one Army HQs cannot be reassigned to another Army HQs without spending at least 1 friendly initial phase in the off-map available leader pool (at the general staff getting new instructions). An on-map leader automatically moves wherever its associated Army HQs moves; it may not move by itself. When an Army HQs is eliminated, any leader assigned to it is placed in the off-map available leader pool (the leader always gets away).
- Influencing Army HQs Activation Checks. During the reaction movement phase, a leader may (at the owning player's option) attempt to influence the activation check of the Army HQs it is assigned to. The owning player rolls a die; if the result is:
-
1 or 2: Modify the activation check die roll by the leftmost number on the leader counter.
-
3 or 4: Modify the activation check die roll by the center number on the leader counter .
-
5 or 6: Modify the activation check die roll by the rightmost number on the leader counter. Example: The British leader Haig, with leadership ratings of 1/0/1, is assigned to the British 2nd Army HQs. During the reaction movement phase, the Entente player decides it is imperative that 2nd Army remain active and decides to gamble on Haig's leadership positively influencing the HQs activation check. He rolls a 5, and breathes a sigh of relief, as this results in the activation check die roll being increased by +1 (as the rightmost number on Haig's counter is 1). If a player tries to coordinate the activation check of multiple Army HQs per Advanced Rule 14M3, a leader (one only) assigned to any of the coordinating HQs may attempt to influence the coordination activation check using the same procedure as listed above.
- Influencing Combat. Leaders may attempt to influence combat. Immediately prior to resolving a combat, each player (defender first) announces if an eligible leader (one only per side) will attempt to influence the combat resolution die roll. A leader is eligible to make this attempt if all units involved in the combat on its side are in the zone of influence (ZOI) of the Army HQs the leader is assigned to. Each player with a leader attempting to influence the combat rolls a die; results are as in the preceding paragraph except: 1) the combat resolution die roll is modified instead of the activation check die roll, and 2) defending player combat resolution die roll modifiers have their signs reversed (if a -1 is called for, it is changed to +1; if a +1 is called for it is changed to -1). Example: After successfully using Haig to keep his 2nd Army HQs active, the Entente player decides to gamble again, this time on Haig's leadership positively influencing an attack made by three stacks of units, all of which are in the ZOI of the 2nd Army HQs. (Note that had even one attacking unit been in a hex outside of 2nd Army HQs ZOI, Haig could not have been used.) Unfortunately, he rolls a 1, with the result that the combat resolution die roll is modified by -1 (as this is the leftmost number on Haig's counter). Even more unfortunately, the Central Powers player also committed a leader to the combat: Falk. 0/0/1; and he rolled a 6, resulting in an additional -1 to the combat resolution die roll (as the rightmost number on Falkenhayn's counter is 1, a +1 would normally be called for, but as he is the defender this is changed to a -1 instead). The final combat resolution die roll modifier due to leadership, therefore, is -2.
Q. Elite Brigades.
Some nations (notably Italy and the Ottoman Empire) routinely transferred their elite brigades from one division to another so as to maximize the time their elite units could spend in the front lines. This tactic has been accommodated in the game by giving such nations elite brigade counters which players may use to show which divisions their elite brigades are assigned to. Note that the assignment of an elite brigade counter to a division merely denotes that the division includes an elite brigade; the elite brigade counter has no other function in the game, and is ignored for all other purposes. An elite brigade counter must be assigned to a division at all times. Up to two elite brigade counters may be assigned to a rifle division; a maximum of one elite brigade counter may be assigned to any other division. Show that an elite brigade counter is assigned to a division by stacking it on top of the division. If a division's movement rating is higher than the movement ratings of the elite brigades assigned to it, that division has its movement rating modified to that of the slowest attached elite brigade counter. Elite brigade counters assigned to one division may be re-assigned to another division during initial phases (only), if both divisions occupy the same hex or replacement pool. While an elite brigade counter is assigned to a division, that division's combat strength is increased (including when at cadre strength and for replacement purposes) by the combat strength modifier printed on the elite brigade counter. For example, a 6-9-5 rifle division, with two elite brigade counters assigned (one a +2-5, the other a +1-5) would have its attack strength increased to 9 (6 + 2 + 1) and its defense strength increased to 12 (9 + 2 + 1).
R. Rifle Assault Units.
Rifle assault units have special abilities in positional combat due to their use of aggressive attack tactics. Note that they have no special abilities in mobile combat. When at least half of the REs of units the attacker has in a combat are rifle assault, the attacker is rifle assault-capable during that combat. The REs of attacking artillery units, and of attacking units with the combat abilities of combat engineer units or assault engineer units (see Rules 13D, 13E, 13F, and 14C3), are not counted for this calculation. When a combat is resolved using the Positional Ground CRT and the attacker is rifle assault-capable:
-
The combat resolution die roll for that combat is modified by +1.
-
Combat results of "DX" become "DXM" instead.
-
At least half of all attacker losses must be taken from rifle assault units, if possible. Designers' Note: Rifle assault units are limited to the USA (where practically the entire army is rifle assault) and Russia. US combat doctrine stressed continuation of the rifle attack (backed by every available supporting arm), until either the attacking units burned out or the foe broke. The high morale and lavish equipment of US units allowed this tactic to be successful against enemy forces denied the ability to maneuver (e.g. use stosstruppen tactics), but at the cost of higher than normal casualties. On the east front, the 1916 Brusilov Offensive (which almost knocked Austria-Hungary out of the war), was spearheaded by a Russian army specially trained and equipped for the assault role.
Rule 15 — Special Ground Rules
A. Terrain.
-
Bridges. A road or rail line crossing a minor canal, river/canal, or major river hexside is a bridge. A player cannot use a bridge unless he owns it. A player owns a bridge if he owns both hexes adjacent to the bridge hexside or if he was the last to do so. Bridges may be demolished by construction engineers (Rule 13A2). A demolished bridge may not be used for any movement purposes, such as accel movement, road movement, rail movement, etc. Exception: Supply lines may be traced across a demolished bridge without penalty. For example, a unit using a road to cross an unfrozen river hexside and enter a woods hex in clear weather normally pays 1 MP to do so; it must spend 4 MPs to do so if the bridge is destroyed (2 MP for the river and 2 MPs for the woods hex). Demolished bridges may be repaired by construction engineers (Rule 13A3). Note that air units can not demolish bridges by bombing in The Great War. Designers' Note: The small bombloads and inexperience of 1914-18 aircraft made it all but impossible to destroy a bridge from the air during WW I.
-
Causeways. Roads and rail lines which cross sea, lake, or great river hexsides are causeways. Ground units treat such a hexside as a major river hexside for all movement and combat purposes. Causeways block naval movement unless both hexes adjacent to the causeway are friendly-owned.
-
Rail Ferries. A rail ferry is treated as a low volume rail line that starts at one port and ends at another, as depicted on the map. A player may use a rail ferry for rail movement only if he owns both ports and only if both ports are functioning. (Note: A port is functioning unless it has maximum damage per the Port Summary (on the Naval Combat Charts and Tables Chart).) If a rail ferry links two rail nets, using the ferry counts against the capacity of each net. Note: A rail ferry is never treated as a road. A rail ferry is not a bridge or a causeway.
-
Major Rivers. Units which move across an unfrozen and unfordable major river hexside (whether by movement, or advance or retreat before or after combat) are disrupted (see Rule 3A5) when the crossing is completed. Exception: Units crossing a major river at a bridge (Rule 15A1) or pontoon bridge (Rule 13A7) are never disrupted.
-
Great Rivers. Note: There is no special symbol delineating great rivers on the maps, although their effects on movement and combat are listed on the Terrain Effects Chart. There are three great rivers on the European maps:
-
The main channel of the Severnaya Dvina river from where the river is formed by the junction of its Vichega and Sukhona river tributaries at Kotlas to its entrance into the White Sea.
-
The main channel of the Volga river from where it receives its Kama river tributary three hexes south of Kazan to its entrance into the Caspian Sea.
-
The main channel of the Danube river from where it receives its Sava river tributary at Beograd to its entrance into the Black Sea. On the non-European maps, a great river is defined as any section of a major river downstream of where it receives another major river as a tributary. For example, the Niger river is a great river from the CA:3277/3377 hexside (where its major river tributary, the Benue, joins up) to the sea (including all river branches in its delta).
- Partial Flooding. When enemy units attack a canalintensive hex, the player owning the hex may attempt to partially flood it. Follow this sequence:
-
The attacking player (the attacker) announces his attack on the hex and indicates his attacking units.
-
The player owning the hex may attempt to flood the hex, if he wishes. If he decides to do so, he consults the Ground Success Table, rolling one die and modifying it as indicated on the table. A failure result means he failed to flood the hex before the attack; a success result means the hex is flooded for the rest of the player turn (only). Treat the hex as a swamp hex for all movement and combat purposes.
-
If the hex is flooded, the attacker may call off the attack if he wishes. If called off, his units indicated for the attack may not attack a different hex. Due to the elevated nature of the Po river dikes over the surrounding terrain, when enemy units attack any hex adjacent to the major river section of the Po river (circa GW2:4615), the player owning the hex may attempt to partially flood it (per above). Note: Partial flooding of a hex may result in an atrocity, with morale point penalties to the player initiating the flooding (see Rule 40A). Further, a humanitarian player will spend 1 Res Pt for disaster relief each time he partially floods a hex containing a city (Rule 3E5) or partially floods a hex adjacent to a hex containing a city. (The Res Pt to be spent must be within overland supply range of the flooded hex; and if it is to be spent, must be spent immediately when the hex is flooded.) If a player cannot (or will not) spend this Res Pt for disaster relief, this in itself may result in a separate atrocity. Designers' Note: The Italians made extensive preparations to breach the Po river dikes after the 1917 Caporetto disaster made it look like the Austrians might overrun all of northern Italy; and Dutch defense plans from 1916 envisioned flooding several areas to help defend Holland.
-
Resource Centers. Note: Resource centers are covered in detail in Rule 37A; only their effects on combat are described below. When a hex containing one or more resource centers is attacked, the presence of the resource centers in the hex may affect the combat. To check for this, the player owning the hex consults the Ground Success Table (on the Ground Combat Charts and Tables Chart), rolling a die, and modifying the roll as indicated on the table. A failure result means the resource center has no effect on the combat; a success means the combat resolution die roll is modified by -1. Designers' Note: Many accounts of combat in the Lens coal mining area (GW2:0624) comment on the usefulness of the numerous mining tunnels and pits in the area for defensive purposes. Some of the more extensive resource centers (such as the Lorraine iron ore fields (circa GW2:1719) approach the intricacy of a major fortress, with hundreds of miles of tunnels and intricate networks of blast furnaces, foundries, and slag piles above ground.
-
Devastation. Players may devastate friendly-owned hexes. Special: Neither side may devastate a hex prior to the Feb I 16 game turn. It takes 4 REs of construction units in regular general supply (Rule 11C2) two turns (four turns in poor weather) to devastate a hex. Quick engineering may not be used when devastating a hex. When the devastation is completed, place a devastated marker in the hex to show the devastation. A devastated hex has the following effects:
-
The MP cost to enter a devastated hex is increased by +2 MPs. Note that this increased MP cost applies even when moving along a road.
-
Any rail line in a devastated hex is broken (Rule 7A6), and may not be repaired (Rule 13A3) while the hex is devastated.
-
When an attacking force includes one or more units in a devastated hex, the combat resolution die roll for the combat is modified by -2.
-
Each devastated hex (regardless of the actual terrain in the hex) counts as 2 hexes when tracing the overland and road elements of a supply line (Rules 11B1 and 11B2).
-
For purposes of tracing the railroad sub-element of a supply line (Rule 11B3a), each devastated hex, is treated as if it were 2 low-volume rail hexes. Note: Devastating a hex always results in an atrocity, with morale point penalties to the player initiating the devastation (see Rule 40A). Further, a humanitarian player will spend 1 Res Pt for disaster relief each time he devastates a hex. (The Res Pt to be spent must be within overland supply range of the devastated hex; and if it is to be spent, must be spent immediately when the devastation begins.) If a player cannot (or will not) spend this Res Pt for disaster relief, this in itself may result in a separate atrocity. A devastated hex may be repaired. It takes 4 REs of construction units in regular general supply (Rule 11C2) four turns (eight turns in poor weather) to repair a devastated hex. Quick engineering may not be used when repairing a devastated hex. The construction units must all trace overland supply lines to the same Res Pt, which must be expended for the repair when it begins. (When the repair is completed, remove the devastation marker from the hex. Note that the rail break in the hex is also repaired at this time.) Designers' Note: Germany devastated the front line hexes abandoned during the retreat to the Hindenburg line in early
-
It took the Entente months to repair the damage, and as late as the spring, 1918 offensives, the damage was still hampering operations.
-
Open Cities. At the beginning of a combat phase or reaction combat phase in which a major city is isolated, or in which at least one hex adjacent to the major city is enemyowned, the player owning the major city may designate that city to be an "open city" for that phase. An open city is treated as clear terrain for purposes of bombardment (Rule 12C) and combat; but attacking, bombarding, terror bombarding, or terror bombing (Advanced Rule 20G1c) an open city is likely to result in an atrocity, with morale point penalties to the attacking/bombarding/bombing player (see Rule 40A).
B. Fortifications.
Fortifications have combat effects as listed on the Fortification Effects Chart. Fortifications may be built, maintained, upgraded, and improved by construction engineers (Rule 13A).
-
Fieldworks. When a hex containing fieldworks is captured by enemy units, the fieldworks are destroyed and immediately removed from play. Special: The fieldworks in a hex are ignored during combat when the hex is subject to concentric attack and the fieldworks constitute a detached fortification. A hex is subject to concentric attack when attacking units exert ZOCs into every adjacent (per Rule 3E5) hex. The fieldworks in a hex constitute a detached fortification if no adjacent hex contains friendly fortifications (of any type).
-
Entrenchments. Entrenchments are not affected by hex capture. Special: The entrenchments in a hex are treated as field-works during combat when the hex is subject to concentric attack (per Rule 15B1) and the entrenchments constitute a detached fortification. The entrenchments in a hex constitute a detached fortification if no adjacent hex contains friendly fortifications (of any type).
-
Forts and Improved Forts. When a hex containing a fortification of these types is captured by enemy units or reduced by bombardment (Rule 12C2), the fortification is immediately replaced by a fortification of the next lower level. For example, an improved fort would be replaced by a fort, while a fort would be replaced by an entrenchment.
-
Fortresses. There are three types of fortresses: new, old, and great. Each type of fortress may be at either of two conditions: improved or unimproved. When a rule does not mention the condition of a fortress it applies to all fortresses, regardless of condition. When a rule does mention the condition of a fortress, it applies only to those fortresses at that condition. For example, a rule on "fortresses" applies to all fortresses: new, old, and great, whether improved or unimproved; while a rule on "improved fortresses" excludes all unimproved fortresses; and a rule on "improved old fortresses" applies only to improved old fortresses. A fortress has differing combat effects based on its condition, as specified on the Fortifications Effects Chart. When enemy units capture a hex containing an improved fortress, or bombardment reduces the fortress (Rule 12C2), the fortress in the hex immediately becomes unimproved. (Place a fort in a hex containing an unimproved fortress to distinguish it from an improved fortress.) An unimproved fortress is not further reduced, no matter how many times it changes hands, or is bombarded.
C. Adverse Terrain Expertise.
Various units may use their expertise in adverse terrain to affect the outcome of mobile combat during clear, frost, winter, and snow weather. Note that this ability can not be used during positional combat or during mud weather. (Weather is covered in Rule 36.) When at least half of the REs attacking into a hex would be eligible to use the "exceptions" movement effects column on the Terrain Effects Chart (TEC) were they to enter the attacked hex, the attacker is adverse terrain-capable during that combat. The REs of attacking artillery units are not counted for this calculation. When a combat is resolved using the Mobile Ground CRT during clear, frost, winter, or snow weather and the attacker is adverse terrain-capable:
-
The combat resolution die roll for that combat is modified by +1.
-
At least half of all attacker losses must be taken from adverse terrain-capable units, if possible. Example: Two mountain rifle brigades (2 REs each), one light rifle brigade (2 REs), two rifle regiments (1 RE each), and three artillery regiments (1 RE each) attack into a wooded rough hex during winter weather. As the mountain brigades would be eligible to use the "exceptions" movement effects column on the TEC were they to enter the attacked hex, exactly half of the attacking REs (4 of 8, ignoring the artillery units) qualify, and the combat resolution die roll for the combat is modified by +1. If the combat results in an attacker loss, at least half of the losses (if possible) must be taken from the mountain rifle units.
D. Morale.
Note: This rule uses the concept of National Will (NW). NW is described in detail in Rule 40; only its effect on combat are described below.
- Morale Advantage. For a particular combat, each side has a NW equal to the lowest NW of any units it has participating in the combat. For example, if the Entente side has French units with a NW of 3 and Belgian units with a NW of 1 in a combat, then the Entente NW for that combat is 1. The side with the higher NW in a combat has the morale advantage in that combat. Morale may affect combat as follows:
-
When the attacker has the morale advantage in a combat, the combat resolution die roll for that combat is modified by +1.
-
When the defender has the morale advantage in a combat, the combat resolution die roll for that combat is modified by -1.
- Home Advantage. When units of a nation participate in combat in the vicinity of their nation's natural capital (see below) their NW is affected as follows:
-
When units of a great/major power (Rule 3B4), participate in a combat anywhere within 3 hexes of their nation's natural capital, their NW for that combat is increased by 2.
-
When units of a minor power (Rule 3B4), participate in a combat anywhere within 1 hex of their nation's natural capital, their NW for that combat is increased by 1. A nation's natural capital is the city where the nation's government (Rule 37G) would normally reside; this is specified for each nation under the appropriate section of Rule 41 (Nations). For example, per Rule 41S, the natural capital of France is Paris (any of hexes GW2:1229, 1230, 1329, or 1330).) Note that the listed NW effects apply even if the nation's government is not present at the natural capital, and even if the nation's natural capital is enemy-owned.
- Instability/Collapse. When a nation's NW is driven low enough, that nation may become shaken or collapse (this is described in detail in Rules 40B and 40C).
-
While a nation is shaken, all of its units are unreliable on the attack. Note that their ability to defend is not affected.
-
While a nation is in collapse, all of its units are unreliable on both the attack and the defense. When an unreliable unit participates in combat, it must be checked for possible disruption when the combat is declared. For each such unit, roll a die and consult the Ground Success Table (note that there are no modifiers to this roll); results are: success, the unit participates in the combat as normal; or failure, the unit is disrupted (or badly disrupted if it is already disrupted) per Rule 3A5.
E. Cooperation.
Due to a variety of technical, organizational, and political factors, some nations had difficulty cooperating with other nations.
- Cooperating Nations. The following nations cooperate:
-
All Entente minor power nations cooperate with France. Note that Entente minor powers do not cooperate with each other.
-
All non-German Central Powers nations cooperate with Germany. Note that non-German Central Powers nations do not cooperate with each other.
- Supply Effects. Cooperation affects supply as de-scribed in Rule 11E. Special: For supply purposes (only):
-
The USA cooperates with France.
-
Up to 15 REs of units from each great/major power (Rule 3B4) may cooperate with each other great/ major power on its side. For example, the Entente player could have up to 15 REs each of British, Italian, and Russian units trace supply lines to French regular general supply sources. Designers' Note: American forces were equipped mostly with French equipment and supplied via the French depot system until late in 1918. Note that until the first American Army HQs shows up in Aug 18, US units will only be able to be put in combat supply using the inefficient 30 REs per Res Pt method (as even cooperating units can not trace supply lines to Res Pts stacked with Army HQs of a different nationality).
- Other Effects. Cooperation also affects the following:
-
Units which do not cooperate can not provide support (Rule 12A) to each other.
-
Units which do not cooperate may not combine in an attempt to use a special combat effects capability (Rule 10), may not combine their strengths when bombarding (Rule 12C), may not use quick engineering together (Rule 13A5), and may not combine their REs for purposes of calculating if a side is infantry-capable, mountain/infantry-capable, rifle assault-capable, or adverse terrain-capable (Rules 14H, 14R, and 15C).
-
When units which do not cooperate participate in the same attack, the combat resolution die roll is modified by -1.
-
When units which do not cooperate defend together in an attacked hex, the combat resolution die roll is modified by +1.
-
Air units may not fly tactical reconnaissance, ground support, or defensive air support (Basic Rules B17B2, B17B4, and B17B5, or Advanced Rules 20F2, 20G2b, and 20G2c) for units they do not cooperate with.
-
Naval units may not provide naval gunfire support (Basic Rule 26C or Advanced Rule 33A) for units they do not cooperate with.
- Entente Unified Command. Each initial phase beginning with the first initial phase in which conditional reinforcements 11 and 25 (The French Mutiny and British National Emergency) have been triggered (historically this occurred Apr I 18), the Entente player checks to see if the Entente Unified Command has become a reality. To check for this, he rolls a die: If the result is a 6, the Entente Unified Command has become a reality and the penalties for non-cooperation listed under Rule 15E3 do not apply to the Entente for the remainder of the game. Note that the existence of the Entente Unified Command has no affect on the cooperation (or non-cooperation) of Entente nations for supply purposes (Rule 15E2).
F. Breakdowns.
Various units may break down into component units. These component units may subsequently assemble to reform the parent (original) unit.
-
Procedure. A phasing unit may break down into its component units at the start of any movement, reaction movement, or exploitation phase. There is no MP cost to break down. Remove the unit from the map or replacement pool, place it in the correct box on the appropriate Game Chart, and place its breakdown units in its hex or replacement pool. The stacking limit (Rule 8A) may be violated when a unit breaks down, as long as the limit will not be violated at the end of the phase. Phasing units may assemble to reform their parent unit at the end of any movement, reaction movement, or exploitation phase, if the correct units are stacked in the same hex at that time. Remove the assembling units from the map and place the parent unit in the hex. If units at different states (such as different disruption states per Rule 3A5, different fatigue states per Rule 6B4, or different general supply states per Rule 11F) are assembled to reform a parent unit, the assembled unit assumes the worst state of its component units. For example, if a badly disrupted brigade and an undisrupted brigade assemble into a division, then the division is badly disrupted.
-
Game Charts. Each player's game charts show which units may break down and lists their component units. The charts detail, by nationality, unit type, and unit ratings, all allowed breakdowns. Units not listed on these chart may not break down. A player may not break down more units than there are breakdown counters provided in the game. Each game chart has a number of labeled boxes. When a unit is broken down, place its counter in the appropriate box on the applicable game chart.
-
Breakdown Combinations.
a. General. Some units do not have specific break-down counters. Instead, the lettered breakdown counters of the appropriate nationality/unit type are used. Each specifically lettered set of breakdown counters may be used to break down one unit at a time, and the unit broken down is placed in the corresponding lettered box on the chart.
b. Specific. Most units have specific breakdown counters; these units are identified on the unit breakdown charts. Such a unit may break down using only its specific breakdown counters, and these breakdown counters may not be used to break down any other unit. Designers' Note: With the exception of specialized units like the British naval division, Austro-Hungarian mountain divisions (where the brigade was the operational unit), and German cavalry divisions on the east front, it was rare for units to operate broken down in WW I. (The African theater was an exception to this normal rule, as the low unit density there mandated that units often operated broken down spread out over long distances.) The OBs and game charts reflect this, as breakdowns components are only given for these types of units. (Although it is our intent to give each major power a limited number of generic rifle division breakdown counters as space in the countermix of the various games in The Great War series permits.) Players will also note that the breakdown rules are used to show how countries like Britain took exceedingly long periods of time to complete formation of certain units. In Britain's case the infantry components of rifle divisions often completed formation 6 months to a year before the artillery did. We have shown this by splitting such divisions into a rifle component and an artillery component; and leaving it up to the player to assemble them into a division. Note, however, that it is intentional that such units, once assembled, cannot be broken down again (as the game charts do not list their breakdown (only assembly) components and do not contain breakdown boxes for them.)
G. Siege (Advanced Rule).
If, at the start of a player's movement phase, a hex containing enemy units is surrounded by friendly units (that is, friendly units occupy every adjacent (per Rule 3E5) hex, then the phasing player may place the enemy units in the surrounded hex under siege. The sieging player (the surrounding player) establishes the siege by moving one or more units from his surrounding force into the besieged hex (the hex containing the enemy units under siege). While a siege is in effect, the following special rules apply:
-
Besieged units have a ZOC in the hex they occupy only; their ZOCs do not extend into adjacent hexes while they are besieged. Note that ZOCs of sieging units are not affected.
-
Units of the besieged player, may only enter a hex under siege by means of air or naval transport. Note that units of the sieging player may freely enter or leave the besieged hex by an form of movement allowed by the normal rules.
-
Both sides may stack units in a hex under siege up to the maximum stacking limit for the hex.
-
Besieged units may attack sieging enemy units in their hex (only); they may not attack enemy units in adjacent hexes. Note that sieging units are under no such restriction; they may attack enemy units in both the sieged hex and adjacent hexes. The sieging player may attack besieged units with his units in the besieged hex and in adjacent hexes. Note that siege has no effect on ownership of the hex. A siege is immediately lifted when:
-
All sieging units leave the besieged hex.
-
A unit of the same side as the units under siege occupies any hex adjacent (per Rule 3E5) to the besieged hex. If a siege is lifted in this manner, the sieging player must immediately retreat all sieging units (per Rule 9F2). Special: Previously besieged units do not regain the ability to extend ZOCs into adjacent hexes until all retreat mandated by this rule is completed.
Rule 16 — Ground Replacement System
During the course of the game, each player receives reinforcements and replacements and performs various reinforcement activities such as converting, reorganizing, disbanding, transferring, and withdrawing units. Players receive reinforcements and replacements during their initial phases. If a unit enters play (as a reinforcement or replacement) at a map location (or holding box) that is out of general supply, the unit’s general supply status is the same as that of the map location (or holding box). For example, if the city of Aachen has been out of general supply for two turns and a replacement unit appears there, the unit is in its second turn out of general supply. Units appearing at a map location (or holding box) that is isolated and has been out of general supply for at least two turns are not checked for elimination (per Rule 11F3) on the player turn they are received (or arrive). The orders of battle (OBs) specify all reinforcements and replacements in the game. The OBs are organized by nation, and, unless specified otherwise, reinforcement and replacement items for one nation cannot be taken by another nation. Note: Air and naval reinforcement, replacement, and repair activities are covered in Rules 25 and 35.
A. Reinforcements.
Players receive reinforcements during the course of the game, as given on their OBs. A player’s reinforcements are placed on the map during his initial phase. Reinforcements may be placed only in friendly-owned hexes; these hexes may be in enemy ZOCs. Reinforcements are specified by theater/command, nationality/contingent, and district, specific map location, holding box, or garrison. (Note: Each nation is divided into one or more districts as listed in the appropriate section of Rule 41. Holding boxes and garrisons are covered in Rules 37E/37F.) A reinforcement specified for a district appears in any friendlyowned city (Rule 3E2) in the district. A command-wide reinforcement appears in any friendly-owned city in the command. If a reinforcement has specific entry conditions listed on the OB, follow those instructions. Unless otherwise specified, reinforcement activities that are unable to occur for some reason are delayed until they are able to occur. Example: A reinforcement unable to enter play as specified in the OB is delayed until it can enter play. Note: Various reinforcement rules refer to Man/Equ Pts or other replacement concepts. These are covered in detail in Rule 16B.
- Concepts. The OBs use the following terms and general definitions:
a. Add. Add the indicated new unit to the specified available leader pool, breakdown box, or replacement pool on the appropriate game chart; or add the indicated Man/Equ Pts to the general pool of accumulated replacements for the specified command.
b. Assemble. Assemble the indicated units (per Rule 15F) to form the larger single unit listed.
c. Assign. The OBs require certain units be assigned to garrisons at various times. To do this, first withdraw the indicated unit from play (per Rule 16A1cc), and then assign (add) it to the specified garrison. (Garrisons are covered in detail in Rule 37F.)
d. Available. The indicated unit is now available for the specified purpose (i.e. assembly/breakdown (Rule 15F), reorganization (Rule 16A1t), or call up/substitution (per various conditional reinforcements)).
e. Breakdown. Breakdown the indicated unit to its component units (per Rule 15F).
f. Convert. This specifies when a unit (or units) converts into another unit (or units). The player may convert a unit in any of his initial phases on or after the turn the conversion is specified. To be converted, the unit must be in regular general supply (Rule 11C2), and may not be in an enemy ZOC. When two or more units are involved in a conversion, the converting units must be stacked together or in the same garrison box. Remove the original unit(s) from play and put the new unit(s) in its place. Units removed from play through conversion are out of play; they are not eliminated and may not be replaced. When a unit with a flip side strength is specified as being converted from its weaker strength to its full strength, but the unit is already at full strength, the player first reduces the unit to its weaker strength and then receives Man/Equ Pts equal to the replacement cost of rebuilding/ augmenting the unit to its full strength (see Rule 16B3). The player may either add these points to his general pool of accumulated replacements for the command or place them in the unit's hex (using Man/Equ Pt markers as described in Rule 16B3). The player then performs the conversion using the reduced strength unit.
g. Demobilize. This specifies when a unit is temporarily removed from play. To do this, first withdraw the indicated unit from play (per Rule 16A1cc), and then add the unit to the demobilized units box for the specified district. Note: Demobilized units may remobilize (per Rule 16A1n or 37F8) at a later date.
h. Disarm. This specifies when certain units must be disarmed. Remove the unit from wherever it is on the map or in a replacement pool. Calculate special Man/Equ Pts (per Rule 16B4) for units that are removed from the map (but not from a replacement pool) and divide this number by 2 (rounding down to the nearest 1/2). The result is the number of Man/Equ Pts points the player receives. If the unit was not isolated when disarmed, the player may either add these points to his general pool of accumulated replacements for the command or place them in the hex where the unit was disbanded (using Man/Equ Pt markers as described in Rule 16B3). If the unit was isolated when disarmed, any Man/Equ Pts generated must be placed in the hex where the unit was disarmed. Units removed from play through disarming are out of play; they are not eliminated and may not be replaced.
i. Disband. This specifies when certain units must be disbanded. Remove the unit from wherever it is on the map or in a replacement pool. If the unit was removed from the map, the player receives Man/Equ Pts equal to the unit's replacement cost (Rule 16B3) plus its scrapping value (per the Scrapping Value Table on the Replacement Costs Chart.) If the unit was removed from a replacement pool, the player receives Man Pts equal to its scrapping value (only). If the unit was isolated when disbanded, place these Man/Equ Pts in the hex where the unit was disbanded (using Man/Equ Pt markers as described in Rule 16B3); in all other cases, the player may either place the Man/Pts in the hex or add them to his general pool of accumulated replacements for the command where the unit was disbanded. Units removed from play through disbanding are out of play; they are not eliminated and may not be replaced.
j. Flip. This indicates that at least one of the units that will result when the listed conversion, reorganization, or upgrade is completed is on the reverse of one of the original units; merely flip the original unit over to its converted, reorganized, or upgraded side when the specified reinforcement activity is completed.
k. Foreign Aid. A player may give Equ Pts and Res Pts to neutral countries as described in Rule 16C3. Foreign aid is normally at the discretion of the player, but when the OB lists foreign aid transfers to a command not under the player's control, that foreign aid is mandatory and must be transferred (per Rule 16A1aa below).
l. Forming/Full. Certain units which require a considerable amount of time to form, equip, and train go through a two-step process when appearing as reinforcements. Initially, the unit is listed as “forming” in a district or garrison. At this time, place it in the “forming” box for that district or garrison. When the OB then lists the unit as “full,” remove it from the forming box and receive it as a reinforcement in that district or garrison.
m. Historical. This usually indicates historically significant reinforcement actions that the specified player may follow (at his option) for greater historicity. (These typically cover events which are stupid in game terms (they gene-rally were stupid in real life as well, but were not always obviously so until after the fact); or they cover events in the non-European commands which cannot be duplicated without use of the grand campaign rules.) Note: This term is also used to denote historical losses to naval units that are provided in the OB merely for information.
n. Mobilize/Remobilize. This indicates: 1) When certain full-strength units mobilize (form up and enter play) in the countryside rather than at cities, or 2) When certain cadres and remnants mobilize to full-strength units while in the field. When a full-strength unit mobilizes, the player places the mobilized unit in any friendly-owned hex in the specified district. When a cadre/remnant unit mobilizes to a full-strength unit, the player either: a) Flips the mobilizing cadre/remnant over to its fullstrength side if the cadre/ remnant is in regular general supply (Rule 11C2), or b) Adds Man/Equ Pts equal to the replacement cost of re-building the unit to full strength (see Rule 16B3) to his general pool of accumulated replacements for the command. Remobilize is the same as mobilize except that a unit previously demobilized (Rule 16A1g) returns to play. Designers' Note: Mobilization covers situations like the South African home defense forces and British African Colonial units which would probably form up in the country-side no matter how successful an initial enemy invasion of their mobilization district might be. Mobilization also covers situations such as the British first-line territorial divisions (which begin the war cadred and on coast defense duty) having their remaining manpower and equipment dispatched to the division's location as it is mobilized.
o. Move. This indicates that the listed unit must be moved from one garrison to another garrison. Release (Rule 16A1q) the indicated unit from the first garrison listed, move it by the most expeditious means possible to any hex in the second garrison's area, and then assign (Rule 16A1c) it to the second garrison.
p. Receive. This indicates that the listed unit is received as a reinforcement in the specified command, district, holding or garrison box, or specific on-map location.
q. Release. Release the indicated unit from the specified garrison or African Winter Quarters box and receive it as a reinforcement (Rule 16A1p) at any city (Rule 3E2) in the garrison's area or at any city in the African Winter Quarters Box's command.
r. Remove from. Remove the indicated unit from the specified available leader pool, breakdown box, or replacement pool.
s. Remove to African Winter Quarters Box. Remove the indicated unit from wherever it is on-map and assign it to the African Winter Quarters Box for the command. Special: If the indicated unit is in a replacement pool, it remains there until it is replaced, at which time it must be assigned to the African Winter Quarters Box if the African Winter Quarters conditional reinforcement is in effect.
t. Reorganize. A reorganization works similar to a conversion (16A1f), except that there may be a Man/Equ Pt point cost or gain, depending upon the unit (or units) involved. The Man/Equ Pt costs or gains for each specific reorganization are shown in the OBs. If Man/Equ Pts must be spent, they may be spent from the player's general pool of accumulated replacements for the command or from on-map Man/Equ Pts in the same hex as the reorganizing units. If Man/Equ Pts are generated by the reorganization, the player may either add these points to his general pool of accumulated replacements for the command or place them in the hex where the unit was disbanded (using Man/Equ Pt markers as described in Rule 16B3).
u. Replace. This lists forces that are specially replaced, at no cost to the player. Take the indicated unit from the replacement pool of the specified command and receive it as a reinforcement. This unit is replaced for free, costing no Man/Equ Pts. If there is no appropriate unit in the replacement pool to be replaced, receive Man/Equ Pts equal to its replacement cost instead.
v. Scrap. Scrapping works similar to disbanding (Rule 16A1i), except: 1) No action is taken unless the indicated unit is in the replacement pool, and 2) Man/Equ Pts are received equal to the unit's scrapping value (only). Note: If the indicated unit is not in the replacement pool, it is not scrapped until such time as it enters the replacement pool.
w. Sequester. This indicates when certain units in a garrison must be sequestered (held apart) from the other units in the garrison. Simply move the listed units to the sequestered units section of the garrison's box. Note: Sequestered units are under special restrictions regarding their release from garrison (as described in Rule 37F (Garrisons) and the conditional reinforcement event which required their sequestration).
x. Stand Down. This specifies when various units called up under various conditional reinforcement events must be stood down. Remove the listed unit from wherever it is (on the map, in a holding or garrison box, or in a replacement pool) and place it in the appropriate "available for call up" box. Note that a unit may be stood down when isolated, and that there is no forfeiture of Man/Equ Pts for standing down a unit in the replacement pool. Designers' Note: No Man/Equ Pts are forfeited for standing down units in the replacement pool because all units stood down in the OBs are African Native Levies or Native Laborers; unit types recruited using such ruthless methods that casualties had little or no effect on the ability to raise such units anew.
y. Substitute for... the following. This indicates that the specified unit is exchanged for another unit. To substitute one unit for another, simply remove the first unit from wherever it is (on the map, in a holding or garrison box, in a replacement pool, etc.) and put the new unit in its place. Units removed through substitution are out of play; they are not eliminated and may not be replaced.
z. Switch. Remove the specified unit from the first garrison listed and add it to the second garrison listed. aa. Transfer/Arrive. This lists forces that transfer from one command and arrive in another command. Note that the method of transfer from one command to another (by rail, sea, overland, etc.) is listed; and that if the transfer will take multiple turns to complete, the game turn the unit will arrive at the receiving command is also listed. When the OBs denote that forces transfer between commands under the player’s control, the player simply ignores these transfers. A player must, however, transfer forces to or from commands he does not control, as specified by the OBs. When a transfer is mandatory, treat it the same as a withdrawal (16A1cc). When a mandatory transfer takes place by rail or sea, the player must allocate rail capacity or naval transport capacity, as appropriate, in the transfer-ring command sufficient to transport the units on the turn they transfer out of the command if he has any ability to do so. Example 1: The Sep I 14 regular reinforcements entry in the German OB requires the Central Powers player to transfer 34 REs of units by rail from the West (France/ West Germany) command (which he controls) to the East (East Germany/West Russia) command (which he does not control). Unfortunately, he only has 26 REs of rail capacity available on his NW Europe Standard Gauge Rail Net during this turn. He spends 1 Res Pt to temporarily increase the capacity of this net by 10 REs (which he must do), and then uses 34 REs of his augmented net's capacity of 36 REs to transfer the listed units. Example 2: The Mar II 15 regular reinforcements entry in the French OB re-quires the Entente player to transfer 9 REs of units by sea from the West (France/West Germany) command (which he controls) to the South (West Turkey/Aegean) command (which he does not control). As naval transports with a total capacity of 12 REs are also listed as transferring between these commands at this time, none of the Entente naval transports remaining in the West (France/West Germany) command need to be allocated to the transfer. Example 3: A player is required to transfer 5 REs of units by sea to a command he does not control. He has a single naval transport (with 3 REs of capacity) in the command and must allocate this transport to the transfer. The remaining 2 REs of naval transport capacity are assumed to be supplied by a command he does not control. When a unit arrives in a command by rail, place it in any friendly-owned rail hex in the command adjacent to the command it transferred from. For example, a unit arriving by rail in the West (France/West Germany) command from the East (East Germany/West Russia) command would be placed in any friendly-owned rail hex in Germany along the eastern edge of The Great War map #2. If the unit arrived by rail from another command in the same theater, the owning player may declare the unit to have arrived either by operational rail movement or by strategic rail movement. If the unit arrived by rail from a different theater, the unit arrives by strategic rail movement. Mark arriving units so that their manner of arrival is apparent. During the immediately following friendly movement phase, units that arrived by rail may continue moving as normal, except that units that arrived by operational rail movement are considered to have already spent half of their MPs, and units arriving by strategic rail movement are considered to have already used 100 hexes of their 200 hex allotment. When a unit arrives in a command by sea, place it in any friendly-owned port in the command. Mark arriving units in some manner so it is apparent which units arrived by sea from commands in the same theater and which arrived by sea from a different theater. During the immediately following friendly movement phase, units that arrived by sea from commands in another theater may not spend MPs for any purpose, while units that arrived by sea from commands in the same theater are considered to have already spent half of their MPs. When a unit arrives in a command overland, place it in any friendly-owned hex in the command adjacent to the command it transferred from. Such a unit may not spend MPs for any purpose in the immediately following friendly movement phase. bb. Upgrade. This is the same as a conversion except that the units to be upgraded must also trace a supply line to an operational friendly-owned factory in their nation's home district. If the unit cannot trace a supply line to an eligible factory, the player receives Man/Equ Pts equal to the replacement cost of augmenting the unit to full strength (see Rule 16B3) at any eligible factory. If no factory is eligible to receive these Man/Equ Pts, the points are forfeited instead. (Factories are covered in Rule 37B.) cc. Withdraw. The OBs require certain units be with-drawn from play at various times. Any unit of the indicated nationality, contingent, size, type, and strength may be withdrawn. An isolated unit may not be withdrawn. A with-drawn unit is out of play (simply remove it from the map, holding box, garrison box, or replacement pool it occupies) and may not return to play unless called for in the OBs. If the unit to be withdrawn is in a replacement pool, then the player forfeits Man/Equ Pts equal to the unit's replacement cost. If the player does not have sufficient Man/Equ Pts to meet this cost, then the player maintains a deficit (per Rule 16B1b) until he has the points available. The player must also remove from the replacement pool (per Rule 16A1n) an eliminated unit, as soon as an appropriate unit is in the pool. When the OB requires a cadre or remnant to withdraw, the owning player may instead withdraw a full strength unit that has the indicated cadre/remnant. If he does this, he receives Man/Equ Pts equal to the cost of rebuilding the cadre/remnant to its full strength. These Man/Equ Pts may not be used during the initial phase they are generated but may be used thereafter. dd. Either A or B. This indicates the player may choose which of the two listed activities he will perform. ee. Combinations. The OBs often combine two or more reinforcement activities into a single entry. In such cases, carry out the reinforcement activities in the order listed. For example, if the OB entry for a unit specified: "Release from Garrison of Great Britain-----Transfer (Sea) to West (France/West Germany)", then the specified unit would first be released from the Garrison of Great Britain (per Rule 16A1q) and then transferred by sea to the West (France/West Germany) command (per 16A1aa). ff. Linked. This indicates that a linked series of reinforcement activities follows. These activities are numbered (1, 2, 3, etc.), and must be carried out in numerical order. Some numbered activities are further broken down by letter (1A, 1B, 1C, etc.). Within a specific numbered activity, the lettered actions may be carried out in any order, but all of these lettered actions must be completed before the next higher numbered activity may be started. For example, if a linked series of reinforcement activities included steps #1A, 1B, 1C, and 2 then the player may carry out the activities under steps 1A, 1B, and 1C in any order he desires, but steps 1A, 1B, and 1C must all be completed before step 2 can be begun. Designers' Note: The "linked" OB listings usually break down reorganizations or conversions that involve multiple units into discrete steps so that players do not have to pull too many units out of the line at any one time. (However, there is nothing stopping a player from doing everything at one gulp in a single initial phase if he wants to and arranges for all the normal requirements for each action to be met.) This procedure also allows players to easily follow the major organizational changes no matter how convoluted the reorganization process historically was. gg. Special/Other. Follow whatever OB instructions appear for special reinforcement events.
- Conditional Reinforcements. Each player may receive conditional reinforcements. A player receives a conditional reinforcement in his initial phase in which he meets the conditions for its appearance for the first time. These reinforcements and their conditions for arrival are listed on the players’ OBs.
B. Replacements.
- Production. Manpower points (Man Pts), equipment points (Equ Pts), and resource points (Res Pts) are collectively called production. Players receive and use production during their initial phases. Unused production may be accumulated for use in later turns. (Note: It is fundamental to the play of The Great War that Man Pts and Equ Pts (but not Res Pts) be received, accumulated, and used in increments of 1/2 point.) Designers' Note: Each Res Pt represents 100,000 to 1,000,000 field artillery shells (or a proportionally smaller number of heavier shells), using a graduated scale ranging from 100,000 shells in 1914 to 1,000,000 shells in 1918. Each Equ Pt represents 24x 3" guns (or a proportionally smaller number of larger guns) or 100 heavy MGs. (Guns/MGs of obsolescent or obsolete design they are further discounted.) Each Man Pt represents 5,000 men. This accounts for both the actual material going into a unit plus about a 50% margin for inefficiency and small-scale losses below the scale reflected in actual unit elimination.
a. Receipt/Placement. Players receive production on the I turn of each production cycle: i.e. the Jan I, Mar I, May I, Jul I, Sep I, and Nov I turns of each year. The Production Charts list each nation's production. A player receives his production in his initial phase as follows:
-
Man Pts. These are received as specified on the various Manpower Production Charts in the OBs. Note that certain conditional reinforcement actions may increase or decrease the number of Man Pts received; while enemy ownership of certain cities may also decrease the number of Man Pts received. (Items affecting Man Pt production are summarized at the bottom of each Manpower Production Chart.) Example: The Entente player controls the West (France/West Germany) command during his Jan I 18 initial phase and receives Belgian/ Portuguese, British, French, and American Man Pts as listed on the Manpower Production Charts in the Minor Forces OB-West, Entente OB-British Forces (I), Entente OB-French Forces (I), and Entente OB-American Forces booklets, respectively. He, therefore, receives the following : 0.5 Belgian Regulars Man Pts 1 Portuguese Regulars Man Pt 12.5 British Imperial Army Man Pts 8 Anzac Man Pts 10 Canadian Man Pts 0.5 South African Man Pts 11 French Metropolitan Army Man Pts 3 French Army of Africa Man Pts 4 French Colonial Man Pts 0.5 French Foreign Contingent Man Pts 4 American Man Pts Note that production of Belgian Regular Man Pts was reduced from 3.5 due to Central Powers ownership of the cities of Liege, Bruxelles, Antwerpen, and Gent); that production of Imperial Army Man Pts was reduced from 13.5 as the Irish Rebellion has occurred.; and that no American Man Pts are being diverted to North Russia or Siberia. Newly produced Man Pts may be added to the player's general pool of accumulated replacements for the specified command, or placed on-map in any friendly owned cities (Rule 3E2) in regular general supply (Rule 11C2) in the specified command (using Man Pt markers as described in Rule 16B3).
-
Equ Pts/Res Pts (Basic Rule). When using this basic rule, Equ Pts and Res Pts are received as indicated on the Historical Production Table on the player's Production Charts. Example: The Central Powers player controls the West (France/West Germany) command during his Jan I 18 initial phase. He consults the Historical Production Table on the Central Powers Production Chart (West) and finds that he receives 42 Equ Pts and 21 Res Pts. Newly produced Equ Pts may be added to the player's general pool of accumulated replacements for the specified command, or placed on-map in the same manner as Man Pts (but using Equ Pt markers). Newly produced Res Pts are placed at any friendlyowned cities in regular general supply in the specified command (using Res Pt markers as described in Rule 11G).
-
Equ Pts/Res Pts (Advanced Rule). When using this advanced rule, Equ Pts and Res Pts are produced at friendly-owned factories in production. This rule makes use of several concepts relating to resource centers (Rule 37A) and factories (Rule 37B) and is fully explained in Rule 38 (Advanced Production System).
b. Deficit. Occasionally, a rule will require a player to spend an amount of production. For example, a player may have to pay a Man Pt penalty if a garrison is below its required size. If the player does not have sufficient production to pay the penalty, he incurs a deficit in that type of production. Each time he receives that type of production, he must spend it to pay off his deficit. He cannot spend that type of production for other game purposes until the deficit is paid off.
-
Replacement Pools. Both players have replacement pools. Each player has a separate replacement pool for each command he controls. (A player's replacement pools are located on his various game charts.) Note that a player's replacement pools never combine, not even when the player controls two or more commands. When a unit is eliminated, place it in the appropriate replacement pool. For example, if a unit is eliminated in the West (France/West Germany) command, place it in the replacement pool box on the France Game Chart if it is an Entente unit, or in the replacement pool box on the West Germany Game Chart if it is a Central Powers unit. Note that each replacement pool has a separate section for units eliminated while isolated (these units are more expensive to replace). The OBs may also specify that certain reinforcement units be added to, or removed from, the players' replacement pools. The phasing player may switch units between the replacement pools of commands he controls, so long as an overland supply line (Rule 11B1) of any length can be traced from a friendlyowned city (Rule 3E2) in regular general supply (Rule 11C2) in the originating command to a friendly-owned city in regular general supply in the destination command. Such transfers occur in the initial phase, after all other reinforcement/replacement activities have been performed.
-
Replacements. Players receive Man Pts and Equ Pts, which are used to replace eliminated units, to rebuild cadres and remnants to full strength, and to augment units at reduced strength to full strength. Man Pts and Equ Pts are collectively called replacements. Replacements may be on-map or in a general pool. Each player has a separate general pool of accumulated replacements for each command he controls. Note that these general pools never combine. When a Man Pt or Equ Pt is received, place it on-map or add it to the accumulated replacements in the specified general pool as appropriate. (Use Man Pt/Equ Pt markers to denote the presence of replacements on-map. Use any convenient method to distinguish between Man Pts of different contingents. Place status markers under the Man Pt/Equ Pt marker to note the specific number of points present.) The phasing player may switch his replacements between his general pools and the map during his initial phases (after all other reinforcement/replacement activities have been performed) as follows:
-
From one General Pool to another General Pool: The player must be able to trace an overland supply line (Rule 11B1) of any length from any friendly-owned city (Rule 3E2) in regular general supply (Rule 11C2) in the originating pool's command to any friendly-owned city in regular general supply in the destination pool's command. Simply deduct the transferred points from the one pool and add them to the other pool.
-
From On-Map to a General Pool: The hex containing the Man Pt or Equ Pt must be in regular general supply. Simply remove the point from the map and add it to the player's general pool of accumulated replacements for the command in which the hex is located.
-
From a General Pool to On-Map: Simply deduct the Man Pt or Equ Pt from the total accumulated replacements in the general pool and place it in any friendly-owned hex in regular general supply in the general pool's command. Treat an on-map Man Pt as if it were an unsupported 1/2 RE static unit with an attack strength of 0, a defense strength of 1/2, and a movement rating of 4. Note that this means that on-map Man Pts may move using all forms of ground movement, may move by air and naval transport, count against stacking, may participate in combat, are affected by combat results, may be carried by transport units, and are counted for purposes of special replacements (Rule 16B4 below). Treat an on-map Equ Pt as if it were a 1/2 RE logistics item. Note that this means that an on-map Equ Pt may move by rail and river transport, be carted by Army HQs and transport units (but not by other ground units), move by air and naval transport, and be captured by the enemy as described in Rule 11H. Designers' Note: On-map Man Pts were a common feature in the Eastern Theater, with various march (or replacement) battalions (and regiments and brigades) frequently being used in combat roles until their manpower was needed to replace losses in the permanent units. The largest example of Equ Pt capture during the war, was at Caporetto in 1917 where the Austrians captured 8,000+ Italian artillery pieces. Even counting only those guns the Austrians actually put into service with front-line units, this is a minimum of 28 Equ Pts!
a. Replacement Strengths. The replacement strength of a unit is the number of Man Pts and/or Equ Pts it costs to replace the unit. To determine a unit's replacement strength consult the "replacement strengths" section of the Replacement Costs Chart. Special: A unit's replacement strength is doubled while in the eliminated while isolated section of a replacement pool.
b. Replacement Uses. In general, Man Pts are contingentspecific, and these points may not be used for other contingents. For example, French Colonial Man Pts may be used to replace French Colonial units, but not French Metropolitan Army, Army of Africa, or French Foreign Contingent units. Exceptions to this general rule are described under the appropriate nation's section of Rule 41. Equ Pts are generic; and these points may be used for any contingents. Replacing a unit uses Man Pts only, Equ Pts only, or a combination of the two, depending on the type of unit. To determine the number of each type of replacement point that must be used to replace a unit, consult the "replacement uses" section of the Replacement Costs Chart.
c. Replacing Eliminated Units. Replacements may be used to replace an eliminated unit. Special #1: A unit with a cadre or remnant side may only be replaced to its cadre or remnant strength; it may not be replaced to its full strength (although in later turns it may be rebuilt to full strength per 16B3d below). Special #2: Some units have differing strengths on their fronts and backs, even though neither side is a cadre or a remnant; such units may be replaced at either strength (regardless of which strength they were at when they entered the replacement pool), if (and only if) both sides of the counter have the same unit type and movement rating. For example, a 4-3-4/8-6-4 Siege Art [II]/[III] that entered the replacement pool at its 4-3-4 [II] strength could be replaced at that strength or at its 8-6-4 [III] strength; but a 1-2-7/2-8 Mtd Rifle [III] that entered the replacement pool at its 1-2-7 strength cannot be replaced at its 2-8 strength; similarly, a 2-3-6 Lt Rifle/ Amphib Lt Rifle [III] that entered the replacement pool as a Lt Rifle unit cannot be replaced as an Amphib Lt Rifle unit. A player may replace eliminated units only during his initial phases. The player may replace units using replacements in his general pools. Replacements in a command's general pool may be spent to replace units from that command's replacement pool only. For example, replacements in the South (Balkans) general pool of accumulated replacements may be spent to replace units from the South (Balkans) replacement pool, but may not be spent to replace units from any other command's replacement pool. He spends the replacements required to replace the unit, removes it from the replacement pool, and places it at any friendly-owned city (Rule 3E2) in regular general supply (Rule 11C2) in the command. For example, a unit replaced from the South (Balkans) replacement pool would be placed at any friendly-owned city in regular general supply in the South (Balkans) command. The player may replace units using his on-map replacements. On-map replacements may be spent to replace units only from the replacement pool of the command the replacements are in, and only if the hex where they are to be spent is in regular general supply (Rule 11C2). Replacements from two or more on-map hexes cannot be combined. Replacements in the command's general pool may be spent in combination with on-map replacements. The owning player spends the replacements require to replace the unit, removes the unit from the replacement pool, and places it at the hex where the on-map replacements were spent.
d. Rebuilding Cadres/Remnants to Full Strength. Replacements may be used to rebuild a unit at cadre or remnant strength to its full strength. A player may rebuild cadres/remnants to full strength during any initial phases. Note that a player may rebuild units in both friendly and enemy initial phases. The player may rebuild a cadre/remnant using his replacements in a general pool or on-map. Replacements in a general pool may be used to rebuild cadres/remnants in their command only. If replacements from a general pool are to be used to rebuild a cadre/remnant, the unit to be rebuilt must be in regular general supply (Rule 11C2). On-map replacements may be used to rebuild cadres/ remnants only if the unit to be rebuilt, and the replacements to be used, occupy the same hex. Note that on-map replacements and replacements in a general pool may be combined to rebuild a cadre/remnant in a hex in regular general supply. The cadre/remnant to be rebuilt may not be in an enemy ZOC unless its hex contains a fortification (excepting fieldworks). Note that units in hexes containing fortifications (except fieldworks), including contested hexes (Rule 9J) with fortifications, may be rebuilt in enemy ZOCs. The owning player must spend the replacements required to rebuilt the cadre or remnant. Then flip the cadre/ remnant over to its full strength side.
e. Augmenting Units to Full Strength. Some units have differing strengths on their fronts and backs, even though neither side is a cadre or a remnant. When these units are in play at their weaker strength, a player may spend replacement points to augment them to full strength. For example, a 9-8-4/10-12-4 Hv Art X in play at its 9-8-4 strength could be augmented to its 1012-4 strength, and a 4-5-5/9-5 Fld Art [III]/[X] in play at its 45-5 [III] strength could be augmented to its 9-5 [X] strength. A player may augment units at reduced strength to their full strength only during his initial phases. The player may augment a unit at reduced strength to its full strength in the same manner as a cadre/remnant is rebuilt. Special: A unit at reduced strength whose reduced and full strength sides have differing movement ratings may not be augmented to full strength. (These units change from one side to another only as directed by the OBs.) For example, a 2-3-7/3-8 Bike [X] at its 2-3-7 reduced strength cannot be augmented to its 3-8 full strength except as directed by the appropriate OB.
f. Replacement Limits. Each player may replace, rebuild, and/or augment only a limited number of certain unit types, per nation. The limits are:
-
C/M Units (Rule 3A2): Only 1 c/m RE may be replaced per month. For the Entente only, this increases to 2 REs per month from Feb I 18 and to 4 REs per month from Feb I 19.
-
Artillery Units (Rule 12): Only 6 artillery REs may be replaced per month. For the Entente only, this decreases to 3 REs per month prior to Feb I 16. Special: For the purpose of this rule (only): field artillery units (Rule 12B1) count at half their normal RE size; and siege artillery units (Rule 12B3) and heavy siege artillery units (Rule 12B4) count at double their normal RE size.
-
Engineer Units (Rule 13): Only 2 engineer REs may be replaced per month. Special: For the purpose of this rule (only): construction engineer units count at half their normal RE size; and railroad engineer, port construction engineer, flamethrower, siege engineer, and gas engineer units count at double their normal RE size.
-
Cavalry Units (Rule 14D): Only 6 cavalry REs may be replaced per month. Special: For Russia (only) the limit is 12 cavalry REs per month.
-
Light/Mountain Units (Rules 14E, 14F): Only 6 light/mountain REs may be replaced per month. The above limits are for major and great powers (per Rule 3B4); halve all limits for minor powers; also, the limits for minor powers never increase (they do decrease). Special: Units replaced for free per the OBs do not count against these limits. If a unit subject to the above limits is replaced from the eliminated while isolated section of a replacement pool, it counts at double its RE size. Units which qualify for more than one category above count against each category. For example, if the Entente player replaces an engineer tank regiment, this unit counts as 1 RE against both the c/m and engineer categories.
- Special Replacements. When units are eliminated due to combat or overrun, the owning player receives special replacements in the form of Man Pts and/or Equ Pts. Special replacements are calculated and received separately for each command a player controls.
a. Special Replacements from Units Eliminated while not Isolated. When a non-isolated unit is eliminated, the owning player places the unit to one side. When a non-isolated unit is reduced to cadre/remnant, the owning player notes the actual replacement strength loss by taking the difference between the cadre/remnant replacement strength and the unit's full strength replacement cost. In the next initial phase (his or the enemy's), the player determines his total losses by calculating the total replacement strength loss of his units eliminated and units reduce-d to cadre/remnant since the previous initial phase (and he may then place these units in his replacement pool). The losses for each contingent are calculated separately. The player determines the number of replacements received as special replacements, based on his losses. To calculate these RPs, divide all Equ Pt loss totals by 4; divide French, German, Anzac, and Canadian Man Pt loss totals by 3, divide American and Russian Man Pt loss totals by 5, and divide all other Man Pt loss totals by 4. (Round down to the nearest 1/2 point.) The result is the number of Equ Pts and contingent-specific Man Pts he receives due to special replacements. Add these replacements to the general pool of accumulated replacements for the command in which the losses occurred. Example: In the Entente initial phase, the Entente player finds that he has lost unisolated units with a total replacement cost of 8 Equ Pts, 14 French Metropolitan Army Man Pts, and 5 British Imperial Army Man Pts in his West (France/West Germany) command. Thus, he receives as special replacements, and adds to his general pool of accumulated replacements for his West (France/ West Germany) command 2 Equ Pts, 4.5 French Metropolitan Army Man Pts, and 1 British Imperial Army Man Pt. Designers' Note: The differences in divisors used for special replacement Man Pts are due to the following: 1) France allowed the fewest wound exemptions (many more cases can be found of French soldiers being wounded on multiple occasions and still returning to combat than can be found for other countries); 2) Germany probably had the most efficient system for keeping track of and returning the wounded to the front; 3) British Dominion troops were probably the most likely troops overall to volunteer to return to combat; 4) American adherence to rifle assault doctrine resulted in relatively high casualties even in low-level combat; and 5) Russia suffered from the double burden of poor medical treatment, and probably the worst system of any nation in the war for tracking and returning wounded to the front.
b. Special Replacements from Units Eliminated while Isolated. When a combat results in units being eliminated while isolated, the owning player calculates his total losses for the combat and the resulting special replacements per 16B4a above, except he does this during the combat phase, immediately after implementing the combat result. Players receive special replacements which result from this procedure as follows:
-
If the combat hex is friendly-owned: The player places his special replacements in the combat hex.
-
If the combat hex is enemy-owned, but at least one adjacent (Rule 3E5) hex is friendly-owned: The player places his special replacements in any friendly-owned hex adjacent to the combat hex.
-
If both the combat hex and all adjacent hexes are enemyowned: The player forfeits his special replacement Man Pts and all of his special replacement Equ Pts are captured by the enemy player and placed in the combat hex.
C. Special Considerations.
-
Voluntary Disbanding. In addition to disbanding units as required by the OBs, players may voluntarily disband certain other of their units. Players may voluntary disband any of their eligible units in commands they control. A unit is eligible for voluntary disbandment if it is on-map and has a printed movement rating of 5 or more. Note that units in the replacement pool and units with a printed movement rating of 4 or less (including units with a printed movement rating of "W" or "R") cannot voluntarily be disbanded. Special: Each player may voluntarily disband only a limited number of units for each nation they control; the limits are: 12 REs of units per month per major or great power (Rule 3B4), and 4 REs of units per month per minor power. A player may voluntarily disband eligible units in his initial phases, using the procedure in Rule 16A1i (Disband).
-
Voluntary Scrapping. In addition to scrapping units as required by the OBs, players may voluntarily scrap units in replacement pools they control. Note that there are no restrictions on the number or types of units that may be scrapped voluntarily. A player may voluntarily scrap units in his initial phases, using the procedure in Rule 16A1v (Scrap).
-
Foreign Aid. Players may give Res Pts and Equ Pts to neutral countries as foreign aid. (The game effects of this foreign aid are covered in the appropriate section of Rule 41 Nations. Typically a player gives such aid in an attempt to influence the neutral country to join its side.) The player must move the foreign aid item to a city (Rule 3E2) in the neutral country to which the aid is to be given. For the purpose of moving foreign aid to a neutral country (only), the player may use ports in the country and may use the rail capacity of rail nets under the country's control. For example, the Entente player could deliver Equ Pts to a neutral Portugal by moving the Pts by naval transport to the Portuguese port of Lisboa and then disembarking them there. Once a Res Pt or Equ Pt arrives in a neutral country it ceases to be owned by the player, and is thenceforth part of the neutral country's forces.
-
Early Activation of Forming Units. Players may attempt early activation of a forming unit, before the turn a unit becomes full strength. Exception: A player may not attempt early activation of forming units in a command in which no enemy units in regular general supply (Rule 11C2) are present. To do so, in any friendly initial phase after the turn a unit is placed in a forming box, the owning player rolls a die and consults the Ground Success Table; results are: Success, the unit is received that turn as a reinforcement, at full strength; Failure, the unit is received at cadre/remnant strength. If it has no cadre/remnant strength, it is eliminated and placed in the replacement pool; or Failure*, the unit is eliminated and placed in the replacement pool.
-
1-2-4/1-2-5 March/Mtn March X: 4 Man Pts.
-
2-3-4 March X: 6 Man Pts The Man Pts to be assembled must all be in the same hex. When the assembly occurs, merely substitute a March X of the appropriate strength for the Man Pts. Players may break down their March Xs into Man Pts in any friendly initial phase. Merely substitute the listed Man Pts for the March X.
- Training/Replacement Forces. Note: Rule 37F4 (Trng/Repl Forces Garrisons) details how these forces are released from garrison and returned to garrison. Each training and replacement forces garrison is affiliated with a specific nation and command. A garrison is affiliated with the nation who controls the garrison's district, and with the command in which its district is located. For example, the Mainland France Training and Replacement Forces Garrison is affiliated with the nation of France and the West (France/West Germany) command. Release of training and replacement forces from garrison can affect reinforcement/replacement activities:
a. Reinforcements. If a training and replacement forces garrison is missing, certain reinforcement activities in the garrison's affiliated command involving units from the garrison's affiliated nation may be affected. The reinforcement activities that may be affected are: add, avail-able, convert, forming/full, mobilize/remobilize, receive, reorganize, replace, and upgrade. Each time such a reinforcement event occurs, the player rolls a die and consults the Ground Success Table (note that there are no modifiers to this roll); results are: Success, the reinforcement activity occurs as normal; or Failure, the reinforcement activity is forfeited.
b. Replacements. If a training and replacement forces garrison is missing, production of Man Pts in the garrison's affiliated command by its affiliated nation is halved.
- Making Zero-Movement Artillery Mobile. Players may make mobile a limited number of zero-movement field artillery units (Rule 12B1) and heavy artillery units (Rule 12B2) each month beginning with the Oct I 14 turn. (Note that such units may not be made mobile prior to Oct I 14; & that zeromovement coast artillery units may never be made mobile using this procedure.) The limits are:
| Nation | Oct 14 to Dec 14 | Jan 15 to Mar 15 | Apr 15 to Jun 15 | Jul 15 and on |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| All Minor Powers, Japan, Ottoman Emp. | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 |
| Britain, France, Italy, Russia, USA | 3 | 6 | 9 | 12 |
| Austria-Hungary, Germany | 6 | 12 | 18 | 24 |
Note that these limits apply separately to each nation. Special: Halve the limits for Austria and Germany if either the East or West theater is out of play. A player may make mobile his zero-movement artillery units in his initial phases. To make non-Russian zero-movement artillery units mobile, the player simply selects an eligible unit and then either: A) Flips the unit over to its mobile side (if it has a mobile side), or B) Withdraws the unit and receives Man/Equ Pts equal to twice its replacement strength (if the unit does not have a mobile side). To make Russian zero-movement artillery units mobile, the player uses the following procedure: he selects an eligible unit; rolls a die and consults the Ground Success Table (note that
there are no modifiers to this roll); if the attempt succeeds, withdraw the unit and receive Man/Equ Pts equal to twice its replacement strength; any other result and the attempt fails. Note that a failed attempt still counts against the RE limits for that month. The player may make a unit mobile if it is on map or in an offmap fortress garrison. If the unit is in a fortress garrison, it is released from garrison when made mobile. (Fortress garrisons are listed in the OBs and covered in detail in Rule 37F1.) When a zero-movement heavy artillery unit or field artillery unit in the hex of an improved fortress is made mobile, the fortress immediately becomes unimproved per Rule 15B4 (Fortresses). (Note that there is no effect to the fortress if it was already unimproved.) (Designers’ Note: The limiting factor in making fortress artillery mobile was usually the supply of gun carriages. The Entente (and most of the minor powers) had an acute shortage of these; while the Central Powers did not (Germany, in particular, had a central stockpile of gun carriages which could be rolled out as needed). The special procedure for Russian artillery reflects the facts that the Russian fortress artillery was a separate arm of the Tsarist army, (considered the elite branch of that army prior to the war), and time and again its commanders (who were almost always superior in rank to the Russian field commanders) refused to release the fortress guns to operate with the ‘inferior’ infantry and field artillery units.)
-
Local Drafting. When a player liberates (regains ownership of) enemy-owned major city hexes in a home district of a nation he controls, he may conduct an immediate draft of Man Pts. The liberated major city hex must have been enemyowned for at least 12 consecutive turns prior to its liberation. When the draft is conducted, the player receives 3 Man Pts per major city hex; the nationality/ contingent of these Man Pts is that of the district containing the hex. For example, liberated major city hexes in France provide French Metropolitan Army Man Pts, while liberated major city hexes in Bavaria provide Bavarian Man Pts. The player conducts the draft upon liberation of the major city hex, and the Man Pts are either added to the general pool of accumulated replacements for the hex's command if the hex is in regular general supply, or placed at the hex if the hex is not in regular general supply.
-
Isolation and Unit Appearances. In any turn in which reinforcement units or units of a garrison are placed in the cities (Rule 3E2) of a district, only one reinforcement or garrison unit may be placed in an isolated friendly-owned city if there are any unisolated friendly-owned cities available in the district.
-
Restrictions on the use of Replacements the turn they are Generated. Man Pts and Equ Pts generated by disarming, disbanding, reorganizing, or scrapping units which are added to a general pool of accumulated replacements may not be used during the initial phase they are generated but may be used in initial phases thereafter. Note that there is no restriction on using Man/Equ Pts generated in a phase which are placed on-map (as on-map replacement points must be used in the hex they occupy).
-
Loss of all Cities. If all cities (Rule 3E2) in a district, command, or garrison's area are enemy-owned when a reinforcement is to be received there, the reinforcement is forfeited instead. For example, if a reinforcement is listed as being received in the garrison of Ireland, but all cities in Ireland are enemy-owned, the reinforcement is forfeited. Note that forfeited units are out of play; they are not eliminated and may not be replaced. If a player owns no cities in a district during his initial phase, then all his "forming" and "demobilized" units in the district are eliminated. If a player owns no cities in a garrison's area, then all his units in the garrison (including all "forming" units in the garrison) are eliminated. If a player owns no cities in a command during his initial phase, then all his replacements in the command's general pool (Rule 16B2) are forfeited, and all of his units in the command's replacement pool are removed from play.
Rule B17 — Basic Air Rules
Players should use the basic air rules until they are thoroughly familiar with the core ground rules (Rules 1-16). Once the core ground rules are assimilated, the advanced air rules should be used instead. If these basic air rules are used, do not use the advanced air rules (Rules A17-25).
A. Air Points.
When using the basic air rules, set aside all air units, zeppelin base markers, and balloon barrage markers; and ignore all mention of these counters in the Orders of Battle. These counters are not used; instead, their effect is simulated through the use of air points. The number of air points a player has available for air missions each game turn is equal to the number of ARPs his air order of battle lists as available for that production cycle under the commands he controls. Example: It is the May I 15 turn and the Central Powers player controls the West (France/West Germany) command. His air OB lists that command with 4 ARPs available for the production cycle beginning with the May I 15 turn. The Central Powers player, therefore, has 4 air points available during each of the May I 15, May II 15, Jun I 15, and Jun II 15 turns.
B. Air Missions.
A player may assign each of his air points to one air mission each player turn. Air points are assigned to air missions during combat and reaction combat phases (only). The effects of these missions are determined as follows:
-
Air Superiority. Both players simultaneously assign their air points to this mission at the start of a phase before any air points are assigned to tactical recon, aerial bombardment, DAS, or GS. Each air point assigned to this mission in excess of the number the opposing player has assigned, allows the owning player to attempt to abort (cancel) the mission of any one air point of his opponent during that phase. For example, if the Entente player assigns 6 air points to air superiority and the Central Powers player assigns 4 air points to the same mission, the Entente player may attempt to abort the missions of up to 2 Central Powers air points assigned to tactical recon, GS, DAS, or aerial bombardment missions that phase. A player desirous of making an attempt to abort an enemy air point announces he will do so immediately after his opponent states the mission and target hex of the air point. For each attempt, roll a die and consult the Ground Success Table; if the attempt succeeds, the air point aborts its mission; if the attempt fails, it has no effect.
-
Tactical Reconnaissance. Only the attacking player may assign air points to this mission; he assigns air points to this mission before any air points are assigned to aerial bombardment, DAS, or GS. The target hex of this mission is any hex containing enemy units. For each tactical recon mission, roll a die, and consult the Ground Success Table once for each air point remaining in the hex after air superiority and AA fire (note the list of die roll modifiers that apply to tactical recon attempts). If any of these attempts succeed, modify the die roll for the bombardment/combat by +1. Note that the die roll is never modified by more than +1, no matter how many attempts succeed. Special: If a tactical recon air mission succeeds in modifying the die roll for a bombardment in a hex by +1, it also automatically modifies the combat resolution die roll for any combat in the hex during the same phase by +1 as well.
-
Aerial Bombardment. Only the attacking player may assign air points to this mission; he assigns air points to this mission before any air points are assigned to DAS or GS. The target hex of this mission is any hex containing enemy units. Air points which survive air superiority and AA fire may bombard per Rule 12C4a.
-
Defensive Air Support. Only the defending player may assign air points to this mission; he assigns air points to this mission before any air points are assigned to GS. The target hex of this mission is any hex containing friendly units. Each air point remaining in the hex after air superiority and AA fire increases the total defense strength of that hex by 1/2 point.
C. Antiaircraft (AA).
Some units have AA strengths printed in the upper left corner of their counters. (Note: In the case of artillery units, the number in the upper left corner of the counter can refer to either the unit's AA strength or its range. If the number is "1", it refers to the unit's AA strength; if the number is "2" or greater, it refers to the unit's range instead.) Some map items and counters have intrinsic AA strengths as listed on the Intrinsic AA Summary, if they are owned by the player. Air points undergo AA fire when flying missions to hexes containing enemy AA. After resolving any air superiority attempts in a hex (per 17B1 above), determine the effects of any AA fire on air points flying missions in the hex. For each air point remaining in the hex, roll a die (modifying the die roll by +1 for every two AA strength points in the hex beyond the first point), and consult the Ground Success Table. If the AA fire attempt succeeds, the air point is aborted (has its mission canceled). If the AA fire attempt fails, it has no effect.
Rule A17 — Advanced Air Rules Introduction
If the advanced air rules (Rules A17-25) are used, do not use Rule B17 (Basic Air Rules).
A. Air Units.
Air units are illustrated on the Unit Identification Chart (UIC).
- Types. There are five basic categories of air units: fighters, bombers, transports, airships, and balloons. Each category contains one or more specific air unit types, as shown on the UIC. For example, the fighter category contains both fighters (type F) and reconnaissance (type R). Unless otherwise noted in the rules, rules about "fighter," "bomber," "transport," "airship," and "balloon" pertain to all air unit types within their respective categories. For example, a rule
describing the abilities of fighters applies to all fighter types.
-
Prefixes. Air unit types may be prefixed by the letter N (for night) as shown on UIC. For example, a type NF is a night fighter: type F (fighter) and prefix N (night). A prefix modifies, but does not change, the category of an air unit. For instance, a night fighter is still a fighter. Unless indicated otherwise in the rules, any ability of a category in general or a type in specific includes all units of that category or type with the night prefix. For example, a rule applying to type F air units applies to F and NF.
-
Codes. Air units may have one or more codes, as listed on the unit identification chart. Codes define certain specific or special capabilities of air units. For example, a type Z with a code M is an airship that carries anti-shipping missiles.
B. Concepts.
- Operational Status. An air unit may be at one of four operational statuses:
-
Operative: The air unit is capable of flying a mission during the current player turn. An operative air unit will be “face up” (ratings side up) at an airbase.
-
Inoperative: The air unit cannot fly a mission. It has flown a harassment mission in the previous player turn, has already flown a mission during the current player turn, or cannot fly a mission due to airbase capacity limits. An inoperative air unit will be “face down” (with “Inop.” displayed) at an airbase. An inoperative air unit will usually become operative in the next initial phase.
-
Aborted: The air unit has been aborted (due to damage from such causes as air combat or antiaircraft fire) and cannot become operative again until regrouped or repaired. An aborted air unit will be placed off-map in the aborted box of the appropriate game chart.
-
Eliminated: The air unit has been eliminated (due to extensive damage from such causes as air combat or antiaircraft fire) and cannot become operative again until replaced. An eliminated air unit will be placed off-map in the eliminated box of the appropriate game chart.
- Terms. The following general terms are used:
-
Target Hex: The target hex of an air unit is the hex in which it is to perform its mission. Example: The target hex of a bomber flying the port bombing mission is the hex containing the port to be bombed.
-
Movement-Group: A movement group consists of one or more air units flying missions to a target hex in an air operation.
-
Escort: An escort is a fighter flying an escort mission.
-
Interceptor: An interceptor is a fighter flying an interception mission.
-
Air Operation (Air Op): An air op consists of one player flying one or more missions to a particular target hex, together with all activities that may occur when resolving the air op: patrol attacks and interception by the enemy player, air combat, antiaircraft fire, mission resolution, and air units returning to base.
-
Mission Force: A mission force consists of all air units flying missions in a target hex other than those flying escort (the escorts) or interception (the interceptors).
- Air Orders of Battle. The air OBs organize air units by theater/command and nationality/contingent.
a. Theaters/Commands. The air OBs list air units by specific commands (see Rule 3F) within a theater. A player will use a particular OB based on the scenario being played, as listed in that scenario's instructions (Rule 42B).
b. Nationalities/Contingents. For each command, the air OBs list air units by nationality and contingent within that nationality (see Rule 3A5). The nationality of the air unit, and the contingent within that nationality it belongs to, affect how the air unit is used (as described in later rules); typically this affects air replacements (Rule 25).
- Game Charts. The players use their various game charts to administer their air units. Each player typically has one game chart for each command he controls. Each of these game charts has an eliminated air units box and an aborted air units box, and may have one or more air unit garrison or holding boxes.
a. Eliminated Air Units Box. This holds the command's eliminated air units. For example, Entente air units eliminated in the West (France/West Germany) command are placed in the eliminated air units box on the France game chart; while Central Powers air units eliminated in the same command are placed in the eliminated air units box on the Germany (West) game chart.
b. Aborted Air Units Box. This holds the command's aborted air units.
c. Garrison and Holding Boxes. These boxes hold various air units while they are part of a required garrison or while based at off-map airbases.
C. Air Activities Phasing.
Air missions occur “on demand” in individual air ops. The air missions rule (Rule 20) lists, by individual mission, which missions are eligible to be flown in air ops that can occur in the various phases of the player turn. Air ops occur in each player turn, as follows (this is also shown on the Master Sequence of Play Summary):
- Initial Phase. The following occurs in the initial phase of each player turn, in this sequence:
-
The phasing player performs all air replacement actions: regrouping, reinforcements, withdrawals, and replacements (Rule 25).
-
All inoperative air units (of both players) become operative. Exception: Air units that flew harassment bombing missions in the previous player turn do not become operative; see Rule 20G2d.
-
For each airbase, the owning player checks its current capacity. If the number of air units present at the base exceeds its current capacity, the player immediately makes inoperative sufficient air units so that the base’s capacity is not exceeded. For example, if an airbase currently has a capacity of 2, and there are 3 air units there, the owning player makes 1 air unit there inoperative.
-
Both players may fly CAP air ops. The non-phasing player may fly harassment bombing air ops. Both players may assign air units to naval patrol air ops.
-
Movement Phase. Players fly any eligible air ops during these phases “on demand:” at any time during the phase they wish.
-
Combat Phase. Before any bombardment is resolved, the following occurs in the combat phase, in this sequence:
-
The attacker flies tactical recon air ops. Bombardment is resolved after all tactical reconnaissance air ops are initiated. The attacker flies aerial bombardment and carpet bombing air ops at any time during the bombardment segment of the combat phase. Before any combat is resolved, the following occurs in the combat phase, in this sequence:
-
The defender flies DAS air ops.
-
The attacker flies GS air ops. Ground combat is resolved after all DAS and GS air ops are initiated. As players resolve ground combat, GS, DAS, and tactical reconnaissance air units resolve their missions and return to base.
-
Reaction Movement Phase. Players fly any eligible air ops during these phases “on demand:” at any time during the phase they wish.
-
Reaction Combat Phase. Before ground combat is resolved, the following occurs in the reaction combat phase, in this sequence:
-
The attacker flies tactical recon air ops.
-
The defender flies DAS air ops.
-
The attacker flies GS air ops. Ground combat is resolved after all DAS and GS air ops are initiated. As players resolve ground combat, GS, DAS, and tactical reconnaissance air units resolve their missions and return to base.
- Exploitation Phase. Players fly any eligible air ops during this phase “on demand:” at any time during the phase they wish. At the end of this phase (which is the end of the player turn), both players return to base all of their fighters still flying CAP air ops.
D. Air Ops Sequence.
Unless otherwise stated for a particular mission, air ops are resolved as they are initiated, in the following air op sequence. In general, one player, the initiating player, initiates an air op and flies one or more missions to a target hex, and the other player, the responding player, will fly patrol attack and interception missions. The following general restrictions govern air ops:
-
One player, the initiating player, announces that he is initiating a specific air op. The air op consists of the player flying one or more missions to a particular target hex. Until the initiating player’s air units reach the target hex, the player is not required to reveal the target hex to the opposing player.
-
The initiating player flies one or more missions to the air op’s target hex and may fly escort missions for his movement groups. The player may not fly missions to any other target hex during this air op. The particular missions the player may fly in an air op are restricted by mission type and phase. For example, in the combat phase, the phasing player may fly GS air ops. In a GS air op, only air units flying the GS bombing mission and fighters flying the escort mission may fly.
-
The other player, the responding player, may fly patrol attack and interception missions against the initiating player’s air units. The responding player may also have eligible fighters already flying CAP missions to patrol attack or intercept the initiating player’s air units. The responding player may not fly any other missions during this air op.
-
After the missions are resolved and air units return to base (see below), the air op is over. Once the air op is over, a player may initiate a new air op. (Note that the same player could initiate a new air op and could even select the same target hex as the previous air op.)
-
Unless specifically stated otherwise in a rule below, the following conditions apply to air ops: 1) Only one air op can occur at the same time. 2) Once an air op is initiated, all other game activities are paused until the air op is resolved. An air op is resolved in the following sequence.
-
Mission Movement Step. The initiating player initiates the air op and flies all air units that will fly missions in the air op. In general, these air units will fly to the air op’s target hex. (Escorts do not necessarily fly all the way to the target hex, as explained in the escort mission, Rule 20B.) The responding player may fly patrol attack missions and resolve patrol attacks against the initiating player’s air units.
-
Interceptor Movement Step. The responding player may fly interception missions to the air op’s target hex.
-
Air Combat Resolution Step. Players resolve air combat between their air units.
-
AA Fire Step. The responding player resolves any antiaircraft (AA) fire against the initiating player’s air units.
-
Mission Resolution Step. The initiating player resolves reconnaissance, bombing, and transport missions.
-
Air Unit Return Step. Both players return to base all air units flying missions. Air units returning to base immediately become inoperative (unless stated otherwise in the rules for specific missions).
Rule 18 — Airbases
Air units take off from and land at airbases. When not flying a mission, an air unit must be on the ground at a friendly-owned airbase. Each hex (excepting mountain, forest, swamp, wooded swamp, or prohibited terrain), fortress, resource center, and point city is an airbase for air units. Special: Airships must use special airbases, represented by Zeppelin base markers (as shown on the Unit Identification Chart). Note that Airship air units may not use regular airbases and non-airship air units may not use zeppelin bases. Designers' Note: WW I aircraft (with the exception of airships and a few types of late-war heavy bombers) could operate from almost anywhere: any stretch of level road or grassy field was a serviceable airfield.
A. Capacity.
The capacity of an airbase is the number of air units that may become operative at that airbase in each initial phase (see Rule 17C1). There is no limit to the number of operative air units that may take off from an airbase during a player turn. There is no limit to the number of air units that may land or be present at an airbase. Airbase capacities are shown on the Airbase Summary. The total airbase capacity of a hex is the sum of the capacities of all the airbase types in the hex. Note that the capacity of some types of airbases in the West theater (only) increase as time goes by. For example, the airbase capacity of a clear terrain hex containing a fortress in the West theater is 2 in 1912-15, 3 in 1916-17, and 4 in 1918-20. When using the advanced naval rules, some naval units are also airbases for specific categories of air units. For example, each CV (aircraft carrier) taskforce naval unit is an airbase for 1 code C (carrier-capable) air unit (as shown on the Unit Identification Chart).
B. Air Unit Escape.
When an enemy ground unit gains ownership of an airbase hex, each air unit there (whether operative or inoperative) attempts to escape. Roll a die for each air unit attempting to escape:
-
On a roll of 1 or 2, the air unit escapes, flying a transfer mission (see below).
-
On a roll of 3 or 4 the air unit does not escape. The air unit is aborted, place it in the aborted box on the appropriate game chart.
-
On a roll of 5 or 6 the air unit does not escape. The air unit is eliminated; place it in the eliminated box on the appropriate game chart. Note: Subtract 1 from the die roll if the air unit attempting to escape is a fighter. Add 1 to the die roll if the air unit is an airship. After rolling for all air units at the airbase, the owning player immediately conducts a series of air ops for the escaping air units. Each escaping air unit may have its own air op, or several may fly in the same air op (if they all have the same target hex). The air op follows the standard air op sequence (Rule 17D), with the escaping air units flying transfer missions (Rule 20A).
-
An operative air unit which escapes becomes inoperative upon landing during the air return step.
-
An inoperative air unit which escapes becomes aborted upon landing during the air return step; place it in the aborted box on the appropriate game chart. If there is no friendly-owned airbase within transfer range, an escaping air unit is automatically eliminated.
C. Airbase Capture.
All enemy airbases (except zeppelin bases) may be captured and used. An enemy airbase is captured when a friendly ground unit gains ownership of the hex. A captured airbase immediately becomes a friendly airbase and may be used from its instant of capture. A zeppelin base is immediately destroyed when an enemy unit gains ownership of its hex.
Rule 19 — Movement of Air Units
Air units fly to their target hexes using movement points. An air unit’s movement rating is the basic number of MPs the air unit has. The air unit’s movement rating may be modified, depending on its mission. This modified movement rating is the air unit’s range for the mission: the maximum number of MPs the air unit may use when flying to its target hex. An air unit always spends 1 MP for each hex it enters. Air units flying missions fly in movement groups. A group can consist of one or more air units. As a group moves to its target hex, other movement groups (which are flying missions to the same target hex) can merge with the group. In any hexes along the path to the target hex, movement groups may join with or split off from the movement group. All air units flying in a movement group move together as a stack. Air units may fly to their target hex in any number of movement groups; it is not required that all air units flying to the same target hex fly in a single group. Note that air units may have spent differing amounts of MPs when they join a particular movement group. If necessary (although it should rarely be needed), use status markers to keep track of MPs for individual air units in a movement group. Air units flying missions return to base during the air unit return step of the air mission sequence. Unless stated otherwise, an air unit has the same range (modified movement rating) when returning to base as it did when flying to its target hex. If for any reason there is no friendly-owned airbase within range when an air unit must return to base, the air unit is immediately eliminated.
Rule 20 — Air Missions
Operative air units may fly any of several missions, depending upon their air unit types. The missions are described in detail below. Each mission lists which air unit types may fly the mission, what their ranges are, when the mission may be flown, and what the effects of the mission are. An air unit may fly only one mission per player turn. A player announces the mission of each of his air units when it takes off. For a bombing or transport mission, the player simply announces that the mission is bombing or transport; he does not have to announce (or even decide upon) the specific type of bombing or transport mission at this time. He decides (and announces) which specific bombing or transport mission is being flown as he resolves the air op.
A. Transfer.
Any air units may fly transfer missions during the movement, reaction movement, and exploitation phases. Exception: Balloon air units may not fly transfer missions. An air unit’s transfer range is three times its printed movement rating. An air transfer mission is flown in a series of legs from airbase to airbase, until the final destination is reached. Each leg has its own target hex and is resolved using the air ops sequence (Rule 17D). The target hex of a leg is a friendlyowned airbase within transfer range. In the air return step of a leg, transferring air units land at the airbase in the target hex, and may immediately fly another leg. The air units continue to fly legs until the final destination is reached, whereupon the air units land there and become inoperative in the air return step. Air units that fly transfer missions in which the total distance flown on all legs exceeds the air unit's printed movement rating may be damaged as a result of flying the mission. (Note that air units that transfer a distance less than or equal to their printed movement rating are never damaged.) Exception: Airships are never damaged when they transfer. Check for damage as follows: The owning player rolls a die roll for each affected air unit immediately upon completion of the transfer mission; if the roll is a 1, 2, or 3 no damage results; if the roll is a 4, 5, or 6 the air unit is damaged; place damaged air units in the aborted air units box on the applicable game chart. Designers' Note: WW I aircraft were somewhat fragile and had high wastage rates when flown over long distances. For those who want the utmost in historicity, modify the damage roll so that damage occurs on a roll 3, 4, 5, or 6 during 1912-15 (the early-war aircraft were very fragile), and on a roll of 5 or 6 during 1918-20 (the late-war aircraft were usually of somewhat more robust construction).
B. Escort.
Fighters may fly escort missions during any air op initiated by their owning player. A fighter’s escort range is its printed movement rating. During an air op, the initiating player may fly escort missions. Escorts (fighters flying this mission) guard friendly air units flying other missions in the air op from patrol attack and interception. An escort flies to any hex within its escort range. It may fly by itself or by joining a movement group. While flying with a movement group, it guards the group against patrol attacks. An escort does not have to fly to the target hex of the air op (and the target hex may be outside its escort range). If it does not fly to the target hex, it immediately returns to base and becomes inoperative when it reaches the limit of its range. If it does flies to the target hex of the air op, it participates in the rest of the air op sequence, guarding friendly air units there.
C. Interception.
Fighters may fly interception missions during any air op initiated by the enemy player. A fighter’s interception range varies by nationality and time period, as shown on the Air Technology Table. Note: On that chart "1/4 intercept" and "1/2 intercept" means that the air unit has an interception range equal to 1/4 or 1/2 its movement rating, respectively (round all fractions down). For example, a German fighter with a movement rating of 5 may not fly interception at all during 1912-14, may intercept only in the hex where the fighter is based during 1915-16, may intercept anywhere within 1 hex of where the fighter is based during 1917-18 (as 1/4 of 5 is 1.25, which rounds down to 1), and may intercept anywhere within 2 hexes of where the fighter is based during 1919-20 (as 1/2 of 5 is 2.5, which rounds down to 2). During an air op, the responding player may fly interception missions. Interceptors (fighters flying this mission) fly to the air op’s target hex, to engage enemy air units in air combat. Designers' Note: Air forces were still new and untried (for the most part) in WW I and the doctrine to use them to the best effect took time to work out. The Air Technology Table is a simple mechanism to show this. In the case of interception, the limiting factor is how effective your early warning network of ground observers is (the earlier they report enemy aircraft in the air and where they are headed, the greater likelihood your fighters can respond in time to intercept). At the beginning of the war (1912-14) most countries effectively have no network at all and thus cannot intercept. As time goes by, everyone develops some kind of observer network, and as this network gets more effective, interception range goes up.
D. Patrol Attack.
Fighters may fly patrol attack missions during any enemy air op. A fighter's patrol attack range varies by nationality and time period, as shown on the Air Technology Table. For example, a German fighter may fly patrol attack only in the hex where the fighter is based during 1912-14, may patrol anywhere within 1 hex of where the fighter is based during 1915-16 (this is a patrol range of 1), may patrol anywhere within 2 hexes of where the fighter is based during 1917-18 (this is a patrol range of 2), and may patrol anywhere within 3 hexes of where the fighter is based during 1919-20 (this is a patrol range of 3). During an air op, the responding player may announce that he is making a patrol attack when an enemy movement group takes off from or enters any hex in patrol range of any of the responding player’s operative fighters. The movement of the group is temporarily halted until the patrol attack is resolved. The responding player then flies one or more fighters on patrol attack missions to the hex. Once all patrol attack fighters have flown to the hex, the players immediately resolve the patrol attack, as explained in Rule 21D. After the patrol attack is resolved, the responding player’s fighters immediately return to base (within their patrol attack range) and become inoperative. The movement group then resumes its movement. If the group subsequently enters another hex in patrol range of an operative fighter, the responding player may make another patrol attack against the group. Designers' Note: Patrol attack represents fighters patrolling the airspace around their base. During the early-war period (1912-14), patrols were flown almost at random, and had corresponding little effect at any distance from the base. As time went by, airforces became more adept at patrol, with systematic coverage of airspace and ground observer information increasing the effective patrol range.
E. Combat Air Patrol (CAP).
Beginning with the Jan I 15 turn, fighters may fly CAP missions during any initial, movement, reaction movement, or exploitation phase. Note that the Air Technology Table also shows that no air units may fly CAP during 1912-14. A fighter’s CAP range is its printed movement rating. The target hex of a CAP mission can be any hex within CAP range of the fighter. For fighters flying CAP missions, follow the standard air op sequence (Rule 17D) until the mission resolution step is reached. At this time, the air op is suspended. The CAP fighter remains in its target hex, and the owning player may assign it to another air op later in the same player turn. During the mission movement step of a subsequent air op the owning player may (but is not required to):
-
Switch the CAP fighter to the escort mission (Rule 20B), if the fighter’s hex is the target hex of an air op by the owning player. Example: During the initial phase of a player turn, the Entente player flies a CAP fighter to Maubeuge (GW2:0922), which is currently owned by the Central Powers player. During the exploitation phase of the same player turn, the Entente player initiates a bombing air op, with Maubeuge as the target hex. He may thus switch the fighter in Maubeuge’s hex from CAP to escort.
-
Switch the CAP fighter to the interception mission (Rule 20C), if the fighter’s hex is the target hex of an air op by the enemy player.
-
Switch the CAP fighter to the patrol attack mission (Rule 20D), if during an air op by the enemy player an enemy movement group takes off in or enters the fighter’s hex. Once a CAP fighter switches missions (per above), it participates in the rest of the air op using the appropriate mission rules. Exception: When returning to base, the fighter uses its CAP range. If a CAP fighter is in the target hex of an air op, and the owning player does not switch it to escort or interception (per above), then the CAP fighter is ignored for all purposes for the rest of the air op. At the end of each player turn, the players return to base all of their fighters still flying CAP missions. Designers' Note: CAP missions are simple in concept: you fly to a hex in the hope your opponent will try to fly through the same hex while your fighters are there. Ensuring that you have fighters on station over the hex throughout the turn, however, is a major coordination problem; one that is beyond the capabilities of any of the WWI airforces before 1915.
F. Reconnaissance (Recon).
Type R (Reconnaissance) and Type O (Observation Balloon) air units are recon air units. Recon air units (only) may fly recon missions. Air units may fly recon missions as follows:
-
During their phasing player's movement and exploitation phases, and during reaction movement phases when their player is reacting: strategic recon.
-
During combat and reaction combat phases when their player is the attacker: tactical recon. An air unit's recon range is its printed movement rating. The target hex of a recon mission is any hex within recon range that contains a recon target. Recon targets vary by recon mission, as explained below. Use the Ground Success Table to resolve recon missions. Roll a die, modify the number rolled with the appropriate modifiers, and consult the table. There are two results: success or failure. If the mission fails, it has no effect; if the mission succeeds, implement the results described under each type of recon mission.
-
Strategic Recon. Recon air units may fly strategic recon missions to attempt to determine the contents of unknown enemy corps headquarters (HQs). The target hex of this mission is the hex containing the unknown enemy corps HQs the player wants to examine. Consult the Ground Success Table (per above) once for each surviving recon air unit in the hex. If any of these attempts succeed, the enemy player must truthfully state: 1) the total number of divisional units assigned to the corps HQs, and 2) the total number of non-divisional units assigned to the corps HQs. Designers' Note: Historical hindsight shows that aerial recon was accurate more often than not in WW I; but this does not change the fact that many army commanders of the day did not fully trust it, and often disregarded the recon information their airforces provided. Based strictly on the historical accuracy rate, the base chance of success for this mission probably should be 4/6; but distrust (however unjustified) of its accuracy reduces this to 2/6.
-
Tactical Recon. Recon air units may fly tactical recon missions to increase the effectiveness of bombardments and attacks made by friendly ground units. The target hex of this mission is the hex containing the enemy units the player intends to bombard or attack. The attacking player initiates and flies tactical recon air ops in his combat or reaction combat phase, before any DAS or GS air ops are flown (these are described in 20G2b/c below), and before ground combat is resolved. Each tactical recon air op follows the standard air op sequence (Rule 17D), until the mission resolution step is reached. At this point, the air op is suspended until the bombardment or ground combat in the hex is resolved. When the players are to resolve bombardment or ground combat in a hex containing a tactical recon air op, the remainder of the air op occurs in conjunction with the bombardment or ground combat, in this sequence:
-
When ready to resolve the bombardment/combat, the attacking player declares the bombardment/ attack, indicating the bombarding/attacking units.
-
The tactical recon mission resolution step occurs. Determine if the mission succeeds or fails. The player may consult the Ground Success Table (per above) once for each surviving recon air unit in the hex. If any of these attempts succeed, modify the die roll for the bombardment/combat by +1. Note that the die roll is never modified by more than +1, no matter how many recon air units succeed. Special: If a tactical recon air mission succeeds in modifying the die roll for a bombardment in a hex by +1, it also automatically modifies the combat resolution die roll for any combat in the hex during the same phase by +1 as well. It is possible that a player may fly a tactical recon air op to a hex, intending to bombard or attack the units there, and then subsequently decide to neither bombard nor attack. In this case, the air units in the tactical recon air op return to base at the end of the combat or reaction phase in which they flew the mission. Designers' Note: Tactical recon primarily represents the increased effectiveness that attacking artillery has if the fall of shot is controlled and adjusted from on high. By WW II this has become so routine that it can be ignored (as everyone is doing it all the time), but in WW I the doctrine is new; and, although its use becomes more prevalent as the time goes by, it does not become universal until almost the end of the war. Note that the probability of success increases each year: 1/6 in 1912-14, 2/6 in 1915, 3/6 in 1916, 4/6 in 1917, and 5/6 in 1918-20.
G. Bombing.
Any air unit with a bombing strength greater than 0 may fly bombing missions. Air units may fly bombing missions as follows:
-
During the enemy player’s initial phase: harassment bombing missions.
-
During their phasing player's movement and exploitation phases and during reaction movement phases when their player is reacting: any bombing mission except ground support (GS), defensive air support (DAS), harassment, or aerial bombardment.
-
During combat and reaction combat phases when their player is the attacker: GS bombing missions.
-
During combat and reaction combat phases when their player is the defender: DAS bombing missions.
-
During combat phases, whether their player is attacking or defending: aerial bombardment bombing missions.
-
During combat phases when their player is the attacker: carpet bombing missions. Unless stated otherwise, an air unit’s bombing range is its printed movement rating. The target hex of a bombing mission is any hex within bombing range that contains a bombing target. Bombing targets vary by bombing mission, as explained below. Air units bombing a target in a hex may bomb it individually, or some (up to all) may combine their bombing strengths to make a single bombing attack. Exceptions to this general case are given in the specific bombing missions. Unless otherwise stated below, bombing missions are resolved during the mission resolution step, after air combat and antiaircraft fire in the hex is resolved. Immediately before resolving each bombing attack, the phasing player announces the specific bombing mission, specifying the target and bombing air unit (or air units). Note that a player announces bombing attacks in a hex one at a time as they are resolved, and is not required to announce all his attacks before resolving any. Several bombing missions require the use of the Bombing Table to resolve bombing attacks. For each such attack, use the bombing strength column that most closely matches (without exceeding) the bombing strength of the attacking air units. (If the bombing strength is less than 2, the attack automatically misses.) For example, a bombing attack with a strength of 12 points would use the 8 column. Roll one die and modify the number rolled with the appropriate modifiers on the Bombing Table. Cross-index the bombing strength column with the modified die roll to obtain a result. There are two possible results: M (miss) and H (hit). A miss has no effect on the target. A hit affects the target, as described in each bombing mission. Weather (Rule 36), terrain, and bombing mission type may affect bombing strengths. In mud, winter, and snow weather, air units bombing land targets have their bombing strengths (tactical & strategic) halved. In rough and stormy sea conditions, air units bombing naval targets have their bombing strengths (tactical & strategic) halved.
- Strategic Bombing. The following missions may be flown by air units with strategic bombing strengths greater than 0.
a. Rail Marshaling Yards. The target of this mission is an enemy-owned rail marshaling yard (rail marshaling yards are defined in Rule 7A). Consult the Bombing Table for each bombing attack made against the target. Each hit reduces by 2 the rail capacity of the enemy rail net containing the yard, for the enemy player’s next player turn. Also, a hit on a yard breaks the rail line in the hex, if it is not already broken. The rail-capacity decrease is only for the enemy player’s next player turn; it is not permanent. The rail break, however, is permanent until repaired (Rule 13A3). Only 1 hit is allowed per yard in a player turn. Hits in excess of 1 on a yard have no effect.
b. Ports. The target of this mission is any enemy-owned port. Consult the Bombing Table for each bombing attack made against the target. Each hit damages the port. Mark each hit achieved on the port with a port hit marker. (Ports are covered in detail in Rule 30A.)
c. Terror Bombing. Air units may fly bombing missions against enemy cities to terrorize civilian populations. The target of this mission is any enemy-owned major city hex. Consult the Bombing Table for each bombing attack made against the target. Each hit reduces by 1 point the morale of the country in which the bombed city is located (but note that a country cannot lose more than 2 morale points per turn due to terror bombing). (Morale is covered in Rule 40.) Terror bombing hits on certain cities may also trigger mandatory increases to various air defense garrisons as listed in the appropriate section of the nation-specific rules (Rule 41).
d. Factories. The target of this mission is any enemyowned factory. Consult the Bombing Table for each bombing attack made against the target. Each hit damages the factory. Mark each hit achieved on a factory with a hit marker. (Factories and the effects of hits on them are covered in Rule 37B).
e. Carpet Bombing (Optional Rule). Beginning with the Feb I 19 turn, the Entente player (only) may fly carpet bombing missions. The target hex of this mission is any hex containing Central Powers units. Exception: Due to humanitarian concerns, the target hex cannot contain a major city or Entente units. The Entente player flies carpet bombing air ops in the bombardment segment of his combat phase. Air units which survive air combat and AA fire may carpet bomb. Carpet bombing is the same as bombardment (Rule 12C), with each air unit treated as if it were an artillery unit except: 1) their bombardment strength is one half their strategic bombing strength, and 2) they do not require combat supply. Each time the Entente player rolls on the Bombardment Table to resolve a carpet-bombing attack, and at least one disruption hit results, the Central Powers player checks to see if short bombing occurs. Check for short bombing as follows: roll a die; if the result is a 1, 2, 3, or 4, no short bombing occurs; if the result if a 5 or 6, short bombing does occur. If short bombing occurs, the target hex of the carpet bombing shifts to any adjacent hex containing Entente units (Central Powers player's choice of which hex). Note that the target hex the carpet bombing shifts to can contain a major city and/or Entente units and that such a shift may incur morale point losses to the Entente (see the war atrocities section of Rule 40A). If short bombing occurs during a carpet bombing mission, the Entente player may not fly another carpet bombing mission for the remainder of the game turn. Additionally, once short bombing occurs five times in a game, the Entente player may not fly carpet bombing missions for the rest of the game. Due to the devastation caused by carpet bombing, units that advance after combat into a carpet-bombed hex are automatically disrupted. Further, the MP cost to enter the hex during the next phase following the combat is tripled. Designers' Note: Entente plans for 1919 included several thousand Handley-Page bombers (each with a 4,000 lb bombload) making massed bombing attacks on enemy trenches. This probably would have had much the same effect as WW II style carpet bombing.
- Tactical Bombing. The following missions may be flown by air units with tactical bombing strengths greater than 0.
a. Air Units. The target of this mission is any enemy-owned airbase containing an air unit. A fighter's tactical bombing strength is increased by 1 (prior to any other modifications) when flying this mission. For example, a fighter with a tactical bombing strength of 0 would have a strength of 1 when flying this mission. Consult the Bombing Table for each bombing attack made against the target. Each hit aborts one air unit (bombing player’s choice) on the ground there. Place aborted air units in the aborted air units box on the appropriate game chart.
b. Ground Support (GS). Air units may fly GS bombing missions to aid attacks made by friendly ground units. The target of this mission is the hex containing the enemy units the player intends to attack. The attacking player initiates and flies GS air ops in his combat and reaction combat phases, after the enemy player flies DAS missions and before any ground combat is resolved. Each GS air op follows the standard air op sequence, until the mission resolution step is reached. At this point, the air op is suspended until the players resolve the ground combat in the hex. When the players are to resolve ground combat in a hex containing a GS air op, the remainder of the air op occurs in conjunction with the ground combat, in this sequence:
-
When ready to resolve the combat, the attacking player declares the attack, indicating the attacking units.
-
The GS mission resolution step occurs. Total the bombing strength delivered to the target hex by effective GS bombing (see below). GS bombing strengths may be modified due to terrain or fortifications, as shown on the terrain effects chart and the fortifications effects chart. (If there is a DAS air operation in the hex, the DAS mission resolution step also occurs at this time.)
-
Resolve the ground combat, adding the modified GS bombing strength to the total attack strength in the combat. Implement the combat result.
-
The air return step occurs. All air units involved in the GS air op return to base. (If there is a DAS air op also in the hex, the DAS air return step occurs first.) Only a limited number of air units may effectively provide GS bombing in a combat. For every "X" REs of attacking units, excluding artillery, one air unit (owning player's choice) may provide GS bombing. "X" varies by year as follows:
-
During 1912-14: 6.
-
During 1915:
- During 1916:
- During 1917:
- During 1918-20: 2. GS air units in excess of this limit have no effect; ignore their bombing strengths. For example, if 20 REs, including 4 REs of artillery, are attacking a hex, the number of GS air units effective in the attack is: 2 in 1912-14 (20 attacking REs minus 4 REs of artillery = 16 (this is "X") divided by 6 = 2.6, which rounds down to 2), 3 in 1915, 4 in 1916, 5 in 1917, and 8 in 1918-20. It is possible that a player may fly a GS air op to a hex, intending to attack the units there, and then subsequently decide not to make the attack. In this case, the GS air units do not bomb, and the air units in the GS air op return to base at the end of the combat or reaction phase in which they flew the mission.
c. Defensive Air Support (DAS). Air units may fly DAS missions to aid friendly units that may be attacked. The standard bombing range is used for the flying air units, except for types B, T, and Z. The DAS bombing range of a type B, T, or Z air unit is one half its printed movement rating (round fractions down). The target hex of the mission is any hex containing friendly ground units which the enemy player might attack in the combat phase. (Note that when the player flies DAS, he will not know which, if any, of his units the enemy player will attack.) The defending player initiates and flies DAS air ops in the attacking player’s combat or reaction combat phase, before the attacking player flies GS missions and before any ground combat is resolved. Each DAS air op follows the standard air op sequence, until the AA fire step is reached. At this point, the air op is suspended until the players are to resolve the ground combat in the hex. When the players are to resolve ground combat in a hex containing a DAS air op, the remainder of the air op occurs in conjunction with the ground combat, in this sequence:
-
When ready to resolve the combat, the attacking player declares the attack, indicating the attacking units.
-
The AA fire step occurs, per Rule 22B1.
-
The DAS mission resolution step occurs. Total the bombing strength delivered to the target hex by effective DAS bombing (see below). The tactical bombing strengths of all air units flying DAS are halved. Unlike GS, however, terrain and fortifications do not further modify DAS bombing strengths. (If there is a GS air op in the hex, the GS mission resolution step also occurs at this time.)
-
Resolve the ground combat, adding the modified DAS bombing strength to the total defense strength in the combat. Implement the combat result.
-
The air return step occurs. All air units involved in the DAS air op return to base. (If there is a GS air op also in the hex, the DAS air return step occurs first.) Only a limited number of air units may effectively provide DAS bombing in a combat. The number of air units that may provide DAS bombing is calculated (and varies over time) in the same manner as for GS bombing, except that defending units are used instead of attacking units. For example, in 1912-14 for every 6 REs of defending units, excluding artillery, one air unit (owning player's choice) may provide DAS bombing. DAS air units in excess of this limit have no effect; ignore their bombing strengths. It is possible that a player may fly a DAS air op to a hex which is not attacked. In this case, the DAS air units do not bomb, and the air units in the DAS air op return to base at the end of the combat or reaction phase in which they flew the mission.
d. Harassment. The target hex of a harassment bombing mission is any land hex. A player flies harassment missions during the enemy player’s initial phase. During the mission resolution step, determine the effects of the mission by totaling the number of bombing points delivered in the hex for harassment bombing:
-
Less than 2 bombing points: No effect.
-
At least 2, but less than 4: Place a level-1 harassment hit marker in the hex; the hex has one harassment hit.
-
At least 4: Prior to Feb I 18 treat this the same as "at least 2, but less than 4" per above. On or after Feb I 18, place a level-2 harassment hit marker in the hex; the hex has two harassment hits. A player marks the harassment hits his air units achieve as they achieve them. The harassment hits last until the start of the player’s next initial phase; the markers are removed from the map at this time. A hex can have a maximum of 2 harassment hits; ignore any hits in excess of 2. Harassment hits affect the movement of enemy ground units during the enemy player’s movement and exploitation phases and during the friendly player's reaction phase:
-
Each unit using regular, accel, or operational rail movement to leave a hex with harassment hits must spend 1 MP for each harassment hit in the hex.
-
Each enemy ground unit that starts a phase in hex with harassment hits and does not move from that hex also must spend 1 MP for each harassment hit in the hex. (Note that this can affect actions various units can take, such as spending MPs to break a rail line in the hex.)
-
Each enemy ground unit using strategic rail movement to leave a hex with harassment hits loses 20 hexes of its rail movement ability for each harassment hit in the hex.
-
Each enemy “R” movement unit using operational rail movement to leave a hex with harassment hits loses 7 hexes of its rail movement allowance for each harassment hit in the hex. An air unit which flies a harassment mission during a player turn does not become operative at the start of the next player turn (and thus cannot fly a mission in that player turn). Place a marker of your choice on such an air unit when it returns to base at the end of its harassment air op. During the next player turn when air units become operative, remove the marker from the air unit but do not flip the air unit to its operative side.
e. Rail Lines. The target of this mission is any enemyowned rail line hex. Consult the Bombing Table for each bombing attack on the target. A hit breaks the line in the target hex. Once a rail line in a hex is broken, any further rail line hits in the hex are ignored.
f. Ports. The target of this mission is any enemy-owned port. Consult the Bombing Table for each bombing attack made against the target. Each hit damages the port. Mark each hit achieved on the port with a port hit marker. (Ports are covered in detail in Rule 30A.)
g. Naval Units in Port. The target hex of this mission is any hex containing enemy naval units in port (but not naval units at sea). The actual bombing targets are the enemy naval units in port in the hex (any naval units at sea in the same hex are ignored). Note: For purposes of this rule, water-only units (Rule 14B2) are also naval units and may be bombed. For each bombing attack, consult the Bombing Table. Each hit does one hit of damage to a naval unit in port in the hex. If the naval unit is also a water-only unit, the first hit of damage on the unit disrupts it (per Rule 3A5) and a second hit of damage on the same unit eliminates it. For each air op, resolve all bombing attacks of air units flying this mission before applying any hits achieved. (Keep track of the total number of hits achieved.) Apply the hits after all air units on this mission have finished bombing. Since several naval concepts are used when applying hits, the method of applying hits and the effects of the hits are described in the naval rules (see Rule 26 if using the basic naval rules or Rule 27A5 if using the advanced naval rules).
h. Naval Patrol. The target of this mission is any hex containing enemy naval units at sea (but not naval units in port). Special: In some cases naval units may occupy hexsides instead of hexes (such as when a naval unit moves along a river to an inland port); in these cases the target hex of a naval patrol bombing mission is either hex adjacent to the hexside the naval units occupy. Note: For purposes of this rule, water-only units (Rule 14B2) are also naval units and may be bombed. In each initial phase, both players may assign air units to naval patrol missions. Air units are assigned this mission at this time, but do not actually fly the mission until later, if at all. Once assigned, they may not fly any other mission in the player turn, even if they do not fly the naval patrol mission. Indicate air units assigned to this mission by placing a naval patrol marker on top of them. An air unit assigned to this mission has a naval patrol zone, which covers every all-sea and partial-sea hex within the air unit’s bombing range. For example, a Short 184 (movement rating of 12) assigned to this mission has a naval patrol zone extending out to 12 hexes. When an enemy naval group (naval groups are covered in Rule 26 - basic naval rules, or Rule 27B2 - advanced naval rules) begins a naval movement step in, or enters, any hex within an air unit’s naval patrol zone the owning player may announce an air op against the enemy naval group. The movement of the naval group is temporarily suspended while the air op is resolved. The air op consists of one or more air units, all taking off from the same airbase, flying the naval patrol mission in a single movement group to the naval group (the target hex). Operative fighters from the same airbase may fly escort missions in the air op. Friendly air units at other airbases cannot participate in this air op. Upon reaching the target hex during the mission movement step, the movement group attempts to contact the enemy naval group. Consult the Naval Success Table for the contact attempt; roll one die, modify the roll as appropriate, and find the result. Only one attack force from any given airbase may attempt contact per hex. Note: Attack forces from different airbases may attempt contact in the same hex (i.e. separate operations). One die is rolled for each attack force and the success table is consulted. Results are:
-
Failure: The movement group fails to contact the enemy naval group. The air op immediately proceeds to the air return step, with air units returning to base and becoming inoperative.
-
Success: The movement group contacts the enemy naval group. The air op sequence continues as normal. During the mission resolution step, air units on this mission bomb the naval units in the enemy naval group. Bombing is resolved the same as for bombing naval units in port (Rule 20G2g above). At the end of a naval patrol air op, the player may immediately initiate another naval patrol air op against the same enemy naval group in the same hex, if he has any naval patrol air units capable of doing so. Once the player stops initiating these naval patrol air ops, the enemy naval group resumes its movement.
i. Coast Defenses. The target hex of this mission is any hex containing enemy coast defenses. Due to the hardened nature of most coast defense sites, the tactical bombing strength of an air unit flying this mission is halved. Consult the Bombing Table for each coast defense bombing attack. For every two bombing hits which result, mark the hex with a coast defenses hit marker. (Coast defenses and the effects of hits on them are covered in Rule 33B.)
j. Aerial Bombardment. The target hex of this mission is any hex containing enemy units. The player flies aerial bombardment air ops in the bombardment segment of the combat phase. Air units which survive air combat and AA fire may bombard per Rule 12C, with each air unit treated the same as an artillery unit except: 1) their bombardment strength is one half their tactical bombing strength (round fractions down), and 2) they do not require combat supply.
k. Resource Points. The target hex of this mission is any hex containing enemy resource points. Halve the bombing strengths of air units performing this mission. Consult the Bombing Table for each bombing attack made against the target. Each hit eliminates one resource point. Special: When a resource point is eliminated by bombing in a hex containing multiple resource points, check to see if the elimination of the first resource point sets off a chain reaction eliminating other resource points in the hex as well. Roll a die: if a 6 results, a second resource point is eliminated; if a 1 through 5 results, there is no effect. If a second resource point is eliminated, check to see if a third resource point is eliminated but now modify the die roll by +1. Repeat this process, adding an additional +1 for each resource point eliminated, until either no effect is rolled or all resource points in the hex are eliminated. Designer's Note: Aerial bombing raids against enemy supply dumps were a common occurrence during the war. Due to the spread out nature of most dumps, losses due to air attack were usually low, but on at least two occasions raids were spectacularly successful. One raid on a British dump in 1917, in particular, destroyed nearly 8,000,000 artillery shells, resulting in the shutting down of British offensive operations for nearly two months.
H. Transport.
Transport air units may fly transport missions during their phasing player's movement and exploitation phases and during reaction movement phases when their player is reacting. Exception: The air drop transport mission may only be flown during friendly movement phases. An air unit's transport range is its printed movement rating. Transports may carry units, logistics items, and man-power points as their cargo. Transports cannot, however, carry any ground unit which has heavy equipment. Each transport has a cargo capacity of 2 REs. Weather (Rule 36) affects transports' cargo capacities. When flying in mud, winter, or snow weather, a transport has its cargo capacity halved. The cargo to be carried must be present at the transport's airbase when the transport mission is initiated. Since transport missions can occur in the movement and reaction movement phase, note that the cargo may move to the airbase prior to its air transport in that phase. Once an item of cargo is air transported in a phase, however, it may not move for the remainder of that phase. All air combat, patrol attacks, and antiaircraft fire that affects a transport also affect its cargo. If a transport is eliminated, its cargo also is eliminated. If a transport is aborted or turned back, its cargo returns to base with the transport. Two or more transports may combine to carry an item of cargo. When doing so, a result to any one of the transports also affects the cargo. Always use the most severe result to the transports as the effect upon the cargo. For example, if one transport is turned back and the other eliminated, then the cargo is eliminated. There are two types of transport missions.
-
Regular Transport. The target hex of a regular transport mission can be any friendly-owned airbase within transport range. The mission is resolved per the standard air op sequence. The transport lands its cargo at the target hex during the mission resolution step. It returns to base in the air return step, and cannot carry cargo at this time. Alternately, a transport may fly a one-way regular transport mission, with a range twice its printed movement rating. In this case, the target hex of the mission can be any friendly-owned airbase within the one-way transport range. During the mission resolution step, the transport ends its mission at the airbase, landing there with its cargo. It cannot fly during the air return step.
-
Air Drop. Transports may air drop general supply points and air-droppable units (air-droppable units and airborne landings in general are covered in Rule 24). Note: Resource points/manpower points cannot be air dropped. The target hex of an air drop involving a ground unit may be any hex within transport range except for the following terrain types: prohibited terrain, mountain, wooded-swamp, or forest. The target hex may be in enemy ZOCs or occupied by enemy units. The target hex of an air drop involving general supply points may be any hex within transport range except all-sea or all-lake hexes. Ground units, but not general supply points, count at double their RE size for this mission. Thus, two transport air units are required to carry a 2-RE unit on an air drop. A transport air unit drops its cargo during the mission resolution step of the air operations sequence. Designers' Note: Both sides made limited use of air transport to move supplies during WW I. This was used most often on the eastern front; but was also used to some extent by the Entente in the west during 1918 to supply their advanced spearheads. And, of course, the British made several attempts to air drop supplies in 1916 to their troops at Kut in Mesopotamia. Air transport of units was mostly a matter of theoretical potential. Both sides advanced plans at various times to do this, but the essentially static nature of the fighting made it unnecessary to use them. The largest actual operation we have been able to document was an airdrop by one platoon, followed up by regular air transport of one battalion during the German occupation of the Estonian off-shore islands in 1918. Although, had the war gone on into 1919, some Entente plans featured the air drop of an entire division!
Rule 21 — Air Combat
Air combat occurs when fighters fly interception missions to hexes containing enemy air units flying missions. (Patrol attacks, which are similar to air combat, are described at the end of this rule.) In each air op, air combat in the target hex is resolved during the air combat resolution step. There are two stages to air combat: preparation and resolution. Air combat is resolved using the Air Combat Results Table (Air CRT). (Note: There are two Air CRTs, one of which is labeled optional; follow section B below to resolve air combat if the standard Air CRT is used; follow section C below to resolve air combat if the Optional Air CRT is used.)
A. Preparation.
Follow these steps to prepare for air combat:
-
Mission Force and Screen Preparation. The initiating player separates his air units into two groupings: the escort screen and the mission force. All escorts are placed in the screen. Fighters flying bombing missions may jettison their bombs at this point but remain as part of the mission force.
-
Interceptor Preparation. The responding player then separates his air units into two groupings: those that will attack the screen (the engaging group) and those that will try to bypass the screen to attack the mission force (the bypassing group). The player divides his interceptors between these two groups as he wishes.
B. Resolution (Standard Air CRT).
In air combat using the standard Air CRT, air units in opposing air groupings fire upon one another individually. An air unit with a printed air attack strength of 0, however, may never fire in air combat.
- Sequence. Follow these steps to resolve air combat using the standard Air CRT.
a. Screen Allocation Step. Interceptors allocated to attack the escort screen engage the screen in air combat. (Ignore all other air units in the hex during this step.) The intercepting player randomly selects one escort in the screen and randomly allocates one interceptor against it. ("Randomly selects" and "randomly allocates" do indeed mean the player chooses at random, such as putting the air units in a cup and drawing them out without looking.) Repeat this procedure, allocating an interceptor against each escort, to the extent possible. If one side has more air units than the other, the owning player allocates these extra air units against enemy air units, distributing them as evenly as possible. (For example, no enemy air unit can have three air units allocated against it until each enemy air unit has two air units allocated against it.) To allocate extra air units, the owning player chooses (not at random) one enemy air unit and then randomly selects one of his extra air units, allocating it against the enemy air unit. Repeat this procedure until all extra air units are allocated. If there are more escorts than interceptors, the owning player need not allocate them against the interceptors attacking the screen. Instead, he may have these unengaged escorts attack the bypassing group of interceptors (step c below).
b. Firing Step. Resolve air combat between the allocated air units. When one air unit is allocated against one air unit, each air unit fires once upon the other air unit. Implement the combat results after both air units have fired. When several air units engage a single air unit, the engagement is conducted in a series of firing rounds. Randomly select the order in which the several air units, one per round, engage the single air unit. Resolve each round in order; the two air units in the round fire upon one another. Implement the combat results after both air units have fired. The owner of the several air units may voluntarily end an engagement at the end of any firing round. The engagement automatically ends when:
-
The first combat result (return, abort, or elimination) is achieved against the single air unit, even if all the several air units have not fired.
-
All of the several air units have engaged the single air unit. Example: Three interceptors engage one escort. The first interceptor fires on the escort, for a result of no effect; the escort returns fire against the first interceptor and achieves an eliminated result against it. The owner of the interceptors elects to continue the engagement. The second interceptor fires on the escort and achieves an abort result against it; the escort returns fire but to no effect. The engagement automatically ends at this point, before the third interceptor fires. In the engagement, one interceptor was eliminated, and the escort was aborted. When this firing step is completed, all air units involved in air combat during this step have finished air combat and are ignored for the rest of the air combat resolution in the hex.
c. Bypass Allocation Step. Resolve air combat between the unengaged escorts and the interceptors attempting to bypass the screen. The owning player randomly allocates his escorts against the interceptors as in step a.
d. Firing Step. Resolve air combat as in step b, except the interceptors may not fire. Interceptors that survive this step attack the mission force. Example: Three interceptors attempt to bypass the screen, and there are two unengaged escorts. The owning player randomly allocates his escorts against the interceptors. Each escort attacks, one turning back an interceptor and the other achieving no effect. The interceptors may not attack the escorts. One interceptor is turned back and two get through.
e. Mission Force Allocation Step. Interceptors successfully bypassing the escort screen attack the mission force. The owning player randomly allocates his interceptors against air units in the mission force as in step a. Mission force air units not attacked by interceptors are ignored; they neither attack nor are attacked.
f. Firing Step. Resolve air combat as in step b. Exception: When several interceptors are allocated against one air unit of the mission force, follow the procedure in step b. However, the air unit of the mission force may only fire once during the engagement; if the air unit has not fired at the start of a round, the owning player decides whether or not it will fire in the round.
- Combat Results. When using the Standard Air CRT, air combat results are as follows:
-
–: No Effect. The fire had no effect.
-
R: Return. A returned air unit immediately returns to base and becomes inoperative.
-
A: Abort. An aborted air unit immediately returns to base and then becomes aborted; remove the air unit from play and place it in the aborted box on its air chart.
-
K: Eliminated. An eliminated air unit is immediately removed from play. Place it in the eliminated box on its air chart. Air units returning to base due to combat results follow the same procedure as returning to base in the air return step.
- Differentials. When an air unit fires on an opposing air unit, calculate the attack differential by subtracting the air defense strength of the air unit being fired upon from the air attack strength of the firing unit. Example: In an exchange of fire between a FE 2b (5F5) and a Fok E3 (4F3), the FE 2b would have an attack differential of +2 (the FE 2b's 5 attack strength minus the Fok E3's 3 defense strength) and the Fok E3 would have an attack differential of -1. The attack differential determines the column used on the Standard Air CRT; but note that the column used may be shifted as explained on the table. For example, all air units have their attack differential shifted one column to the left (lower) during 1912-16. For each attack, roll two dice and modify the roll as indicated on the table. Crossindex the modified roll with the correct column to obtain the air combat result. Air Combat Example (standard Air CRT): During daylight in 1916, one German Alb C5 fighter (4R5) and one German Halb D1 fighter (5F4) intercept a French force of two Sal 1 bombers (3B4) escorted by one Nie 11 fighter (3F3), one DD 8 fighter (3R5), and one Nie 17 fighter (5F5). Step a: The Central Powers player allocates the Alb C5 against one of the French fighters; it is randomly allocated against the Nie 11. The Halb D1 tries to bypass the screen. The Entente player elects to send both remaining escorts against the bypassing Halb D1. Step b: The Nie 11 fires with a differential of -1, but this is modified to -2 (as it is 1916); a 9 is rolled and modified to a 8 (due to type F attacking type R), for no effect. The Alb C5 fires at +1 (note that the column shifts to the right for the air unit being German and to the left for it being 1916 cancel each other out); a 5 is rolled and modified to a 6 (due to type R attacking type F), aborting the Nie 11. Step c: The Entente player randomly selects the order in which his unengaged escorts will engage the bypassing interceptor. The first escort to engage is the DD 8. Step d: In the first round, the DD 8 attacks the bypassing Halb D1. The differential is -1, but this is modified to -2 (as it is 1916); a 7 is rolled and modified to a 8 (due to type R attacking type F), for no effect. (The Halb D1 may not fire.) Since there was no result from the first round, the Nie 17 fires, in the second round. The differential is +1, but this is modified to 0 (as it is 1916); an 8 is rolled for no effect. (As before, the Halb D1 may not fire.) Step e: The Central Powers player randomly allocates the successfully bypassing Halb D1 against one of the Sal 1s in the mission force. The other Sal 1 is ignored. Step f: The Halb D1 fires at +1 (note that the column shifts to the right for the air unit being German and to the left for it being 1916 cancel each other out); a 4 is rolled, eliminating the Sal 1. The Sal 1 fires at -1, but this is modified to -2 (as it is 1916); an 8 is rolled, for a no effect result. Designers' Note: The column shifts listed on the Standard Air CRT account for three major factors: 1) it took a long time for the various nations to develop effective fighter tactics, but some nations were consistently ahead (or behind) of the learning curve; 2) early-war air combat (1912-16) was often ineffective due to the ad hoc nature of the weaponry involved (one pilot became an ace exclusively through the use of a grappling hook!) or its unreliable nature (most early-war machineguns were extremely prone to jamming); and 3) night combat was very much a chance affair in the days before radar and aerial radios came into use (although both sides put a lot of effort into trying, and some searchlight/nightfighter teams were modestly successful). The various die roll modifiers show: 1) although type R aircraft performance-wise are not much different from type F, their crews are observers first, and fighter pilots second; 2) only during the closing days of the war did advances in fighter performance (speed) and heavier weaponry begin to overshadow the bomber's advantage of more robust construction; and 3) Zeppelins not only were exceptionally bad at attacking other aircraft (they were slow & had huge blind spots their defensive machineguns could not cover), but, surprisingly, they were also quite difficult to shoot down (they flew higher than most fighters could reach (at least until later in the war), and they could absorb a huge amount of punishment so long as they did not catch fire).
C. Resolution (Optional Air CRT).
In air combat using the Optional Air CRT, opposing air groupings fire upon one another. Note that all air units in a specific grouping combine to make a single fire when the Optional Air CRT is used (as opposed to firing as individual air units as is the case when using the standard Air CRT).
- Sequence. Follow these steps to resolve air combat using the Optional Air CRT.
a. Interceptor vs Screen Step. Interceptors allocated to the engaging group attack the escort screen. Note that interceptors allocated to the bypassing group may not attack at this time. Fighters allocated to the escort screen attack the enemy interceptors (both those in the engaging and bypassing groups). (Ignore all other air units in the hex during this step.) Both players simultaneously resolve air combat as described in section 21C2 below.
b. Interceptor vs Mission Force Step. For each bypassing interceptor which survives air combat in step a above, randomly pick one air unit from the mission force. Surviving bypassing interceptors and the picked mission force air units then attack each other. (Ignore all other air units in the hex during this step.) Both players simultaneously resolve air combat as described in section 21C2 below.
- Procedure. Follow this procedure to resolve air combat using the Optional Air CRT:
-
Total the air attack strengths of the attacking air units. Note that the air attack strength of an air unit may be modified as listed at the bottom center of the Optional Air CRT. For example, a type R air unit attacking in this step has its air attack strength reduced by 1.
-
Determine the air-to-air effectiveness line which applies to the attack. Note: Air-to-air effectiveness is expressed as a letter code ranging from "W" to "Z", with "W" being the best, and "Z" being the worse; it varies by nationality and by year as shown at the lower left of the Optional Air CRT. When a player's force includes air units of two or more nationalities, use the worse air-toair effectiveness that applies to an air unit in the force. For example, in a mixed force of German and AustroHungarian air units in 1916, the German air-to-air effectiveness is "X", while the Austro-Hungarian air-toair effectiveness is "Y"; as "Y" is worse than "X", the combined force has an air-to-air effectiveness of "Y".
-
Reading across the air-to-air effectiveness line which applies to the attack, use the air attack strength column which most closely matches, without exceeding, the modified air attack strength. Exception: If the air attack strength is less than the smallest number listed for the air-to-air effectiveness line, use the leftmost column on the table. For example, a force with an air-to-air effectiveness of "W" and a modified air attack strength of 6 would use the third column from the left (the one with a 4 in the "W" section) on the Optional Air CRT. Note that the column used may be shifted to the left (downwards) under certain conditions as listed at the bottom right of the table.
-
Roll two dice and cross-index the number rolled with the appropriate air attack strength column to obtain a result, which will either be an air combat loss (a numbered result), or a miss (a "-").
- Combat Results. If an air combat results in an air combat loss, the number result is the number of air defense strength points (ADS) affected by the air combat. Total the ADS of all attacked air units (this total ADS will be used later). From the enemy air units which were attacked, randomly select one air unit and subtract its ADS from the air combat loss number. Repeat this procedure until an air unit is selected with an ADS that reduces the air combat loss number to 0 or less. Apply results to the selected air units:
-
If the original air combat loss number is less than the total ADS, then each odd-numbered air unit selected (1st, 3rd, etc.) is turned back, and each even-numbered air unit selected (2nd, 4th, etc.) is aborted.
-
If the original air combat loss number at least equals the total ADS, then each odd-numbered air unit selected is aborted, and each even-numbered air unit selected is turned back. Special: Each time an air unit is selected that normally would be aborted (per above), and the air combat loss number remaining after this air unit is selected equals or exceeds the ADS of the selected air unit, the attacking player may (at his option) declare the selected air unit killed instead of aborted. If the attacker exercises this option, the ADS of the selected air unit is subtracted a second time from the air combat loss number. Example: An air combat results in an air combat loss number of 9. The total ADS is determined to be 10. As the air combat loss number (9) is less than the total ADS (10), each oddnumbered air unit selected will be turned back, and each evennumbered air unit selected will be aborted. The first air unit is selected; it has an ADS of 2 and the air combat loss number is reduced to 7 (9 - 2 = 7). This air unit is turned back. A second air unit is selected; it has an ADS of 3 and the air combat loss number is reduced to 4 (7 - 3 = 4). This air unit would normally be aborted; but at this point the attacking player decides to exercise his option to have it killed instead. Exercising this option further reduces the air combat loss number, to 1 (4 - 3 = 1). A third air unit is selected; it has an ADS of 4 and the air combat loss number is reduced to -3 (1 - 4 = -3). This last air unit is turned back as well. Implementation of air combat results ends at this point as the air combat loss number has been reduced to 0 or less. Designers' Note: The Optional Air CRT gives approximately the same effects as the Standard Air CRT, while decreasing the time required to resolve air combat, as well as allowing a better representation of how high-quality, but out-numbered air units can occasionally shoot up their more numerous opponents.
D. Patrol Attacks.
Fighters fly patrol attack missions, as covered in Rule 20D. Patrolling fighters make patrol attacks against the initiating player’s air units, in a procedure similar to air combat. Unlike air combat, however, the initiating player’s air units do not attack the patrolling fighters. When resolving patrol attacks made by the patrolling fighters in a hex, follow this procedure: The initiating player prepares for the patrol attack as for air combat (Rule 21A above), forming the escort screen and mission force. The reacting player, however, does not form an engaging or bypassing group. Instead, the reacting player allocates his patrolling fighters as follows:
-
Randomly select one fighter from the screen, and then randomly allocate one patrolling fighter against it. Repeat this step, until each fighter in the screen has a patrolling fighter allocated against it, or until either player runs out of air units to allocate.
-
If the reacting player has any unallocated fighters remaining, randomly select one air unit from the mission force, and randomly allocate one patrolling fighter against it. Repeat this step, until each air unit in the mission force has a patrolling fighter allocated against it, or until either player runs out of air units to allocate.
-
If the reacting player has any unallocated fighters remaining, he allocates these extra fighters against any enemy air units, distributing them as evenly as possible. For example, no enemy air unit can have three fighters allocated against it until each enemy air unit has two fighters allocated against it. To allocate extra fighters, the reacting player chooses (not at random) one enemy air unit and then randomly selects one of his extra fighters, allocating it against the enemy air unit. Repeat this procedure until all extra fighters are allocated. The reacting player resolves the individual patrol attacks. Calculate the attack differential (per Rule 21B3, above), of the patrolling fighter against its target. Roll one die and consult the Patrol Attack Table for a result. Results are identical to those of air combat (per Rule 21B2) and are implemented immediately. Example: A Fok E1 fighter (4F2) patrol attacks a Cau G3 (1B2) . The attack differential is +2, the responding player rolls a 5, turning back the MF 7.
Rule 22 — Antiaircraft
Air units may undergo enemy antiaircraft (AA) fire when they fly certain missions. Various ground units, naval units, and map features have AA strengths. There are two types of AA: heavy and light. This distinction is used for AA purposes, as detailed in the rules and on the charts. (Also, heavy AA combat units have ATEC; light AA combat units do not.)
A. Capabilities.
-
Ground Units with AA. Ground units with AA have their AA strength printed in the upper left corner of its counter as illustrated on the unit identification chart. (Note: In the case of artillery units, the number in the upper left corner of the counter can refer to either the unit's AA strength or its range. If the number is "1", it refers to the unit's AA strength; if the number is "2" or greater it refers to the unit's range instead.) Light antiaircraft (Lt AA) units have light AA strengths, all other ground units with AA have heavy AA strengths.
-
Naval Units with AA. Naval units have light AA strengths as printed on their counters.
-
Intrinsic AA. Various map items and counters have intrinsic AA strengths, as listed on the Intrinsic AA Summary, if they are owned by the player. Note that the AA strength intrinsic to a certain map item, counter, or marker varies depending on the theater in which it is located, and may change over time. For example, an army headquarters in the west theater has no AA on or before Dec II 14, has 1 point of AA from Jan I 15 to Dec II 16, has 2 points of AA from Jan I 17 to Dec II 17, and has 3 points of AA from Jan I 18 on. All intrinsic AA strengths are heavy AA. Exception: The AA intrinsic to a supported division or machinegun unit is light AA. The intrinsic AA strength of a hex is the sum of the features with intrinsic AA in it. Exception: No matter how many supported divisions (whether self- or fully-supported) or machinegun units are in a hex, the AA strength they add to the total is always a maximum of 1 point.
B. Resolution.
- Restrictions. During the AA fire step of an air operation, the responding player may fire AA against enemy air units flying reconnaissance, bombing, and air transport missions in the operation’s target hex. The player may not fire AA against enemy air units flying any other missions. For example, a player may not fire AA against enemy fighters flying escort missions. In general, all AA strength in a hex, except that of naval units, may fire upon the appropriate air units. The exceptions are:
-
Against air units flying DAS bombing missions: Ground units attacking an enemy hex may fire AA against enemy air units flying DAS in the hex. Only ground units participating in the attack on the hex may fire. Total the AA strengths of the attacking units and divide this total by the number of hexes containing units attacking the hex. The resulting number is the strength of the AA fire. Example: Central Powers air units are flying DAS over a hex. The Entente player is attacking Central Powers units in the hex with units in three hexes: these units have 4 AA strength points in one hex, 0 in the second hex, and 2 in the third. The Entente player's total of 6 AA strength points is divided by 3 (since the attacking units occupy 3 hexes); thus the Entente player fires on the DAS air units with an AA strength of 2.
-
Against air units flying the port bombing mission: All non-naval unit AA in the hex may fire, and the naval unit in port with the highest AA strength may fire. No other naval unit may fire AA.
-
Against air units flying the naval-unit-in-port bombing mission: All non-naval unit AA in the hex may fire, and the naval unit in port with the highest AA strength may fire. No other naval unit may fire AA. For example, if Entente air units fly a naval-unit-in-port bombing mission against an Austrian port containing 3 points of position AA, and several taskforces (AA of 2 each) in port, the position AA and one taskforce may fire, for a total of 5 AA strength points.
-
Against air units flying the naval patrol bombing mission: Only the naval unit at sea in the hex with the highest AA strength may fire. No other AA in the hex may fire. For example, if German air units fly a naval patrol bombing mission against an Entente naval group consisting of one taskforce with an AA strength of 2 and two taskforces with AA strengths of 1, only the taskforce with an AA strength of 2 fires AA. Each AA strength point in a hex may fire upon each enemy air unit it is eligible to attack. Example: Four Entente type B air units are bombing a hex containing a German heavy AA battalion with an AA strength of 2. The AA may fire four times, making a 2-point attack upon each air unit.
- Procedure. For each AA attack, follow this procedure to resolve AA fire:
-
Total the AA strength eligible to fire at the target air unit.
-
Find the appropriate AA strength column on the Antiaircraft Fire Table. Use the column that most closely matches (without exceeding) the strength of the AA attack. For example, 9 points of AA firing would use the 7 column. Note: If the firing AA strength is less than 1, the AA fire automatically has no effect.
-
Roll two dice and modify the dice roll with the modifiers given on the antiaircraft fire table.
-
Cross-index the modified dice roll with the AA strength column to obtain a result. Results are identical to those of air combat (per Rule 21B2) and are implemented immediately. Designers' Note: The various dice roll modifiers to the AA Fire Table show the effects of altitude. In general, the higher the altitude an air unit flies at, the less effective the AA fire is against it. Airships (type Z) and bombers (type B) can effectively bomb area targets from higher altitudes than other air units and are correspondingly harder to hit with AA when performing such missions. Due to their larger size and formation flying, however, these same types of air units are much more vulnerable to AA when flying at the low altitudes needed to engage point targets (like GS, DAS, etc.). Both fighters and attack bombers normally bomb from low altitude, but are not penalized for doing so, as in both cases, special characteristics lessen their vulnerability to AA: speed and maneuverability in the case of fighters; and armor plating and pilot training in the use of terrain and sky conditions to mask their approach in the case of attack bombers.
Rule 23 — Special Air Rules
A. Staging.
During the mission movement step of an air op, the initiating player’s fighter, bomber, and transport air units may stage before flying their missions. An air unit stages by flying a 1-leg air transfer mission (per Rule 20A). (It may be patrol attacked while staging.) Upon arriving at its staging airbase (and after rolling for possible damage per Rule 20A), the air unit then starts flying its mission. For example, the initiating player intends to fly a fighter on an escort mission. He first stages it to an airbase within transfer range. From that staging airbase, he then starts the escort mission. Note that: 1) a transport cannot carry cargo while staging (since it has not started its transport mission yet);
- air units only stage in the mission movement step, and never in the interceptor movement or air return steps. Balloons may never stage. An air unit may not stage if it is to fly a strategic bombing, DAS, or naval patrol bombing mission.
B. Extended Range.
Air units may fly at extended range on various missions:
-
Bomber and transport air units may fly most bombing missions at extended range by carrying reduced bomb loads. DAS bombing missions, however, may not be flown at extended range. A bomber or transport flying an extended range bombing mission has its mission range doubled, but its bombing strength is reduced by 2/3rds. Example: A bomber with bombing strengths of 3-6 would have its tactical strength reduced to 1 and its strategic strength reduced to 2.
-
Transports may fly extended-range transport missions. A transport flying an extended range regular transport or air drop mission has its mission range doubled, but its cargo capacity is halved. Alternatively, a transport may fly a one-way regular transport mission at extended range, with a range three times its printed movement rating, but its cargo capacity is halved. Note that fighters and balloons cannot fly at extended range; and that airships may fly at extended range an unlimited distance as detailed in Rule 23F (Airships). An air unit flying at extended range may also return to base using its extended range. Designers' Note: Fighters cannot fly at extended range as the drop tank technology needed to do so did not exist during WW I.
C. Night Air Operations.
An air op occurs either during daytime or at night. (The preceding rules describe daytime air ops.) At the start of an air op, the initiating player declares whether it is a day or night air op. For the purposes of this rule, a night air unit is any airship and any air unit with an “N” prefix before its air unit type letter (such as NB or NF); all other air units are day air units. The presence of the N prefix does not change the general abilities of an air unit. For example, a type NB air unit is treated the same as a type B air unit in air combat and for AA fire. Night air units are not restricted to night air ops and may participate in day air ops without penalty. Day air units may participate in night air ops, but day air units are penalized when operating at night. The following missions may be flown at night:
-
Air units may fly transfer/transport missions at night.
-
Air units may fly strategic bombing missions at night. In general, air units may not fly tactical bombing missions at night. Exceptions: Night attack (NA) air units (only) may fly air unit, port, and aerial bombardment tactical bombing missions (only) at night, but have their tactical bombing strengths reduced by 2/3s when doing so.
-
Fighters may fly patrol attack missions at night.
-
Fighters may fly CAP missions at night. Air units flying night CAP may not interact with air units on day air operations. Air units flying day CAP may not interact with air units on night air operations.
-
Although no fighters may initiate escort or interception missions at night, fighters flying night CAP may have their mission switched to escort or interception at night per the normal CAP rules.
-
Note: No air units may fly recon missions at night. Day air units are penalized when flying at night:
-
A day air unit has its air attack strength halved at night (round fractions down).
-
A day air unit has its bombing strength halved when flying a night bombing mission.
-
A day air unit flying at night may crash-land when it lands at an airbase. Roll one die and consult the success table. A success result means the air unit lands safely. A failure result means the air unit crashes on landing and immediately becomes aborted—remove the air unit from play and place it in the aborted box on the appropriate game chart. Designers' Note: After 1915, French bombers and German zeppelins both mostly switched to night bombing of strategic targets. Both sides' day fighters flew night patrols on numerous occasions with occasional success, but only the specialized night fighter/searchlight teams could really be termed effective in this role.
D. Fighter Capabilities.
-
Fighters as Bombers. A fighter air unit flying a bombing mission has its air attack strength reduced by 2 (but never below 1). For example, a Nie 17 fighter (5F5) flying a bombing mission would have an air attack strength of 3 (its air defense strength remains unmodified at 5). In the air combat step, a fighter flying a bombing mission may jettison its bomb load during air combat preparation, at the option of the owning player. If this is done, the fighter reverts to its printed air attack strength, but has its bombing strength reduced by 2/3rds for the rest of the air op. (Note that a fighter jettisoning its bomb load retains a minimal bombing strength, representing its strafing ability.)
-
Scramble. If an airbase is in the target hex of an air op, the responding player’s fighters at that airbase may scramble during the interceptor movement step of the air op. Both operative and inoperative fighters at the base may scramble. A scrambling fighter flies a 1-leg air transfer mission (per Rule 20A). (It cannot be patrol attacked while scrambling.) Upon arriving at its destination airbase, the air unit becomes inoperative.
E. Bombers as Transports.
The various nation specific rules (Rule 41) may specify that certain type B air units may be used as transport air units, at the owning player's option. When used as a transport, the air unit has its air attack and air defense strengths each reduced by 2 (but never below 1), and is considered to be a type T for air combat and AA fire. In addition, bombers used as transports:
-
May not air drop units (although they may drop general supply points).
-
Treat ground units (but not general supply points) as double their RE size for transport purposes.
F. Airships.
Airships (type Z air units) are rigid balloons (dirigibles) filled with hydrogen gas that are capable of powered flight. Airships operate differently from other air units as described below:
-
All airships are also transport air units.
-
Airships may only base at zeppelin bases; they may not use regular airbases.
-
A player may not include both airships and non-airship air units in the same air op.
-
Airships are never damaged when they fly transfer missions.
-
Airships may fly at extended range an unlimited distance. When flying at extended range, an airship's abilities and ratings are unaffected.
-
Due to the vagaries of wind, weather, etc., an airship flying a mission may not always reach its target hex. (As a reminder of this, airships have asterisked movement ratings.) Check for this as follows: 1) Each time an airship flies a mission, break its flight into any number of legs, but no one leg may exceed the airship's movement rating. 2) Upon completion of each flight leg, check to see if the airship can continue moving to the target hex or if it is turned back. 3) Make this check by rolling a die; if the result is 1 or less the airship is turned back and immediately returns to base and becomes inoperative there (when returning to base it must fly to the closest zeppelin base, but may fly an unlimited distance in doing so); if the result is 2 or greater, the airship may continue moving.
-
All airships are also night air units.
-
Balloon barrages (Rule 23I) do not affect airships flying missions other than GS, DAS, harassment, or airdrop.
-
Airships flying GS, DAS, harassment, or air drop missions are much more vulnerable to AA fire than other air units. Conversely, airships flying any other types of missions are much less vulnerable to AA fire. (See the AA Fire Table.)
-
Airships participating in air combat are both harder to shoot down than other air units, and themselves have a harder than normal time shooting down other air units. (See the Air CRT.)
G. Observation Balloons.
Type O air units do not use airbase capacity like other air units. Instead, one (and only one) type O air unit may base in each hex in addition to any regular air units that may base there. Note that a type O air unit may base in a hex even if the hex has no airbase capacity. Note that as type O air units do not use airbase capacity, they are ignored for purposes of Rule 17C1-3. Type O air units may only fly tactical reconnaissance missions. Note that they cannot fly any other type of mission, not even transfer. Operative type O air units may rebase during friendly movement phases. A type O air unit rebases to another hex either by moving by strategic rail movement, or by moving overland or by operational rail movement as if it were a c/m unit with a movement rating of 5. (For purposes of strategic rail movement, each type O air unit is 1 RE in size.) Upon completion of this movement it immediately becomes inoperative. Designers' Note: Observation balloons don't fly per se at all. Instead, the mechanic of 'flying' actually represents the balloon rising on its tether in the hex, at which point it can now observe and control artillery fire in its hex and surrounding hexes, but also becomes vulnerable to AA fire and attacking fighters. The flying analogy doesn't stretch to cover transfer, however, as balloons normally rebased by motor transport or rail, and thus should not be vulnerable to enemy patrol attack or interception.
H. Air Unit Codes.
Air units may have one or more codes, as listed on the Unit Identification Chart. Codes define certain specific or special capabilities of air units, and these capabilities often modify the bombing or AA fire die rolls, as listed on the appropriate table. In addition, air units with codes have the following abilities.
-
C: Carrier Capable. Code C air units are equipped and trained to operate from aircraft carriers. Code C air units (only) may base at and fly missions from aircraft carrier taskforces (TFs) (TFs are covered in Rule 27A). A code C air unit is not required to base at an aircraft carrier TF; it may use any airbase except a seaplane carrier TF.
-
E: Elite. Code E air units have a significant percentage of high quality pilots. Code E air units have a better than normal chance at shooting down enemy air units, and are harder to shoot down in return than other air units, as shown by the dice roll modifiers to the Air Combat Results Table.
-
F: Float-plane/Flying Boat. Code F air units are composed of float-planes or flying boats. A code F air unit must base at an airbase in a partial-sea or partial lake hex or at a seaplane carrier taskforce (TF) (TFs are covered in Rule 27A); it may not use any other airbase. Note that code F air units are the only air units that may base at and fly missions from seaplane carrier TFs. A code F air unit may not fly missions while based at a seaplane carrier taskforce in an all-sea hex.
-
H: High Altitude. Code H air units can fly missions at altitudes much higher than the norm (generally over 20,000 feet). When flying any mission other than airdrop, GS, DAS, harassment, naval units in port, or naval patrol, a code H air unit can be intercepted or patrol attacked only by a code H fighter, and is less vulnerable to AA fire as shown by the dice roll modifier on the AA Fire Table. Note that when flying airdrop, GS, DAS, harassment, naval units in port, or naval patrol missions, code H air units must fly at lower altitude to be effective and thus derive no benefit from their high altitude flying ability.
-
L: Low Altitude. Code L designates type B air units which normally bomb from low altitude, but which do not have the armor protection or pilot training to qualify as attack bombers. As code L air units fly all missions at lower altitudes than is normal for type B, they are more vulnerable to AA fire as shown by the dice roll modifiers on the AA Fire Table. Code L air units are also recon air units, and thus may fly recon missions (per Rule 20F).
-
M: Anti-Shipping Missiles. Code M air units carry antishipping missiles to attack naval units. Code M air units have special abilities when flying the naval-units-in-port or naval patrol bombing mission, as follows:
-
Naval AA may not fire at Code M air units flying these missions.
-
Code M air units flying these missions have their tactical bombing strength doubled, and the bombing attack uses the code M modifier on the Aerial Bombing Table. Designers' Note: The first anti-shipping missile (launched from a zeppelin) entered service at the end of 1916 with the German navy. Although quite successful in trials, it failed to impress the high command, and so saw only occasional service during the war.
-
S: Anti-Shipping Capable. Code S air units are trained and specialized to attack naval units, as shown in the modifiers to the Aerial Bombing Table.
-
T: Antitank Capable. Code T air units are equipped with special antitank weaponry. When flying the DAS mission in a hex, count each point of tactical bombing strength of a code T air unit as one RE of full ATEC for purposes of special combat effects capability. Designers' Note: By 1918, several attack bomber aircraft types mounted one or more 20mm cannon (or even heavier armament) firing downward from the aircraft's fuselage. Germany in particular pushed development of this type as a potential counter to the hordes of tanks the Entente was expected to have by 1919.
-
V: Anti-Shipping Torpedoes. Code V air units are specially trained to attack naval units, as shown in the modifiers to the Aerial Bombing Table. When a code V air unit flies a naval patrol bombing mission, it may:
-
Carry a standard bomb load, operating as a code S air unit.
-
Carry torpedoes, with its tactical bombing strength doubled. Due to port defenses (such as anti-torpedo nets), a code V air unit flying the naval-units-in-port bombing mission does not carry torpedoes. Instead, it carries a standard bomb load, operating as a code S air unit.
I. Balloon Barrages.
Balloon barrages are shown by the presence of balloon barrage markers (see the Unit Identification Chart). Each player receives balloon barrage markers as shown on his order of battle. (Note: The historical location of each balloon barrage is listed in the OB when the barrage is received, but players may deploy the barrage as listed below.) During the initial phase in the which a balloon barrage is received, or any subsequent initial phase, the owning player may:
-
Place the marker, level 1 side up, in any friendly-owned hex in general supply; or
-
Flip any one existing friendly-owned level 1 balloon barrage marker over to its level 2 side. Once placed on the map, the balloon barrage marker may never be moved; and if its placement hex ever becomes enemy-owned it is immediately removed from play. Each balloon barrage marker on the map has an operational area. The operational area of a level 1 balloon barrage consists of the hex is occupies only. The operational area of a level 2 balloon barrage consists of the hex it occupies and all adjacent hexes. Bombing and air drop missions made against targets in the operational area of one or more balloon barrages are affected as follows:
-
Halve the bombing strengths of air units flying the GS, DAS, and harassment air missions.
-
Subtract 1 from the die roll when using the Aerial Bombing Table.
-
Subtract 1 from the die roll when using the Air Drop Disruption Table. Balloon barrages have no other effects. Note that airships flying missions other than GS, DAS, harassment, or air drop are not affected by balloon barrages. Designers' Note: Balloon barrages are static barrier defenses consisting of multiple lines of balloons, tethered at various altitudes and often trailing various metal lines or nets to make flying through their air space hazardous. These historically formed part of the air defenses of London, Paris, the Lorraine mining complex, and the Ruhr. Their net affect was to usually make enemy aircraft fly at (and bomb from) higher altitudes, thus lessening bombing effectiveness.
J. Groups.
Air units in The Great War normally represent 100 fixed-wing aircraft, 16 observation balloons, or 6 zeppelins. This scale works well in the western theater (where the vast majority of the air units historically operated), but breaks down in other theaters where aircraft were much fewer in number, but still had a significant impact on operations. To handle air operations in the subsidiary theaters, therefore, the concept of groups (halfstrength air units) is used. A group air unit is distinguished from a normal air unit in that the group has the air unit's model name underlined while a normal air unit does not. For example, a Fok D3 is a normal air unit, while a Fok D3 is a group. In general, groups operate the same as normal air units except that the bombing strengths and cargo capacity of a group are always halved. Within each individual game in The Great War series, all air units in the west theater are normal air units, and all air units in other theaters are groups. This only becomes a problem when playing grand campaign games linking two or more theaters where players have transferred air units around so that groups and normal air units end up present in the same theater at the same time, and even then only affects air combat. When this occurs, use the following:
-
Standard Air CRT: When a group fires on a normal air unit downgrade any result one category; that is, a kill becomes an abort, an abort becomes a return, and a return becomes a no effect. When a normal air unit fires on a group, the normal air unit fires twice against the group (implement the result after both fires, with a combination of two aborts becoming a kill).
-
Optional Air CRT: Halve the air attack and air defense strengths of all groups.
Rule 24 — Airborne Landings
The airdrop mission (Rule 20H2) details how general supply points and air-droppable units are transported to and dropped in target hexes. Parachute machinegun and zeppelin landing units are air-droppable units. Special: Zeppelin landing units may only be air-dropped by airships. Units and general supply points may air drop in any land hexes (except those prohibited by Rule 20H2), including hexes occupied by enemy units. Designers' Note: Germany made two airdrops in 1918, one against the Baltic Islands off Estonia and one in the Caucasus. In both instances zeppelins were used to drop a small (platoon or company) force to secure a landing site, which was then followed up by air transport of roughly a battalion. Accordingly, in Bloody Eagles Germany receives two zeppelin landing battalions. Although the Entente never actually made an airdrop during the war, they had planned to do so had the war continued on into 1919. Billy Mitchell proposed on 25 Oct 1918 that the US establish a division of paratroops (actually a division of parachute machinegunners as the unit was to be structured almost entirely around 10-man MG teams), and this proposal was approved by General Pershing. The original plan was to drop the division directly on the great fortress of Metz, but this was later changed to a drop behind the Argonne sector line to disrupt the movement of German reserves during the crucial breakthrough attack. Accordingly, in Over There the Americans get two parachute machinegun brigades.
A. Disruption.
An air-droppable unit may suffer disruption when making an air drop. A general supply point may be scattered when air dropped. During the mission resolution step, roll one die for each unit or general supply point making an air drop and consult the Air Drop Disruption Table. Modify the die roll as indicated on the table, find the result, and immediately implement it. Results are:
-
No Effect: The unit or supply point lands safely.
-
Scattered: The supply point is hopelessly scattered and is removed from play.
-
Disrupted: The unit is disrupted (per Rule 3A5).
-
Badly Disrupted: The unit is disrupted, plus has its attack strength reduced to zero.
-
Eliminated: The unit is immediately eliminated. A unit that becomes disrupted remains so until the start of its next friendly initial phase. For example, an Entente parachute unit disrupted during the Entente player turn would remain disrupted during the Entente player turn and throughout the entire following Central Powers player turn.
B. Ground Operations.
-
Hex Ownership. An undisrupted airborne unit gains immediate ownership of the hex it dropped in, if the hex is not occupied by enemy units. A disrupted airborne unit cannot gain ownership of a hex. Example: An Entente parachute unit air drops in an unoccupied Central Powers-owned hex that contains an airbase. The unit becomes disrupted when dropping in the hex. Therefore, it does not gain ownership of the hex, and the Entente player is unable to use the airbase there.
-
Airborne Overrun. Units dropping in an enemy-occupied hex may overrun enemy units there, if the dropping units achieve overrun conditions (per Rule 6F, ignoring all MP costs). The overrun occurs in the mission resolution step of the air operation, after all units dropping in the air operation have landed. Only units dropping in that air operation may participate in the airborne overrun of the hex; other friendly units may not join in this overrun.
-
Combat. Units dropping in an enemy-occupied hex must attack the enemy units there during the combat phase, if both sides still occupy the hex at this time. Friendly units in other hexes may also join in the attack, per the standard combat rules. If dropping units are badly disrupted (attack strength of 0) but are required to attack, and there is no ground unit in the attack with an attack strength greater than zero, the attacking units are automatically eliminated. (Note that this occurs even if there is ground support or naval gunfire support available for the attacking units.) When both sides occupy the same hex, combat is resolved as normal except for AS results. On an AS result, the units which dropped in the enemy-occupied hex treat the result as an AR. All other units treat the result as an AS. Due to the surprise an airdrop in WW I would probably achieve, an airborne unit making an airdrop is automatic-ally in combat supply during the player turn of the drop. Retreating units are subject to the effects of all ZOCs they enter, including the ZOCs of enemy units in the hex from which the retreat is conducted. Example: A parachute regiment drops in a hex occupied by an enemy division. During the combat phase, the parachute regiment must attack, and the combat result requires it to retreat. Since any hex it can enter is in the ZOC of the division in the drop hex, the parachute regiment is eliminated.
-
General Supply Points. A general supply point may be dropped in an enemy owned hex in a player turn. However, if the hex is enemy owned at the end of that player turn, the supply point there is removed from play.
C. Planning and Preparation.
Airborne landings involving units (but not general supply points) must be planned in advance: the target hex of an air drop mission and the unit to be dropped there must be planned at least one turn in advance. During the player’s initial phase at least one game turn prior to an air drop operation, the player writes down the identity of the unit involved in the operation and the target hex of the operation. A unit may have only one operation planned for it at a time. Once planned, an operation may be canceled at the player’s option in a subsequent friendly initial phase, and a new operation for the unit may be planned at that time. A player may also cancel an operation during the phase in which it is to occur. During an initial phase, an operation may not be planned for a unit that is in an enemy ZOC at that time. Once an operation is planned for a unit, it must be canceled if the unit is in an enemy ZOC, attacks, or is attacked at any time between the planning and the execution of the operation. If for any reason the unit is not able to participate in the operation during the phase in which it is to take place, the operation must be canceled. An air drop operation may be planned in advance to occur for a unit on the turn it arrives as a reinforcement.
Rule 25 — Air Replacement System
During the course of the game, players regroup air units, receive reinforcements and replacements, and must withdraw air units. A player performs these air replacement activities within the framework of the air replacement cycle. A player’s air replacement cycle consists of four consecutive game turns beginning with his I player turn of each odd-numbered month (Jan I, Mar I, May I, Jul I, Sep I, Nov I). All air replacement activities are performed during the player’s initial phase. The air OBs list the reinforcements and replacements in the game. The various activities occur as detailed below. Each player follows these procedures separately for each of his nationalities (per Rule 17B3b).
A. Regrouping.
During the initial phase, the phasing player may regroup pairs of aborted air units. For each pair, the air units must have identical model, type, codes, and ratings. Examples: A pair of 5F5 FE 2b 2/4) may regroup. However, the following pairs could not regroup: a 2A3 Voi 4 2/7 with a 2NB3 1-1/L/7 (different types); a 3R5 Alb C3 2/8 with a 4R5 Alb C5 2/7 (different models); or a 6F5 Fok D3 0/E/4 with a 6F5 Fok D3 0/4 (different codes). For each pair that is regrouped, place one in the eliminated box on the appropriate air chart and receive the other one as a reinforcement (Rule 25C below). A player is not required to regroup any air units. Regrouping does not require the expenditure of air replacement points (ARPs; Rule 25D below).
B. Withdrawals.
The air orders of battle occasionally require the players to withdraw air units from play. Withdraw any air unit that meets the OB’s specification, as follows:
-
If at all possible, withdraw an air unit in play (either operative or inoperative).
-
If none are in play, withdraw an aborted air unit, if possible. If an aborted air unit is withdrawn, the owning player must spend ARPs sufficient to repair it.
-
If no aborted air unit is available, withdraw an eliminated air unit. If an eliminated air unit is withdrawn, the owning player must spend ARPs sufficient to replace it. When spending ARPs as required above, the player must spend them before spending ARPs for any other purposes. If a player has insufficient ARPs, he keeps track of his ARP obligation. When he receives ARPs subsequently, he must spend them to meet this obligation.
C. Reinforcements.
Players receive air reinforcements during the game. A player places his reinforcements on the map during his initial phase, as operative air units at any friendly-owned, unisolated airbase with a capacity of 1 or more. If a player has both reinforcements and withdrawals of the same air unit type in the same turn, follow this procedure: For each air unit in play that is withdrawn, place one reinforcement of the same type (if any is available) as an operative air unit at the airbase of the withdrawing air unit. Example: In the initial phase of an Entente player turn, the Entente player receives five type R air units (two MF 11, two BE 2c, and one F 40) as reinforcements and is required to withdraw three type R air units (three Ble 11). Accordingly, for each of the three withdrawing Ble 11s, the Entente player must place a reinforcing type R at the Ble 11s airbase. The remaining two type R reinforcements may be placed at the Entente player’s discretion. Air reinforcements unable to enter play for any reason are eliminated instead.
D. Replacements.
Players receive air replacement points (ARPs) in the initial phases at the start of each air cycle. The player uses ARPs to replace eliminated air units and to repair aborted air units. Within each command, a player may spend or accumulate ARPs as follows:
-
If the player’s ARP allowance for the current air cycle is 2 or more: In an initial phase, the phasing player may spend up to half his ARP allowance for the current air cycle, if he has sufficient ARPs remaining. Example: A player receives 7 ARPs at the start of an air cycle. He may spend no more than 3.5 ARPs (half of 7) in any of his initial phases in that air cycle.
-
If the player’s ARP allowance for the current air cycle is less than 2: In an initial phase, the phasing player may spend up to all of his ARP allowance for the current air cycle, if he has sufficient ARPs remaining.
-
If a player has any unspent ARPs at the end of an air cycle, he may accumulate up to 2 ARPs for use during the next air cycle. He loses all unspent ARPs in excess of 2.
-
Replacement. A player may spend two ARPs to replace an air unit in an eliminated air units box. Place the replaced air unit on the map during the initial phase, as an operative air unit at any friendly-owned, unisolated airbase in the air unit's command. For example, an air unit replaced from the eliminated air units box on the British Isles Game Chart would be placed at any friendly-owned, unisolated airbase in the West (British Isles) command.
-
Repair. A player may spend one ARP to repair an aborted air unit. Place the repaired air unit on the map during the initial phase, as an operative air unit at any friendly-owned, unisolated airbase in the air unit's command.
-
Repair/Replacement of Groups. The repair and replacement costs listed above are for normal air units. The cost to repair or replace a group is half that of a normal air unit. For example, it costs 0.5 ARP to repair an aborted group.
-
Repair/Replacement of Airships. The cost to repair an aborted airship is double that of a non-airship air unit. For example, it costs 1 ARP to repair an aborted group-size airship air unit and 2 ARPs to repair an aborted normal-size airship air unit. Eliminated airships may not be replaced.
Rule 26 — Basic Naval Rules
Players should use the basic naval rules until they are thoroughly familiar with the core ground rules (Rules 1-16) and the advanced air rules (Rules 17-25). Once those rules are assimilated, the advanced naval rules should be used instead. If these basic naval rules are used, do not use Rules 27-35 (the advanced naval rules). When using these rules, the Entente player (only) will have limited use of his naval units. The Central Powers player merely ignores all reference to naval units in his OB. Naval units that are in play may be used for naval transport and to provide naval gunfire support as detailed below. Note that naval combat cannot occur and amphibious landings may not be made when the basic naval rules are used.
A. Naval Units.
Only type GB and MT taskforce (TF), and type LC, NT, and RT transport naval units are used with these rules; ignore all mention of other naval units in the OBs. (The various naval unit types are shown on the Unit Identification Chart.) Treat naval units used with these rules as water-only restricted movement units (Rule 14B2), with the following changes:
-
They have a movement allowance of 120 MPs.
-
They may enter all-sea hexes and coastal hexsides (only) and spend 1 MP per hex or hexside to do so. Exception: Type RT naval units may not enter all-sea hexes.
-
They cannot enter restricted waters hexes.
-
They have a combat strength equal to their gunnery strength. Note that type LC, NT, and RT naval units have no gunnery strength and thus are zero-strength units (Rule 9G).
-
They cannot enter a hex or blockade box containing enemy mine points. TFs are also artillery units: type GB are field artillery (Rule 12B1), and type MT are heavy artillery (Rule 12B2). Transport naval units have a cargo capacity printed on their counter. The number on the counter is the number of REs of cargo (ground units, logistics items, and manpower/ equipment points, only) the transport may carry during naval transport. (Note that the RE size of c/m and artillery units with heavy equipment is doubled for naval transport purposes per Rule 3A3.)
B. Naval Transport.
A player may use naval transport during his movement and exploitation phases, moving cargo between friendly-owned ports and/or beaches. Note that naval transport cannot be used during the reaction movement phase. Transports carry cargo using their cargo capacities. Two or more transports may combine their capacities to carry large cargoes (such as divisions), as long as they all move in the same naval group while transporting the cargo. If a transport is eliminated, its cargo is eliminated as well. A transport may embark cargo from, or disembark cargo into, hexes adjacent to the coastal hexside (see Rule 14B2) the transport occupies (only). A transport must spend MPs to embark or disembark cargo as follows: 30 MPs to embark or disembark cargo at a port, and 60 MPs to embark or disembark cargo at a friendly-owned beach. These MP costs must be paid both when the cargo is embarked and when the cargo is disembarked. A transport may move both prior to and after transporting cargo if it has the MPs to do so. A ground unit must spend MPs to be transported: All 40 hexes of its rail movement allowance for a rail-only unit (Rule 13B1), 4 MPs for a c/m or artillery unit, and 2 MPs for any other type of unit. Exception: If the unit disembarks at a beach, it must spend all its MPs to do so. A unit may move both before and after its transport if it has the MPs to do so.
-
Ports. Each city or fortress with a port symbol (see the Master Terrain Key) is a port. Each port has an RE capacity, which is the number of REs of cargo that may embark/disembark at the port in a player turn. (The capacities of ports are listed on the Port Summary.) Ports may be damaged due to bombing (Rules 20G1b and 20G2f) or demolition (Rule 13A2). Each hit of damage on a port reduces its capacity by 1 RE. Further, each hit of damage reduces the number of REs which may trace a naval element of a supply line (Rule 11B3) through the port by 3 REs. A player may use a port in a turn only if he owns it at the start of his initial phase.
-
Beaches. A coastal hex of any terrain type except mountain or prohibited terrain is a beach. (A coastal hex is any hex containing both land and sea.) A beach has an unlimited capacity of REs of cargo that may embark/ disembark there in a player turn. Some hexes contain a port and a beach, both of which may be used. Transports of any type may embark cargo at a beach. However, only type LC transports may embark cargo with heavy equipment from a beach. Only type LC and RT transports may disembark cargo at a beach. A transport may not embark or disembark cargo at a beach during stormy or typhoon sea conditions. (Sea conditions are covered in Rule 36C.)
C. Naval Gunfire Support.
TFs may support friendly ground units in combat through naval gunfire support (NGS). To provide NGS for friendly units, the hex being attacked (or under attack) must be adjacent to the all-sea hex or coastal hexside the TF occupies. A TF has an NGS strength equal to its gunnery strength. Halve the NGS strength of a TF in rough sea conditions, quarter it in stormy sea conditions, and reduce it to zero in typhoon sea conditions. (Round fractions down.) TFs may fire NGS only in support of attacking or defending ground units. NGS strength is ignored when calculating losses due to ground combat, and a TF providing NGS is not affected by ground combat results. In each combat or reaction combat phase, after DAS and GS is allocated, but before any ground combat is resolved, the defender must allocate his NGS to specific hexes. NGS allocated to a specific hex may not be switched to another hex that phase, even if its assigned hex is not attacked. There is no similar requirement for the attacker to allocate NGS; the attacker decides on and announces the amount of NGS in an attack only when he resolves the attack.
Rule 27 — Advanced Naval Rules Introduction
If the advanced naval rules (Rules 27-35) are used, do not use Rule 26 (Basic Naval Rules).
A. Naval Units.
Naval units are shown on the Unit Identification Chart.
-
Types. There are two basic categories of naval units: taskforces and transports. Each category contains several specific naval unit types, as shown on the UIC. For example, the transport category contains naval transports (type NT), river transports (type RT), and landing craft (type LC). Unless otherwise noted in the rules, rules about "task-forces" and "transports" pertain to all naval unit types with-in their respective categories. For example, a rule describing the abilities of transports applies to all transport types.
-
Strengths. Each naval unit has one or more strengths printed on the counter.
-
Gunnery Strength. This is the naval unit's gunnery strength for naval combat, its naval gunfire support strength for ground combat, and its bombardment strength for naval bombardment.
-
Torpedo Strength. This is the naval unit's torpedo strength for naval combat. (The notation "T" is a reminder that this is "torpedo only".)
-
Cargo Capacity. This is the naval unit's cargo capacity. (The notation "C" is a reminder that this is "cargo only".)
-
Antiaircraft (AA) Strength. This is the naval unit's strength for AA purposes (see Rule 22). All AA of naval units is light AA. A taskforce (TF) always has a gunnery strength, may have a torpedo strength and/or antiaircraft (AA) strength, but never has a cargo capacity. A transport always has a cargo capacity, and may have an AA strength, but never has a gunnery or torpedo strength. A naval unit's defense strength is the measure of its ability to withstand damage; it is equal to its gunnery strength (if it is a TF), or to its cargo capacity (if it is a transport). Exceptions: 1) A TF with a printed gunnery strength of 0 has a defense strength of 1; and 2) A TF with a printed gunnery strength of 1 and a reduced strength side with a gunnery strength of 0 has a defense strength of 2. Example: An 8-point TF, a 0-3T TF, a 1-6T TF (reduced strength side of 0-3T), and a C3 transport have defense strengths of 8, 1, 2, and 3 respectively.
-
Codes. Naval units may have one or more codes, as listed on the UIC. Codes define certain specific or special capabilities of naval units. For example, a type DD with a code M is a destroyer that can carry mine points.
-
Stacking. Any number of friendly naval units may be in a coastal or all-sea hex, or along a riverine hexside. (A coastal hex is any hex containing both land and sea. A riverine hexside is any minor canal, canal, river, major river, great river, or all-lake hexside.) The presence of a naval unit in a coastal hex does not prohibit enemy ground units from entering the hex, and naval units may enter coastal hexes occupied by enemy units. A naval unit is affected by the presence of enemy naval units and coast defenses, as covered in later rules.
-
Damage. Each bombing or gunfire hit on a naval unit does one hit of damage to the naval unit. Each torpedo or mine strike on a naval unit does a variable number of hits of damage to the naval unit as shown on the Torpedo/Mine Strike Damage Table. Use hit markers to denote damage to naval units. Note: Most naval units have reduced strength sides; when such a naval unit takes damage equal to half or more its defense strength, flip it over to its reduced strength side and adjust the hit markers accordingly. Damage affects naval units as follows:
-
Each hit of damage on a taskforce (TF) reduces its gunnery strength by 1, and reduces its torpedo strength by a variable number determined by dividing the TF's torpedo strength by 2 (or by the TF's gunnery strength if it is more than 2), rounding all fractions up. For example, a 3-10T TF which takes a hit of damage would have its gunnery strength reduced to 2 and would have its torpedo strength reduced to 6 (as 10 divided by 3 is 3.3 which rounds to 4, and 4 from 10 is 6).
-
Each hit of damage on a transport reduces its cargo capacity by 1.
-
Damage has no effect on a naval unit's AA strength until the naval unit takes sufficient damage to cause it to flip to its reduced strength (and reduced AA) side. For example, a 9-point TF (AA=2) with 4 hits of damage would still have an AA strength of 2, but a 5th hit would flip it to its 4-point (AA=1) side, from which point the TF would have an AA strength of 1.
-
A naval unit is sunk when it takes hits at least equal to its defense strength. When sunk, remove the naval unit from play and place it in the replacement pool of the theater it is in. The bombing mission rules describe how air units achieve hits against naval units in port or at sea (Rules 20G2g and h). When naval units take bombing hits in an air operation, distribute the hits among the target naval units as follows:
-
For each category of naval units present, allocate one hit to each category in the following order: taskforce, transport.
-
Apply the allocated hits. For each category, choose a naval unit at random and apply the hit against it.
-
If any hits remain unallocated, repeat the above procedure. Continue repeating steps 1 and 2 until all hits are allocated and applied.
-
Assembly/Breakdown of Transports. Subject to the limits of the counter mix, transport naval units of the same type in a hex may assemble and break down at any time during a turn. For example, a C6 NT could break down into any combination of C1, C2, and C3 NTs so long as the total cargo capacity of the broken down NTs equals 6.
-
Carriers and Carrier Aircraft. Code C air units (only) may base at type CV taskforces. Code F air units (only) may base at type CS taskforces. An undamaged CV or CS has an airbase capacity of 1; one hit of damage on a CV or CS eliminates its capacity as an airbase. When a CV or CS is sunk, also eliminate any air unit based there. Unlike land airbases, the capacity of a CV or CS also limits the number of air units which may base at the CV or CS at any moment. Further, it limits the number of air units which may fly missions from the CV or CS in a player turn. During each friendly and enemy initial phase, air units based on a CV or CS are automatically assigned to the naval patrol bombing mission. Such an air unit may, however, abandon this mission at any point during the player turn prior to actually flying it, and thus regain eligibility to fly another air mission during the player turn.
B. Concepts.
-
Sea Zones. There are several sea zones in The Great War. The sea zones in play, and the territory which comprises each sea zone are listed in Rule 42B (scenarios). The concept of sea zones is used in various naval rules.
-
Naval Group (NG). A naval group (NG) consist of one or more friendly naval units at sea. All naval units in an NG move together. There are three types of NGs:
-
A combat NG consists only of TFs.
-
A cargo NG consists only of transports.
-
A mixed NG consists of any combination of TFs and transports.
-
Cargo. Transports (but not TFs) may transport ground units, logistics items (Rule 11H), and manpower/equipment points. Cargo is carried based on its RE size; the RE size of c/m and artillery units with heavy equipment is doubled for naval transport purposes.
-
In Port/At Sea. An NG will either be in port or at sea. An NG may be in port when in the hex of a friendly-owned port (of any size). Note: 1) An NG can be at sea in a port hex, and 2) An NG on a riverine hexside is considered to be "at sea".
-
Adjacent. For naval purposes:
-
Sea hexes are adjacent if they share a common all-sea or partial-sea hexside. (A sea hex is any all-sea or coastal hex.) For example, GW2:5008 is adjacent to 4909 and 5108, but is not adjacent to 5007, due to the land hexside between 5008 and 5007.
-
Riverine hexsides are adjacent if they are contiguous. For example, GW2:4510/4511 is adjacent to 4510/4610 and 4410/4511, but is not adjacent to 4609/4610 .
-
Riverine hexsides and sea hexes are adjacent if they share a common hexside. For example, GW2:4609/4610 is adjacent to 4609 and 4610, but is not adjacent to
-
Blockades. If a combat or mixed NG is in the hex of an enemy-owned port, the port and all naval units in port there are blockaded.
-
Amphibious Ability. The following units are amphibious:
-
Marine units (Rule 14I).
-
Any non-motorized unit without heavy equipment that is embarking, disembarking, or being transport-ed by a type LC or RT transport.
C. Naval Activities Phasing.
Naval activities occur in each player turn, as follows:
-
Initial Phase. The phasing player performs all naval replacement actions: taskforce consolidation, withdrawals, reinforcements, and replacements (see Rule 35).
-
Movement Phase. The movement phase is divided into two sub-phases:
-
Naval Movement Sub-Phase. This sub-phase consists of a series of 5 identical naval movement steps (1st Naval Movement Step, 2nd Naval Movement Step, etc). During a step, the phasing player may move his NGs, embark/disembark cargo, make amphibious landings, conduct naval bombardments of enemy facilities, and replenish naval units. The non-phasing player may move his NGs in naval reaction movement. Both players may initiate air ops (per the air rules).
-
Ground Movement Sub-Phase. The phasing player moves his ground units, including those units which underwent naval transport and have movement points remaining. Both players may initiate air ops.
-
Combat Phase. Both players may conduct naval bombardments of enemy ground units and may allocate naval gunfire support.
-
Reaction Movement Phase. The movement phase is divided into two sub-phases:
-
Naval Movement Sub-Phase. This sub-phase consists of a series of 5 identical naval movement steps. During a step, the non-phasing player may move his NGs, conduct naval bombardments of enemy facilities, and replenish naval units. Note that cargo cannot be embarked or disembarked and amphibious landings cannot be made. The phasing player may move his NGs in naval reaction movement. Both players may initiate air ops.
-
Ground Movement Sub-Phase. The non-phasing player moves his eligible ground units, including those units which underwent naval transport and have movement points remaining. Both players may initiate air ops.
-
Reaction Combat Phase. Both players may allocate naval gunfire support. Note that neither player may conduct naval bombardments of enemy ground units.
-
Exploitation Phase. The exploitation phase is divided into two sub-phases:
-
Naval Movement Sub-Phase. This sub-phase consists of a series of 5 identical naval movement steps. These steps are the same as those in the movement phase, except amphibious landings may not be made.
-
Ground Exploitation Sub-Phase. The phasing player moves his eligible units, including those units which underwent naval transport and have movement points remaining. The phasing player lands units allocated to the follow-up wave. Both players may initiate air ops.
- End of Player-Turn. The phasing player checks the supply status of his naval units.
D. Naval Movement Sequence.
During each naval movement step, the following actions may take place. If more than one of these actions occurs at the same time, resolve them in the following sequence:
-
Mine attacks against naval units.
-
Bombing attacks on naval units by air units.
-
Naval reaction movement by the opposing player.
-
Naval Combat.
-
Naval Bombardment. When a player disembarks cargo during a step, the following landing sequence is followed:
-
Resolve any coastal raids against enemy coast defenses (see Rule 14I1).
-
Resolve any naval combat between naval units and enemy coast defenses.
-
Disembark cargo.
-
If the cargo was disembarked at a beach by landing craft (LC), the owning player checks for LC wastage.
-
If the cargo was disembarked in an enemy-owned hex, the enemy player resolves any attempts by his ground units to respond to the amphibious landing.
Rule 28 — Movement of Naval Units
Naval units move in naval groups (NGs). A player moves his NGs during friendly naval movement steps. A player cannot move his naval units during enemy naval movement steps, except for naval reaction movement. (Friendly naval movement steps are those that occur during movement and exploitation phases of friendly player turns and during reaction movement phases of enemy player turns. Enemy naval movement steps are those that occur during movement and exploitation phases of enemy player turns and during reaction movement phases of friendly player turns.) NGs move through the expenditure of movement points (MPs). An NG has a movement allowance of 30 MPs per friendly naval movement step. Enemy NGs using naval reaction movement have a movement allowance of 15 MPs per naval movement step. NGs spend MPs to enter adjacent hexes or hexsides, to embark and disembark cargo, to conduct naval bombardment, to provide naval gunfire support, to replenish, and to lay and sweep mines as detailed on the Naval MP Cost Summary. At any point when moving in a friendly naval movement step, two or more friendly NGs in the same hex may combine into one NG. When NGs combine, the combined NG assumes the movement allowance of the NG that has spent the most MPs. Example: An NG spends 6 MPs to move to a hex containing another NG which has already spent 20 MPs. The NGs combine, and the combined NG has spent 20 MPs, having 10 remaining for the step. At any point when moving in a naval movement step, a single NG may split into two or more NGs. Separate the naval units into their new NGs. Each NG assumes the movement allowance of the original NG. Example: An NG of three naval units spends 14 MPs to move to a hex. There, the NG splits into three NGs, each of which has spent 14 MPs, having 16 remaining for the step. An NG at sea ignores the presence of enemy NGs in port. The moving NG may move adjacent to the port containing the enemy NG; it may even enter the port’s hex. NGs are restricted as follows:
-
They must move along an all-water route and may not cross land at any time. Examples: An NG in M:0207 cannot move directly to 0307, due to the intervening land hexside between the two hexes. Similarly, an NG in M:0207 cannot move 0207-0308-0407, due to the land in 0308. Note: If an NG stops or pauses in a hex which blocks its naval movement in certain directions, keep track of "which side" of the hex the group is in.
-
They cannot enter restricted waters hexes.
-
They cannot move through a narrow straits or enter a riverine hexside if the straits or hexside is enemyinterdicted. (A narrow straits or riverine hexside is enemy-interdicted if a supported enemy unit occupies the hex on either side of the straits or hex-side. Disrupted units do not count for this purpose. A narrow straits or riverine hexside is automatically enemyinterdicted if the hexes on both sides of the straits or hexside are enemy-owned.) For example, if either GW2:0320 or 0420 is occupied by an undisrupted supported enemy unit, an NG in 0220 cannot move 0321-0420-0520 as the narrow straits at 0320/0420 are enemy-interdicted.
-
Only NGs consisting solely of types GB, MT, MW, TB, LC, and RT may enter riverine hexsides. Exception: Types DD and NT may comprise part of such NGs when moving along riverine hexsides between the coast and inland ports. (Inland ports are covered in Rule 30A6.) An NG containing DDs and/or NTs may move no further upriver than the first hexside adjacent to the inland port.
-
In general, an NG may not enter a hex or hexside containing an enemy combat or mixed NG at sea. Exception: An NG blockaded in port (per Rule 27B6) may leave port and put to sea in the hex or hexside containing the enemy NG. (This will initiate naval combat, per Rule 28C below.) NGs (and their cargo) may end their movement at sea. An NG which ends its movement in a hex containing a friendly-owned port may enter the port or remain at sea in the port's hex. An NG which ends its movement on a riverine hexside adjoining a hex containing a port may enter the port or remain at sea on the riverine hexside.
A. Naval Reaction Movement.
When a friendly naval group (NG) moves within 15 MPs (traced through sea hexes and riverine hexsides) of an enemy NG during a friendly naval movement step, the enemy player may attempt to have his NG react. Note: For purposes of naval reaction movement, an NG is considered moving if it is spending MPs (for any purpose). An enemy NG may attempt naval reaction movement only once per naval movement step. It may attempt to react at any time while an opposing NG is moving within 15 MPs. When the enemy NG attempts to react, the movement of the other NG is temporarily suspended. For the naval reaction movement attempt, the enemy player rolls one die, applies all appropriate die roll modifiers, and consults the Naval Success Table. Results are:
-
Success: The naval reaction movement attempt succeeds. The enemy NG may immediately move, with a maximum movement allowance of 15 MPs. The enemy player moves the NG per the naval movement rules (such as moving to the safety of a friendly port, or moving adjacent to the opposing naval group to force naval combat). MPs may be spent only for movement and for no other purpose (such as disembarking cargo or laying mines). At any time during naval reaction movement, the moving NG may split into two or more NGs, all of which continue naval reaction movement. A reacting NG must end its naval reaction movement when it has spent 15 MPs or when it initiates naval combat.
-
Failure: The attempt fails. The NG may not move, nor may it attempt to react again during the current naval movement step. Only one enemy NG may attempt to react at a time. After the NG has reacted (or if its naval reaction movement attempt fails), the enemy player may attempt to have another eligible NG react. Once the enemy player is finished with all naval reaction, the other player resumes naval movement. Designers' Note: The Brits get a +1 for naval reaction from 1915 on, as they were routinely reading the German naval codes by then.
- Dedicated Reaction. A player may assign friendly combat NGs in port (only) to dedicated reaction at the be-ginning of any friendly movement, exploitation, or reaction movement phase. Note that cargo/mixed NGs and NGs at sea may not be assigned to dedicated reaction. (Place a dedicated reaction marker on the NG to show this assignment.) An NG may not spend MPs for any purpose during the phase in which it is assigned to dedicated reaction, but in the naval movement steps of the next enemy movement, exploitation or reaction movement phase (as appropriate) it has its naval reaction movement abilities enhanced:
-
It may attempt to react when an opposing NG is within 30 MPs (vice the normal 15 MPs). Note that even though the NG may react in response to an opposing NG up to 30 MPs away, it still has a movement allowance of but 15 MPs if the attempt is successful.
-
The die roll for any naval reaction movement attempts it makes is modified by +2. Note that a naval unit assigned to dedicated reaction retains the above benefits throughout the entire movement, exploitation, or reaction movement phase (as appropriate), even through multiple reaction attempts. Remove all dedicated reaction markers from friendly NGs at the end of each enemy movement, exploitation, and reaction movement phase. Designers' Note: Dedicated reaction represents holding your fleet in readiness to act upon intelligence provided by picket ships, naval air reconnaissance, etc. In effect you trade off your ability to do something with your navy in your part of the turn in return for increasing the possibility of responding to your opponent's naval moves in his part of the turn. Historically, the British Grand Fleet spent most of the war on dedicated reaction.
B. Combat Zones.
Various naval groups (NGs) and all coast defenses (CDs) have combat zones. A combat or mixed NG at sea has a combat zone consisting of the sea hex (or riverine hexside) it occupies and all adjacent (per Rule 27B5) sea hexes and riverine hexsides. A cargo NG has a combat zone consisting of the sea hex (or riverine hexside) it occupies (only). Any NG in port does not have a combat zone. CDs have a combat zone consisting of the hex they occupy and all adjacent (per Rule 27B5) riverine hexsides. Special: If the CD has an attack range of 2 (per Rule 12B7), its combat zone also includes all adjacent sea hexes; If the CD has an attack range of 3, its combat zone also includes every sea hex within 2 hexes of the hex it occupies. (CDs are covered in Rule 33B.)
C. Movement and Combat.
Naval combat occurs during naval movement steps. Naval combat is initiated when:
-
A naval group (NG) enters (or puts to sea in) a hex or hexside in the combat zone of an enemy NG or coast defenses (CDs).
-
A naval group starts a friendly naval movement step in a hex (or hexside) in the combat zone of an enemy NG or CDs, and the group spends any MPs in its hex without leaving the hex (or hexside). Exception: Nothing initiates naval combat during typhoon sea conditions (see Rule 36E6). When naval combat is initiated, naval movement is temporarily suspended while the combat is resolved. Once combat is over, naval movement resumes. A cargo NG ignores the presence of enemy cargo NGs for all purposes. A cargo NG can move adjacent to or even enter the hex (or hexside) of an enemy cargo NG, and doing this does not initiate naval combat.
Rule 29 — Naval Combat
Naval combat occurs between a naval group and enemy naval groups (NGs) or coast defenses (CDs), as described in Rule 28C. Once naval combat begins, all other naval activities cease until the naval combat is resolved. If an NG initiates more than one naval combat at the same time, resolve all initiated naval combat in the following order:
-
Between the moving NG and any enemy NG in the moving NG’s hex (or hexside).
-
Between the moving NG and any enemy NG (moving player’s choice) in any one adjacent hex or hexside. Repeat this step until all naval combat with adjacent enemy NGs is resolved.
-
Between the moving NG and any enemy CDs in the moving NG’s hex (or hexside).
-
Between the moving NG and any enemy CDs (moving player’s choice) in any one adjacent hex or hexside. Repeat this step until all naval combat with adjacent CDs is resolved.
A. Preparation.
For each player with a naval group in combat, the player separates that group’s naval units into two groupings:
-
The Main Body: The player must place all trans-ports in the main body. He may (but is not required to) place taskforces (TFs) in the main body.
-
The Screen: The player may (but is not required to) place TFs in the screen. (Each TF must be placed in either the main body or the screen, owning player’s choice.)
B. Resolution.
In naval combat, naval units and coast defenses (CDs) use their gunnery and torpedo strengths to fire upon enemy naval units and CDs. Naval units have gunnery and torpedo strengths per Rule 27A2. These gunnery and torpedo strengths are halved in rough sea conditions and quartered in stormy sea conditions. (Round fractions down.) A CD has a gunnery strength as listed on the Coast Defenses Summary. Sea conditions do not affect CDs' gunnery strengths. Naval combat takes place at one of four ranges; from farthest to closest, these are: long, medium, short, and torpedo. Range affects the ability of naval units and CDs to use their gunnery and torpedo strengths as follows:
-
At long range, only type BB, BC, and PD naval units, and CDs with a fire range of "BB" (per the Coast Defenses Summary), may fire their gunnery strengths. PDs which fire at this range have their gunnery strengths halved.
-
At medium range, only type BB, BC, PD, CL, CA, CD, and MT naval units, and CDs with a fire range of "BB" or "CA", may fire their gunnery strengths.
-
At short range, all naval units and CDs may fire their gunnery strengths. All naval units may fire their torpedo strengths at short range (although less effectively than at torpedo range).
-
At torpedo range, only type CC, CS, CV, DD, GB, MW, and TB naval units may fire their gunnery strengths. All naval units may fire their torpedo strengths at torpedo range without penalty. A naval unit or CD that may fire its gunnery or torpedo strength in naval combat is not required to do so. In each round, the owning player decides if it will fire or not. If a naval unit or CD does not fire, its gunnery or torpedo strength (as appropriate) is ignored for the round.
- Combat between Naval Units. Combat between naval units is resolved in a series of rounds. A TF may fire its gunnery or torpedo strength no more than once per round. (Note that transports have no gunnery or torpedo strengths.) Follow these steps to resolve the combat.
a. Range Step. Determine the range at which the current round of naval combat takes place. If it is the first round of naval combat, the range is automatically:
-
Long: If all naval units in the combat are in all-sea hexes.
-
Medium: If one or more of the naval units in the combat is in a coastal hex (but none of them are on riverine hexsides).
-
Short: If any of the naval units in the combat are on riverine hexsides. Special: If the combat takes place at night or during rough or stormy sea conditions (see Rule 36C), the range for the first round closes one category. For example, a naval combat which would normally begin at long range, would start at medium range instead if the combat took place at night or during rough or stormy seas. At the start of the range step of each subsequent round of naval combat, both players state if they wish to maintain, open, or close range. If both players are in agreement on this issue, the range remains the same, or opens or closes one category per their agreement. For example, if the range in the preceding round was medium and both players agree to open range, the range for the new round will be long. If the players cannot agree, both roll a die (rerolling any ties), and the will of the high roller prevails. For example, if the range in the preceding round was medium, and the Central Powers player wants to close range, but the Entente player wants to open range, both must roll a die to decide the issue; as the Central Powers player rolls a 6 and the Entente player rolls a 4, the range for the new round will be short. When range is closed or opened, all naval units are at the new range; none are left behind. If naval units already at long range further open range, they automatically disengage per Rule 29C.
b. Screen Allocation Step. Both players simultaneously allocate the TFs in their screen into two groupings: those (the engaging group) that will attack the enemy screen and those (the bypassing group) that will attempt to bypass the enemy screen and attack the enemy main body. (TFs in the main body are ignored.) Special: If the range for the current round is long or medium, all TFs in a player's screen must be assigned to the engaging group; TFs may not attempt to bypass the enemy screen to attack the enemy main body unless the range for the current round is short or torpedo. Compare the number of TFs allocated to each engaging group. If a player has more TFs allocated to this task than his opponent, the player may (but is not required to) allocate the excess TFs against the enemy bypassing group. All other TFs of each engaging group fire on the enemy engaging group.
c. Engaging Group Firing Step. Each player attacks the enemy engaging group with the TFs he allocated to his engaging group. Each TF may fire its gunnery or torpedo strength (but not both) once during this step. The target of each fire is a TF in the enemy engaging group. Both players designate which of their TFs are firing and their targets before any gunfire or torpedo attack is resolved. The gunnery or torpedo strength of a TF may fire upon a single target in a combat round; the strength may not be split to fire at two or more targets. Exception: A TF with a torpedo strength of 5 or more may split its fire between a maximum of two targets. TFs may not combine their gunnery or torpedo strengths to make a single attack on a target, although each TF may fire at the target individually. For each gunfire attack, consult the Naval Gunnery Table. Cross-index the target's protection rating with the gunnery strength of the firing TF to determine the hit number of the fire (a dash indicates no hit is possible). Modify the hit number so obtained in accordance with the list of hit modifiers printed underneath the Naval Gunnery Table. (Note that a modified hit number of 7 or more indicates that no hit is possible.) The firing player rolls one die; if the number rolled is equal to or greater than the modified hit number, the target has taken one hit of damage; otherwise the fire has no effect. If a TF takes a hit from a gunfire attack, the owning player must check for additional damage (due to possible magazine explosion, etc.). Exception: German type BB and BC naval units are never checked for additional damage. Roll a die and consult the Additional Damage Table. If the modified die roll is 6 or greater, the TF takes a second hit of damage; any other result is no effect. Example: The German BB-3 taskforce (gunnery strength of 18, protection rating of 4) and the British BC-3 taskforce (gunnery strength of 9, protection rating of 3) exchange fire during daylight and calm seas in 1916. The Naval Gunnery Table is consulted. The German player cross-indexes his gunnery strength of 18 (which uses the 15+ line) with the BC-3's protection rating of 3, yielding a hit number of 3. This hit number is then modified by -1, to 2, to account for the superior German optics and fire control (per the modifier list at the bottom of the Naval Gunnery Table). The German player rolls a 4, and the BC-3 taskforce takes one hit of damage. The British player cross-indexes his gunnery strength of 9 with the BB-3's protection rating of 4, yielding a hit number of 5. The British player rolls a 4, for no effect. As the BC-3 taskforce has taken a hit, it is checked for further damage using the Additional Damage Table. The British player rolls a 4, modifies this by +2, to 6 (as the unit in question is a British type BC during 191216), which results in an additional hit of damage being applied to the BC-3 taskforce. For each torpedo attack, consult the Torpedo Attack Table. Cross-index the target's protection rating with the torpedo strength of the firing TF to determine the strike number of the attack. Modify the strike number so obtained in accordance with the list of strike modifiers printed underneath the Torpedo Attack Table. (Note that a modified strike number of 7 or more indicates that no strike is possible.) The firing player rolls one die; if the number rolled is equal to or greater than the modified strike number, the target has been struck once. To determine the damage to a target struck by torpedoes, roll one die and consult the Torpedo/Mine Damage Table. Example: The German DD-4 taskforce (torpedo strength of 8), makes a torpedo attack during daylight and calm seas at short range, against the British CA-5 taskforce (protection rating of 2). The Torpedo Attack Table is consulted. The German player cross-indexes his torpedo strength of 8 (which uses the 6-8 line) with the CA-5's protection rating of 2 (which uses the 1-2 line), yielding a strike number of 2. This strike number is modified by +1, to 2, as the attack is made at short range (per the modifier list at the bottom of the Torpedo Attack Table). The German player rolls a 3, which means the CA-5 has been struck by his torpedo attack. The Torpedo/Mine Damage Table is now consulted. The German player rolls a 4, which results in 2 hits of damage being applied to the British CA-5 taskforce. After both players have completed all their attacks in this step, implement the results.
d. Bypassing Firing Step. If a player allocated TFs against an enemy bypassing group in step b, those TFs now fire on the TFs in the bypassing group. TFs of the bypassing group cannot fire in this step. Resolve the fire and implement the results as in step c, except that each TF may fire its gunnery or torpedo strength twice during this step.
e. Main Body Firing Step. TFs allocated to a bypassing group that survived step d may fire on the naval units in the enemy main body. TFs in the main body may fire on the enemy bypassing group. Resolve the fire and implement the results as in step c, except that a TF may fire its gunnery or torpedo strength twice during this step if both of its fires are targeted against transports.
f. Final Step. If either player has no forces remaining in naval combat (such as having all the naval units of his naval group sunk), then naval combat ends. If both players have forces remaining, check for disengagement (per Rule 29C below). If disengagement does not occur, begin another round of naval combat, per step a. Designers' Note: The naval combat procedure was designed to give the 'feel' of tactical naval combat without getting bogged down in the details of individual ships. We feel this is particularly appropriate for WW I as most naval forces of the period maneuvered and fought in squadron groupings which are close in size to the TFs in the game. The exception to the normal combat rule which allows TFs with torpedo strengths of 5 or more to split their torpedo fire, reflects the fact TFs of this type represent (on average) two complete flotillas of destroyers, each of which would normally maneuver and attack separately. The hit number modifiers listed on the Naval Gunnery Table cover the following conditions: #1) the small-caliber guns mounted on light naval forces (CC, CS, CV, etc.) have a hard time penetrating the armor on heavy naval units (PR of 1+), #2) heavy naval forces (BB, BC, PD) have a hard time hitting the faster moving light forces (PR of F-A), #3) bad weather and night make it harder to see your target and may negatively affect the stability of your firing platform, #4) two or more naval units firing on the same target makes it harder to adjust your fall of shot as your shell splashes often become confused with those of the other firing naval unit, #5) German optics and fire control were generally superior to those of other nations throughout the WW I period, and #6) CDs historically almost always got the best of any exchange of fire with naval units (as most CDs were tied into a surveyed grid and had preregistered targets within their area of coastline, they could effectively target a naval unit much faster than the naval unit could target them). The Additional Damage Table covers the historical propensity of many ships of this period to take further damage from secondary magazine or boiler explosions or to break up due to poor armor layout/compartmentalization. The vulnerability of the British BCs, as dramatically pointed out at Jutland, is well known. Not so well known is that the British admiralty investigation into this issue revealed that their BBs were almost as vulnerable to magazine explosions as their BCs (until the fleet-wide correction measures carried out in the winter of 191617). The exemption of German BBs and BCs from additional damage reflects their superior damage control measures.
- Combat between Naval Units and CDs. Combat between naval units and coast defenses (CDs) is resolved in a single round (unlike combat between naval units which can last for several rounds). Follow the steps listed below to resolve the combat between the naval player (the player with the naval units) and the CD player (the player with the coast defenses). The range at which this round of naval combat takes place is as follows:
-
Long: If the naval units are 2 hexes away from the hex containing the CDs.
-
Medium: If the naval units are in a hex adjacent (per Rule 27B5) to the hex containing the CDs.
-
Short: If the naval units are in the same hex as the CDs, or are on a riverine hexside adjacent to the CDs hex.
a. CD Gunnery Allocation Step. The CD player allocates his CD units into two groups: the general group and the reserve group.
b. Screen versus CD Firing Step. The CD player fires on the enemy screen with the gunnery strength of the CD units of his general group; its targets are any TFs in the enemy screen. The gunnery strength of the reserve group does not fire in this step. The naval player fires on the enemy CDs with the gunnery strengths of the TFs in his screen; its targets are any CDs in the hex. (Note that the naval player is not required to fire on the CD units of the general group, but may instead fire on non-firing CD units of the reserve group, but with an adverse modifier as given on the Naval Gunnery Table.) Resolve the fire and implement the results as in Rule 29B1c, except that:
-
CDs may split their fire between two or more targets so long as each target is attacked by at least 1 point of gunnery strength. (Note that CDs have no torpedo strengths and that TFs may not fire their torpedo strengths at CDs.) For example, a CD unit with a gunnery strength of 5 could make one attack with a gunnery strength of 5, or five attacks with a gunnery strength of 1, or any combination of 1, 2, 3, and 4 gunnery strength attacks so long as the total gunnery strength fired does not exceed 5.
-
A CD takes one hit of damage for every two firing hits it receives.
c. CDs versus Main Body Step. The CD player fires on the enemy main body with the surviving gunnery strengths of his general and reserve groups; their targets are any naval units in the enemy main body. The naval player cannot fire in this step. Resolve the fire and implement its results as in step b, except that a CD unit may fire its gunnery strength up to three times during this step if all of its fires are targeted against transports at short range (only). At the end of this step, combat between the naval units and the CDs is over, and the naval units can resume movement or whatever else they were doing. Designers' Note: Although each combat between naval units and CDs is resolved in a single round, the typical turn will see a series of single-round combats being fought. Example: The Entente player decides to amphibious assault the German fortress island of Heligoland (GW1:2304) and moves his invasion armada towards that island. When he enters hex GW1:2105, naval combat is initiated for the first time (as the German CD unit on the island with a range of 3 has a combat zone into that hex). This first combat will be fought as a single round at long range (as the naval units are 2 hexes away from the hex containing the CDs). Upon conclusion of that round, the British player continues moving to the island, entering hex GW1:2204, and initiating a second one round naval combat (fought at medium range as the naval units are in a hex adjacent to the hex containing the CDs). Upon conclusion of that round, the British player moves into the Heligoland island hex, initiating a third one round naval combat (fought at short range as the naval units and CDs are in the same hex). Upon conclusion of that round, the invasion force may begin spending MPs to disembark the amphibious landing force in the hex.
C. Disengagement.
At the end of a round of naval combat between naval units, both players simultaneously announce if they will attempt to disengage their naval groups (NGs):
-
If both attempt to disengage, disengagement is automatic. Both player’s NGs are disengaging.
-
If only one player attempts to disengage, each player rolls a die, modifying his roll as shown by the modifiers listed on the Disengagement Summary. (Note that only the die roll of the player attempting to disengage is modified.) If the modified die roll of the player attempting to disengage is higher than the die roll of the other player, his attempt succeeds. His NG is disengaging. If the player’s disengagement attempt fails, another round of naval combat occurs.
-
If neither player attempts to disengage, check for involuntary disengagement. Both players roll a die; if a player rolls a 6, that player's NG is disengaging. If neither player is forced to disengage, another round of naval combat occurs. A disengaging NG immediately moves, per the rules of naval movement. If an NG disengages during an enemy naval movement step, it makes a naval reaction movement, with a movement allowance of 15 MPs, per the naval reaction movement rules. If an NG disengages in a friendly naval movement step, it resumes (or begins) its naval movement in the current naval movement step. If both sides disengage at the same time, the NG moving by naval reaction movement moves first. Note that a disengaging NG could subsequently initiate combat during its move. The only special restrictions on a disengaging NG are:
-
It must, if it has sufficient MPs remaining, immediately either move from the hex it occupies or enter port if there is a friendly-owned port in its hex.
-
If it initiated combat by putting to sea from a blockaded port, it must return to that port and end its movement there for the current movement step. Designers' Note: The various modifiers on the Disengagement Summary cover the following: 1) reduced visibility (bad weather, night), 2) the effects of speed (fast BCs and DDs get away easier, while slow types such as GB, LC, etc. have a much harder time), and 3) the German battle fleet (TFs only) was skilled at performing a special simultaneous turning movement that allowed them to break off action much easier than other nations' navies. Involuntary disengagement was relatively common. Even in cases where both sides wished to continue naval combat, the vagaries of weather (sudden storm squalls, etc.), the onset of night, or a subordinate's lack of desire to press the attack (among other things) could all end a particular action prematurely. It is deliberate that there is no provision for partial disengagement. All or nothing disengagement seems to encourage players to spread out their naval forces in a number of naval groups instead of concentrating everything in one huge ahistorical stack.
Rule 30 — Ports and Beaches
A. Ports.
All cities (per Rule 3E2) or fortresses with port symbols (see the Master Terrain Key) are seaports. All non-seaport cities and fortresses in hexes adjoining riverine hexsides are river ports. Unless specifically identified otherwise, all references to ports in these rules apply to both seaports and river ports. Only type GB, MT, MW, TB, LC, and/or RT naval units may use river ports. River ports are not considered ports for other naval unit types. All naval units can use seaports. A player may use a port in a turn only if he owns it at the start of his initial phase.
-
Capacity. There are five types of ports: marginal, minor, standard, major, and great. Each type of port has an RE capacity, which is the number of REs of cargo that may embark/disembark at the port in a player turn. (Note that all river ports are minor ports.) The capacities of ports are listed on the Port Summary.
-
Damage. Ports may be damaged due to bombing (Rule 20G1b and 20G2f) or demolition (Rule 13A2). Each hit of damage on a port reduces its capacity by 1 RE; and reduces the number of REs which may trace a naval sub-element of a supply line through the port by 3 REs. Each type of port may take a maximum number of hits of damage, as listed on the Port Summary.
-
Strong Natural Harbor. Any port marked with a strong natural harbor symbol has its docks carved from solid rock. Each hit of damage on a port with a strong natural harbor symbol reduces its capacity by 1/2 RE, not 1; and reduces the number of REs which may trace a naval sub-element of a supply line through the port by 1.5 REs, not 3.
-
Artificial Harbor. Any port marked with an artificial harbor symbol is enclosed by an artificial breakwater or is dependent on a system of locks. Each hit of damage on a port with an artificial harbor reduces its capacity by 2 REs, not 1; and reduces the number of REs which may trace a naval sub-element of a supply line through the port by 6 REs, not 3.
-
Off-Map Ports. Each player has off-map ports, as shown in the holding boxes on his various Game Charts. Each off-map port is listed by name, type of port, and the distance in hexes from the off-map port to one or more map entry hexes. For example, the major port of Kirkwall (i.e. Scapa Flow) in the Orkney Islands Holding Box on the British Isles Game Chart is 17 hexes by sea from hexes GW1:0120, 0119, 0118, 0117, 0116, 0115, 0114, 0113, 0112, 0111, 0110, 0109, 0108, 0107, and 0106. A player may move his naval groups (NGs) (and any cargo) between the map and his holding boxes, by using the off-map ports. To do so, an NG may exit or enter the map at the indicated map entry hexes. An NG may not move to an enemy off-map port. It may take more than one movement step for an NG to move between the map and an off-map port. Use status markers or make a note to keep track of the progress of the moving NG.
-
Inland Ports. Several seaports are located inland, on rivers, canals, or lakes. In order to use an inland seaport, a naval unit must be able to move along a path of riverine hexsides to the seaport per Rule 28.
B. Beaches.
A coastal hex of any terrain type except mountain or prohibited terrain is a beach. A hex of any terrain type except mountain or prohibited terrain with an adjacent riverine hexside is also a beach. A beach has an unlimited capacity of REs of cargo that may embark/disembark there in a player turn. Some hexes contain a port and a beach, both of which may be used. Various naval transport and amphibious landing rules make a distinction based upon which player owns a beach hex. When units gain ownership of an enemy beach hex, the beach is not friendly owned for the purposes of naval transport or amphibious landings during the phase of its capture. It is friendly owned starting with the phase following the phase in which it was captured. For example, if units capture an enemy beach during the movement phase, it is friendly owned for the purposes of naval transport or amphibious landings starting with the combat phase.
Rule 31 — Naval Transport
The phasing player may use naval transport during the naval movement steps of his movement and exploitation phases, moving cargo (ground units, logistics items, and manpower/equipment points; per Rule 27B3) between friendlyowned ports or beaches. Due to the slow speed of most transport naval units while carrying cargo and the extensive time required to embark/disembark cargo, naval transport cannot be used during the naval movement steps of any reaction movement phase (i.e., naval units cannot move if carrying cargo (except by naval reaction movement), cannot embark cargo, and cannot disembark cargo during the reaction movement phase). Transports carry cargo using their cargo capacities (Rule 27A3). Two or more transports may combine their capacities to carry large cargoes (such as divisions), as long as they all move in the same naval group (NG) while transporting the cargo. A transport may move both prior to and after transporting cargo if it has the MPs to do so. When a transport takes hits of damage, its cargo can be affected:
-
If the transport is sunk, any cargo it is carrying is eliminated.
-
If the transport has its cargo capacity reduced, cargo in excess of its remaining cargo capacity is eliminated.
-
If two or more transports combine to carry cargo and any are sunk or damaged, cargo in excess of the remaining cargo capacity is eliminated. When cargo is eliminated and there is a choice of what can be eliminated, randomly choose one item of cargo and eliminate it. If the remaining cargo still exceeds the remaining cargo capacity, repeat this procedure. Continue repeating this procedure until the cargo no longer exceeds the remaining cargo capacity. Example: An NT with a cargo capacity of 6 is carrying an infantry division (3 REs of cargo), a artillery regiment (2 REs of cargo), and a cavalry regiment (1 RE of cargo). The division is full strength and has a cadre side. The NT takes four hits of damage, reducing its cargo capacity to 2. Randomly choosing one of the items of cargo, the division is selected and eliminated. Since the division has a cadre, it is reduced to a cadre upon elimination (Rule 9E). This leaves 4 REs of cargo (an infantry cadre, a artillery regiment, and a cavalry regiment), exceeding the remaining cargo capacity of 2. Randomly choosing one item of cargo, the infantry cadre is selected and eliminated. This leaves 3 REs of cargo, still over the remaining capacity. Randomly choosing one item of cargo, the artillery regiment is selected and eliminated. This leaves 1 RE of cargo, which no longer exceeds the remaining capacity. A unit is under no special restriction in the player turn it undergoes naval transport. For example, a unit transported to a port during a naval movement step may move (if it has MPs remaining) in the ground movement sub-phase, attack in the combat phase, and move (if so capable) in the exploitation phase.
A. Transport Costs.
Transports move as part of naval groups (NGs), per the naval movement rules. An NG must spend MPs to embark or disembark cargo as listed on the Naval MP Cost Summary. For example, an NG must spend 30 MPs to embark or disembark cargo at a port. The listed MP costs must be paid both when the cargo is embarked and when the cargo is disembarked. It may take more than one movement step for an NG to embark/ disembark cargo. Use status markers or make a note to keep track of the embarking/disembarking. The transport and its prospective cargo must be present in the hex together at all times while embarkation is underway. When the transport has spent all necessary MPs to embark the cargo, the cargo is embarked and henceforth affected by what happens to the transport. Similarly, cargo embarked on a transport which is spending MPs to disembark it, is subject to adverse effects on the transport until the transport has spent all necessary MPs to disembark it. A ground unit must spend MPs to be transported. These MPs are spent from the transported unit's movement allowance in the movement or exploitation phase the unit disembarks. The unit spends MPs based on the number of naval movement steps it spent at sea during the phase in which it disembarks, as detailed in the Naval Transport Costs Summary. (Note that a unit which is at sea in more than one phase only spends MPs for the steps it was at sea in the phase it disembarks.) For example, a unit with a movement rating of 5 that spent three complete naval movement steps and part of a fourth step at sea during a movement phase before disembarking, would pay 4 MPs upon completion of disembarkation. However, a unit may always disembark by spending all of its MPs remaining in the current phase. During the exploitation phase, a unit with 0 MPs may disembark; it may not, however, embark during this phase. A rail-only unit (see Rule 14B1) can embark only at a port in a rail hex; it may disembark only at a port in a rail hex of the same gauge (see Rule 7A3) as that it embarked from. (Make a note of the gauge when the rail-only unit embarks.) A unit may (if possible) move after disembarking. Logistics items (Rule 11H) may be carried by a unit or moved by rail after disembarking.
B. Beaches.
Transports of any type may embark cargo at a beach. However, only type LC transports may embark cargo with heavy equipment from a beach. Transports may disembark cargo at a beach as follows:
-
Type NT transports may disembark cargo at a beach only if the cargo is intrinsically amphibious per Rule 27B7.
-
Type RT transports may disembark any cargo without heavy equipment at a beach.
-
Type LC transports may disembark any cargo at a beach. A transport may not embark or disembark cargo at a beach during stormy or typhoon sea conditions. (Sea conditions are covered in Rule 36C.)
C. Transfer of Cargo.
Cargo may be transferred from one transport to another. The two transports must be in the same hex with both at sea or both in port, must have spent the same number of MPs in the phase, and must spend an additional 30 MPs (as listed on the Naval MP Cost Summary) to perform the transfer. If the two transports have spent differing amounts of MPs, one must idly consume MPs in the hex until they have spent the same amount. If the transports are at sea, one of them must by type LC or RT for the transfer to take place. Once transferred, the cargo is embarked aboard the receiving transport. Both transports may subsequently continue naval movement spending any remaining MPs normally. Example: A type NT transport transfers cargo to a type LC transport while both are at sea in the same hex. The NT has already spent 45 MPs in the phase, while the LC has spent 21 MPs. The LC must spend an additional 24 MPs waiting for the NT before the cargo transfer can be started (increasing its total of MPs spent to 45, matching that of the NT). Both the NT and LC spend an additional 30 MPs to transfer the cargo. The NT and the LC (with its newly transferred cargo) may resume their movement following the transfer, each having spent 75 MPs. Transports may not transfer cargo during stormy or typhoon sea conditions (see Rule 36C).
Rule 32 — Amphibious Landings
The phasing player may make amphibious landings at enemyowned beaches. In general, the rules of naval transport (Rule 31) are used, with the following restrictions governing amphibious landings:
-
Amphibious landings may occur only in the naval movement steps of the movement phase; landings cannot occur during the naval movement steps of the reaction movement or exploitation phases.
-
Amphibious landings may not be made during stormy or typhoon sea conditions (see Rule 36C).
-
Only amphibious units (per Rule 27B7) may make an amphibious landing.
A. Transport Costs.
A naval group must spend 90 MPs to disembark cargo making an amphibious landing (as listed on the Naval MP Cost Summary). A ground unit making an amphibious landing must spend all its remaining MPs to make an amphibious landing.
B. Ground Operations.
A unit making an amphibious landing is affected in several ways. During the remainder of the player turn in which a unit makes an amphibious landing:
-
A unit loses its ZOC if it would normally have a ZOC.
-
A unit has its attack strength quartered. Exceptions: 1) A half-capable marine unit (i.e. a naval troops unit) has its attack strength halved, and 2) A fully-capable marine unit's attack strength is unaffected. (Marine units are covered in Rule 14I.)
-
In addition to the above effects, a unit landing during rough sea conditions has its attack strength halved.
-
A non-mountain unit making an amphibious landing from a sea hex into a hex containing coastal cliffs has its attack strength halved in addition to all other modifications.
-
A non-mountain unit making an amphibious landing from a riverine hexside into a hex with an escarpment adjacent to the riverine hexside has its attack strength halved in addition to all other modifications.
-
A unit has its movement allowance halved. In the player turn following the turn in which a unit in general supply makes an amphibious landing, the unit is automatically in general supply.
-
Amphibious Overrun. Units landing in an enemyoccupied hex may overrun enemy units there, if the landing units achieve overrun conditions (per Rule 6F, ignoring all MP costs). The overrun occurs after all units have landed. Only units making amphibious landings may participate in the amphibious overrun of the hex; other friendly units may not join in this overrun.
-
Combat. Units landing in an enemy-occupied hex must attack the enemy units there during the combat phase, if both sides still occupy the hex at this time. Friendly units in other hexes may also join in the attack, per the standard combat rules. For purposes of combat supply, the units making an amphibious landing may trace a special supply line from their beach to one or more transports at sea in their hex (or at sea on a riverine hexside adjacent to their hex). Resource points embarked on these transports may be spent to provide combat supply (per Rule 11D). When differing sides occupy the same hex, combat is resolved as normal with two exceptions:
-
On an AQ, AS, or AX result, the units that landed in the enemy-occupied hex must also retreat. All other units treat the result normally.
-
If required to retreat, the units which landed in the enemy-occupied hex are eliminated. All other units retreat as normal. If both sides have units remaining in a hex after combat resolution (as may occur, for example, if combat takes place on the positional CRT and neither side is required to retreat), the units which landed in the hex are under siege (per Rule 15D) upon conclusion of the combat. Designers' Note: The provision for landing forces to become besieged is what historically happened to the British forces which landed at Gallipoli.
C. Planning and Preparation.
Amphibious landings must be planned in advance: the target hex of the landing and the units to be landed there must be planned at least one turn in advance. During the player’s initial phase at least one game turn prior to an amphibious landing, the player writes down the identity of the units involved in the landing and the target hex of the landing. A unit may have only one landing planned for it at a time. Once planned, a landing may be canceled at the player’s option in a subsequent friendly initial phase, and a new landing for the unit may be planned at that time. A player may also cancel a landing during the phase in which it is to occur. During an initial phase, a landing may not be planned for a unit that is in an enemy ZOC at that time. Once a landing is planned for a unit, it must be canceled if the unit is in an enemy ZOC, attacks, or is attacked at any time between the planning and the execution of the landing. If for any reason the unit is not able to participate in the landing during the phase in which it is to take place, the landing must be canceled. An amphibious landing may be planned in advance to occur for a unit on the turn it arrives as a reinforcement. A player may plan an amphibious landing for each of his intrinsically amphibious units. For all other units, a player has a maximum RE planning limit equal to the RE/cargo capacity of all his type LC and RT transport naval units currently in play (not sunk or in the replacement pool). For example, if a player has LC/RT transport naval units with a combined cargo capacity of 16 REs in play, he could plan amphibious landings for a maximum of 16 REs of his units (in addition to plans for his intrinsically amphibious units) in that initial phase.
D. Enemy Response.
If a player makes any amphibious landings during his naval movement steps, the enemy player responds to the landing at the end of the naval movement sub-phase (after all naval movement steps are done), but before any amphibious overruns are conducted. For each hex in which an amphibious landing was made, the responding player rolls one die and consults the Ground Success Table. Results are:
-
Failure: No response occurs.
-
Success: One ground unit of the player may respond. The unit must be within 3 hexes of the landing hex; it cannot be in an enemy ZOC. The player immediately moves the responding unit. A responding unit moves as follows:
-
It may spend up to 1 MP (if non-cavalry, light, mountain, infantry, or c/m), 2 MPs (if cavalry, light, mountain, or infantry) or 3 MPs (if c/m) to move.
-
A unit may always move a single hex (except into or across prohibited terrain), by spending all of its responding MPs.
-
It may enter a hex occupied by both friendly and enemy units. If it does so, it must stop its movement in that hex.
-
If in a hex containing enemy units (such as due to an enemy amphibious landing), it may leave the hex. Alternately, it may overrun (if possible) the enemy units in the hex. Follow the rules of overrun (Rule 6F), including spending MPs for the overrun.
-
It may not end its movement in violation of the stacking limits (Rule 8A).
-
It may not break down or assemble (Rule 15E).
Rule 33 — Naval/Land Interaction
A. Naval Gunfire Support (NGS).
Taskforces (TFs) may support friendly ground units in combat through naval gunfire support (NGS). To provide NGS, the TF must first prepare for the fire by spending at least 90 MPs in a hex during a friendly movement or exploitation phase (as listed on the Naval MP Cost Summary). Once prepared, it remains prepared as long as it remains in the same hex and does not fire during any naval combat. Note: When a TF is prepared for fire, place a NGS marker on the TF to denote this. During a subsequent combat or reaction combat phase a prepared TF may provide NGS as follows:
-
To provide NGS for friendly attacking units, the hex being attacked must be in or adjacent (per Rule 27B5) to the TF’s hex or adjoining its hexside.
-
To provide NGS for friendly defending units, the units must be in or adjacent (per Rule 27B5) the TF’s hex or adjoining its hexside. A TF has an NGS strength equal to its current gunnery strength. The NGS strength of TFs is halved in rough sea conditions, quartered in stormy sea conditions, and reduced to zero in typhoon sea conditions. (Round fractions down.) When firing, the owning player may divide a NGS strength among any eligible hexes within range. Example: During a friendly combat phase, a prepared TF with an NGS strength of 10 is within range of 3 hexes being attacked. The owning player decides to have the TF provide 7 points of NGS to one hex, 3 to the second hex, and none to the third. Each NGS strength point has a ground combat strength of 1 and is treated as a 1/4 RE artillery unit for the purposes of Rule 12 (Artillery). Treat a TF as a field artillery, heavy artillery, or siege artillery unit as follows:
-
Field Art: all type TB, MW, GB, and DD.
-
Heavy Art: all type CS, CV, CL, CA, CD, and MT.
-
Siege Art: all type PD, BB, and BC. TFs may fire NGS only in support of attacking or defending ground units. Ignore NGS strength when calculating losses due to ground combat. A TF providing NGS is not affected by ground combat results. In each combat or reaction combat phase, after DAS and GS air operations are flown but before any ground combat is resolved, the defending player must allocate his NGS to the hex. NGS allocated to a specific hex may not be switched to another hex that phase, even if its assigned hex is not attacked. There is no similar requirement for the attacking player to allocate NGS; the attacking player decides on and announces the amount of NGS in an attack only when he resolves the attack.
B. Coast Defenses (CDs).
Various units have naval gunnery strengths as shown on the Coast Defenses Summary; these units are coast defenses (CDs). CDs engage in naval combat with enemy naval units in the CD's combat zone (per Rules 28C and 29B2). CDs may be disrupted (Rule 3A5) by artillery, aerial, or naval bombardment (Rules 12C, 20G2j, and 33C) or by coastal raids (Rule 14I1). Note that a disrupted CD has its naval gunnery strength halved. CDs may be damaged due to bombing (Rule 20G2i) or naval combat (Rule 29B2). For every hit of damage on a CD, its naval gunnery strength is reduced by 1/2 point. Hits of damage to CDs are temporary, lasting only for the player turn in which they were incurred. All CD hits are removed at the start of each player turn. When calculating a CD's current naval gunnery strength, round fractional strengths of 1/2 or greater up, and round fractional strengths of less than 1/2 down. Note: When a CD is both disrupted and damaged, calculate the effects due to disruption before calculating the effects of the damage. Example: A 5-7-5 heavy artillery regiment has a naval gunnery strength equal to half its attack strength, or 2.5, which rounds to
- If the regiment were disrupted, its naval gunnery strength would be halved to 1.25, which rounds down to 1. When the CD takes its first hit of damage, its naval gunnery strength is not further affected (as 1.25 - 0.5 = 0.75, which rounds back to 1). A second hit of damage in the same player turn would reduce the CD's gunnery strength to zero (as 0.75 - 0.5 = 0.25, which rounds down to 0).
C. Naval Bombardment.
Task forces (TFs) may bombard enemy facilities (e.g. major cities, factories, airbases, rail lines, and ports in enemy-owned hexes) and enemy units. The hex containing the enemy facilities or units being bombarded must be in or adjacent (per Rule 27B5) to the bombarding TF's hex or adjoining its hexside. A TF has a bombardment strength equal to half its current gunnery strength. Exception: A GB or MT taskforce has a bombardment strength equal to its current gunnery strength. The bombardment strength of TFs is halved in rough sea conditions, quartered in stormy sea conditions, and reduced to zero in typhoon sea conditions. (Round fractions down.)
- Naval Bombardment of Enemy Facilities. TFs may bombard enemy-owned facilities during friendly naval movement steps. A TF must spend 45 MPs to bombard an enemy facility (as listed on the Naval MP Cost Summary); these MPs must be spent in the hex (or hexside) from which the TF will make the bombardment. Bombarding TFs may bombard individually, or some (up to all) may combine their bombardment strengths to make a single bombardment. The owning player may divide a TF's bombardment strength among any eligible targets. Use the Bombardment Table to resolve naval bombardments. For each naval bombardment, use the bombardment strength column that most closely matches (without exceeding) the bombardment strength of the bombarding TFs. Roll one die and modify the number rolled with the appropriate modifiers on the Bombardment Table. Cross-index the bombardment strength column with the modified die roll to obtain a result. Possible results are: M (miss, no effect), H (one hit), 2H (two hits), 3H (three hits), and 4H (four hits). Bombardment hits have the following effects:
a. Major Cities. Each hit reduces by 1 point the morale of the country in which the bombed city is located. (Morale is covered in Rule 40.)
b. Factories. Each hit damages the factory (use hit markers to show this). (Factories and the effects of damage on them are covered in Rule 37B).
c. Airbases. Each hit aborts one air unit (bombing player’s choice) on the ground in the airbase's hex. Place aborted air units in the aborted air units box on the appropriate game chart.
d. Rail Lines. A hit breaks the line in the target hex (use a rail hit marker to show this). Once a rail line in a hex is broken, any further rail line hits in the hex are ignored.
e. Ports. Each hit damages the port (use port hit markers to show this). (Ports and the effects of damage on them are covered in Rule 30A.)
- Naval Bombardment of Enemy Units. During a combat phase, TFs eligible to provide NGS (per Rule 33A above), may bombard enemy units. Note: A TF may not both bombard and provide NGS in the same combat phase. TFs bombard enemy units per rule 12C, with each bombardment strength point treated the same as an artillery unit except that they do not require combat supply.
Rule 34 — Special Naval Rules
A. Naval Movement.
- Protected Waters. Light naval groups (NGs) (e.g. those NGs containing only transports and/or type DD, GB, MT, MW, and TB taskforces), may use protected, inshore waters to screen their movement from enemy NGs and CDs. Each friendlyowned coastal hex is a protected waters hex. A light NG that enters a protected waters hex:
-
Does not trigger reaction movement by enemy NGs.
-
Does not initiate naval combat with enemy NGs or CDs unless it enters the enemy NG's (or CD's) hex.
- Movement at Night. During each friendly naval movement step, friendly naval groups (NGs) may make part of their movement at night. In a friendly step, a friendly NG may spend any 10 continuous MPs as night movement. Exception: During a naval movement sub-phase, once an NG uses night movement, it may not do so again (in a subsequent step) until it has spent at least 20 MPs. Night movement affects naval units as follows:
-
Air units cannot fly naval patrol missions at night.
-
Amphibious landings and naval bombardments cannot be made at night.
-
A combat or mixed NG or CD has a combat zone only in the hex (or hexside) it occupies while at night.
-
A CD has its gunnery strength halved at night.
-
A TF has its gunnery strength quartered at night. Night also affects naval units in various ways, per the die roll modifiers to the various naval combat charts and tables.
- Movement along Major Canals. The Kaiser Wilhelm Canal in Germany (connecting the Baltic and North Seas), the Suez Canal in Egypt (connecting the Mediterranean and Red Seas), and the Panama Canal in Central America (connecting the Caribbean Sea and the Pacific Ocean) are major canals. A player may move any of his naval units along the hexsides constituting a major canal (this is an exception to the Rule 28 prohibition on certain naval unit types from entering riverine hexsides), so long as the following conditions apply:
-
All ports in hexes (or holding boxes) adjoining the canal are friendly-owned and functioning. (A port is functioning unless it has maximum damage per the Port Summary.)
-
The hexes (or holding boxes) on both sides of the section of the canal to be traversed are friendly-owned.
- Movement of River Transports across Open Seas. Due to their generally low freeboard and small size, river transports risk damage if they enter the open sea. Check a type RT naval unit for damage:
-
The first time it enters an all-sea hex during any naval movement step.
-
If it starts a friendly naval movement step at sea in an all-sea hex. To check for damage, roll a die and consult the Naval Success Table:
-
Failure means the open sea conditions are too much for the RT. If the RT started the naval movement step at sea in an all-sea hex, or the current sea condition is rough, stormy, or typhoon (per Rule 36C), the RT is sunk; otherwise the RT is turned back (must move in a direct line to the closest coastal hex, and, once there, end its movement for the naval movement step).
-
Success means the RT crosses the open sea without problem.
- Naval Patrol. At the end of the first naval movement step of each friendly naval movement sub-phase, a player may assign to naval patrol any of his at sea naval groups (NGs) which consist solely of type BC, CA, CL, or C taskforces. (Place a naval patrol marker on the NG to show this assignment.) An NG may not spend MPs for any purpose during the remainder of the phase in which it is assigned to naval patrol, but in the naval movement steps of the next enemy movement, exploitation or reaction movement phase (as appropriate) it gains the following capabilities:
-
The die roll for any naval reaction movement attempts it makes is modified by +2.
-
Each time it makes a naval reaction movement attempt and succeeds, any one other friendly NG within 60 hexes that is assigned to dedicated reaction (see Rule 28A1) may attempt to use naval reaction movement as well. Remove all naval patrol markers from friendly NGs at the start of each friendly naval movement sub-phase. Designers' Note: The British normally kept a cruiser squadron in the North Sea off the German coast on naval patrol. Most of the time this succeeded in providing advance warning of any movements of the German High Seas Fleet, allowing the British Grand Fleet at Scapa Flow (normally assigned to dedicated reaction) to put to sea long before the Germans entered regular reaction range.
B. Naval Bases.
All major and great ports are minor naval bases. (Note that this includes minor and standard ports upgraded to major status through the use of port construction engineers per Rule 13C2.) Also, some countries have additional major and minor naval bases as listed in the appropriate section of Rule 41 (Nations). Naval units can be refitted (Rule 35A) and repaired (Rule 35D), and TFs can replenish (Rule 34C4), only at naval bases. Major naval bases also produce naval repair points (Rule 35D). In general, naval bases are usable by naval units of any nationality on a player's side except that type BB, BC, PD, CA, CD, and MT taskforce naval units may only be refitted or repaired at their own nation's naval bases. For example, a French PD naval unit could refit at a French naval base, but not at a British naval base. When a naval base is captured from the enemy, roll a die and consult the Naval Success Table to see if it is captured intact (result of "S") or damaged (any other result). A damaged naval base may not be used until it is repaired. A naval base is repaired in the same manner as a demolished bridge (Rule 13A3) except that a resource point is always required. Various rules depend on if a naval base is functioning or not. A naval base is functioning unless it is damaged (per above) or the port in its hex has maximum damage.
C. Naval Supply.
-
Ammo Depletion. A TF which provides naval gunfire support (NGS) (Rule 33A), or bombards enemy units (Rule 33C2) during a combat phase, is ammo-depleted at the end of that phase. (Place an "ammo depl" marker on the TF to note this.) An ammo-depleted TF has its NGS and bombardment strength halved when providing NGS or bombarding enemy units in subsequent combat phases until it replenishes. Note: Ammo depletion only occurs due to NGS or bombardment of enemy units and only affects NGS and bombardment strength versus enemy units. Neither naval combat nor bombardment of enemy facilities depletes ammunition, and the gunnery strength of an ammo-depleted TF is unaffected for naval combat. Designers' Note: Major fleet battles rarely used even 10% of a ship's ammo, while a shore bombardment could easily burn through 30-50% (and a ship normally went off station when its ammo reserve dipped below 30%).
-
Torpedo Depletion. A TF which fires its torpedo strength during a round of naval combat, is out of torpedoes at the end of that combat round. (Place an "out of torps" marker on the TF to note this.) A TF which is out of torpedoes may not fire its torpedo strength in subsequent rounds of naval combat until it replenishes. Designers' Note: Almost no surface ships carried reloads for their torpedo tubes in WW I.
-
Fuel Depletion. A naval unit which spends MPs during its player turn for any purpose other than naval reaction movement is low on fuel at the end of that player turn unless it replenished at some point during the player turn. (Place a "low fuel" marker on the naval unit to show this.) A naval unit with low fuel at the beginning of a naval movement step has its movement allowance halved during the step. If a naval unit with low fuel is unable to replenish in its next player turn, it must be scuttled (Rule 34D below) at the end of that player turn.
-
Replenishment. A naval unit may replenish its ammunition, torpedoes, and fuel during naval movement as follows:
-
All Naval Units: By spending 30 MPs at any friendly- owned functioning naval base (major or minor) in general supply. An unlimited number of naval units may replenish at each such naval base during a player turn.
-
Transports Only: By spending 30 MPs at any friendlyowned minor, standard, major, or great port in general supply. The number of transport naval units that may replenish at a port during a player turn is equal to the port's current capacity. Remove all "ammo depl", "out of torps", and "low fuel" markers from a naval unit when it replenishes.
D. Scuttling.
When an enemy unit gains ownership of a port containing naval units in port, the naval units there must try to escape to sea. The owning player consults the Scuttle Table, rolling one die for each naval unit attempting to escape. A naval unit will either escape to sea, be scuttled, or be captured.
-
If the naval unit escapes to sea, it is at sea in the port's hex (if the port is a coastal seaport) or it is at sea in an adjoining riverine hexside to which it may move (if the port is an inland seaport or river port). If the port is blockaded, or there is no riverine hexside to which it may move, the naval unit is scuttled instead.
-
If the naval unit is scuttled it sinks.
-
If the naval unit is captured, it immediately becomes a naval unit of the capturing player. (Mark the naval unit with any convenient marker to note this.) A captured naval unit is not immediately usable, however. The capturing player rolls two dice and the result (doubling this if the naval unit is a TF) is the number of turns the naval unit will be out of service (not counting the turn of capture). For example, a naval unit captured during the May II 16 turn and out of service for 8 turns, would return to service during the initial phase of the Oct I 16 turn. While a naval unit is out of service, its player may not use it for any purpose (the enemy player may bomb it), and if it must try to escape to sea it is automatically scuttled. When a naval unit is on a riverine hexside and an enemy unit gains ownership of both hexes adjoining the hexside, the naval unit must immediately displace to any adjacent (per Rule 27B5) riverine hexside or coastal hex to which it may move. If none are available, the naval unit is scuttled instead.
E. Mine Warfare.
The orders of battle list minebelts that exist at the start of play. During play, both players can lay and sweep mines in all-sea and coastal hexes. Mines may damage naval units. A player receives mine points per the order of battle and by converting resource points. One resource point converts into 5 mine points. (Mine points cannot be converted back to resource points.) Both sides are limited in the number of resource points they may convert to mine points depending on whether or not the West (British Isles/North Sea) command is in play:
-
If the command is in play, both sides may convert a maximum of 1 resource point to mine points each month.
-
If the command is not in play, both sides may convert a maximum of 1 resource point to mine points each production cycle.
- Damage from Mines. Check a naval group (NG) for mine damage:
-
The first time it enters or puts to sea in an enemy minebelt hex during any naval movement step.
-
If it starts a friendly naval movement step at sea in an enemy minebelt hex. Use the following procedure to check an NG for mine damage:
-
Consult the Mine/Light Forces Attack Summary, noting all applicable modifiers, to determine the mine attack strike number. Note: Due to the dismal performance of Entente mines for most of the war, treat each 2 Entente mine points (or fraction thereof) in a hex as a single mine point for purposes of determining the mine attack strike number (only) prior to the Jun I 18 turn.
-
Roll a die for each naval unit in the NG. If the number is equal to or greater than the mine attack strike number determined in step 1, the naval unit has struck the minefield.
-
For each naval unit which strikes a minefield, roll a die and consult the Torpedo/Mine Strike Damage Table to determine the number of hits of damage the mine strike inflicts. Example: In 1916 during daylight and calm seas, an Entente NG consisting of one 4pt TF and one C3 transport enters a Central Powers minebelt hex containing 2 mine points. Step 1: The mine attack strike number is 5 (as the base strike number of 7 - 2 mine points in the hex = 5). Step 2: One die is rolled for each of the naval units in the NG. The die roll for the TF is 4, for no effect (as die roll is less than the mine attack strike number). The die roll for the transport is 6 which means the transport has struck the minefield. Step 3: Rolling another die, a 2, and consulting the Torpedo/Mine Strike Damage Table shows the mine strike inflicts 1 hit of damage on the transport.
-
Laying Mines. Any TF with code "M" on its counter may carry mine points (per naval transport, Rule 31). A type MW taskforce may carry up to 10 mine points, while any other type of code M taskforce may carry up to 2 mine points; halve these amounts if the TF in question is at reduced strength. A TF carrying a mine point can lay the mine point in a hex by spending 5 MPs there (as listed on the Naval MP Cost Summary). Mark the presence of mines in a hex by placing mine markers there. (The numbers on the markers correspond to the number of mine points in the hex.)
-
Sweeping Mines. During the initial phase, the phasing player automatically sweeps all enemy mines in coastal hexes he owns. In addition, he automatically sweeps all enemy mines that are not within 5 hexes of an enemy-owned port, but are within 5 hexes of a friendly-owned port. Finally, all enemy mines in each hex in excess of 2 automatically self-destruct. Simply remove the mine points from the map. During naval movement, a type MW taskforce may sweep enemy mines. The MW TF must first enter the minebelt hex and is checked for mine damage (per above). Once in the minebelt hex, the MW TF may sweep the mines there. For every 30 MPs it spends, one enemy mine point is swept; remove one mine point from the hex. Immediately upon sweeping each mine point, the MW TF is checked for mine damage (per above) if any enemy mine points still remain in the hex. Designers' Note: The provision for mine points in excess of 2 in a hex to self-destruct every turn reflects the fact that it is very hard to maintain high density minefields (wind and wave are constantly breaking mines free of their moorings; and the denser the field, the greater the likelihood of a free mine exploding other, still-moored mines). During the first half of the war, most minefields were small, haphazard affairs. Beginning with late 1916, and accelerating in 1917-18, the Entente systematically laid major mine barrages in the Aegean, Adriatic, and North Seas. Thus, if you want mine fields in the early war period you are mostly going to have to buy them by converting resource points; while in the second half of the war, you'll get a number of mine points directly through the OB.
F. Light Naval Forces.
Due to light naval forces not directly shown in the game (such as submarines and patrol craft), naval units risk damage in certain areas. The Central Powers (CP) danger zone (e.g. the area in which CP naval units risk damage) consists of all hexes within 3 naval MPs of an Entente-owned, non-blockaded, functioning naval base in general supply. The Entente danger zone (e.g. the area in which Entente naval units risk damage) consists of all hexes within 30 naval MPs of a CP-owned, non-blockaded, functioning naval base in general supply. Check a naval group (NG) for contact by enemy light naval forces:
-
The first time it enters or puts to sea in a danger zone during any naval movement step.
-
If it starts a friendly naval movement step at sea in a danger zone. To check for enemy contact, roll a die and consult the Naval Success Table, applying all applicable modifiers:
-
Failure means enemy forces did not contact the NG; the NG may operate for the rest of the naval movement step without risk of damage due to danger zones.
-
Success means enemy forces made contact with the NG. Immediately check for damage to the NG. Use the following procedure to check an NG for damage from light naval forces:
-
Consult the Mine/Light Forces Attack Summary, noting all applicable modifiers, to determine the light forces attack hit number. Note that the modifiers listed under the table modify the hit number, not the die roll to see if you hit.
-
Roll a die. If the number is equal to or greater than the light forces attack hit number determined in step 1, apply one hit of damage to any one naval unit in the NG (choose the naval unit at random). Example: During 1916 and in daylight and rough seas, an Entente NG consisting of one 4pt TF and one C3 transport enters an Entente danger zone. The CP player checks to see if his light forces contact the Entente NG using the Naval Success Table. He rolls a 6, modifies it by -1 to 5 (as the danger zone contact attempt takes place during rough seas), and the NG is contacted. Next, he consults the Mine/Light Forces Attack Summary. The light forces attack hit number is 4 (it normally would be 6 in 1916, but this is modified by -1 as CP light forces are attacking an Entente NG, and a further -1 as the attack occurs during rough seas). The CP player rolls a 6 which results in one naval unit in the NG receiving one hit of damage. The TF is chosen at random to receive this damage. Designers' Note: The majority of the craft making up the danger zones are submarines. The large Entente submarine fleet was predominantly used for port defense and rarely ventured very far asea. The CP sub fleet, on the other hand, was mostly used offensively far from its home bases. In 1914-15 alone, CP submarines sank 3x PD, 1x CD, 4x CA, and 3x CL (11 gunnery strength points) in addition to numerous transport vessels. Entente sub successes during the same period were insignificant. The modifiers for night and rough/stormy seas show that it is both harder to contact enemy forces when these conditions apply and that it is easier to close to effective attack range without discovery if contact is made.
G. Landing Craft Damage.
Landing craft (LC) which disembark cargo with heavy equipment at a beach risk being damaged due to wear and tear from surf and beach conditions. Note that LCs never suffer damage while embarking cargo, or while disembarking cargo without heavy equipment. When an LC disembarks cargo with heavy equipment at a beach, the owning player checks for damage. Roll one die and consult the Naval Success Table, applying all applicable modifiers. Immediately implement the result:
-
Success means the LC disembarked the cargo without incurring damage.
-
Failure means the LC is damaged and cannot be used for naval transport or amphibious landings until repaired. (Use an "LC Damage" marker to note this.) Damaged LC may be repaired. During a player’s initial phase, roll a die for each damaged LC: it is repaired on a roll of 1 or 2. LC may also be repaired through the use of naval repair points (Rule 35D).
H. Taskforces as Naval Transports.
Under limited circumstances, any TF may be as used as a transport. Only cargo without heavy equipment may be carried, and the cargo must both be embarked and disembarked at a port. Exception: Manpower points (only) can be embarked at a beach. Each TF may carry up to 2 REs of cargo (1 RE if the TF is at half or less strength). Naval groups (NGs) containing TFs being used as trans-ports must spend MPs to embark or disembark cargo the same as NGs containing other transports (per Rule 31A). While a TF is carrying cargo (e.g. from the instant an item of cargo completes embarkation onto the TF until the instant all cargo completes disembarkation from the TF), it is restricted:
-
Its gunnery and torpedo strengths are halved for purposes of naval combat.
-
It may not provide naval gunfire support or bombard enemy facilities or units.
I. LC and RT as Ferries.
A landing craft (LC) or river transport (RT) may operate as a ferry, allowing the owning player to:
-
Treat one all-sea, lake, or great river hexside as a major river hexside for supply, ground movement, and ground combat purposes.
-
Treat one major river or narrow strait hexside as a river hexside for supply, ground movement, and ground combat purposes. To serve as a ferry, an LC or RT must start the initial phase at sea; be adjacent (per Rule 27B5) to the all-sea or narrow straits hexside or on the lake, great river, or major river hexside; and may not spend MPs for any purpose that turn. If there is more than one eligible hexside, the player indicates which hexside has the ferry. As long as the LC or RT is present, friendly ground units treat the hexside as a major river or river hexside, as appropriate, for supply, movement, and combat purposes during the turn. Note that this will allow friendly units to retreat across the hexside if required to retreat. If the LC or RT is eliminated for any reason, the player immediately loses its ferrying services. As a ferry must logically move back and forth between the two hexes adjoining the ferry hexside if it is to ferry anything across the hexside, an LC/RT operating as a ferry may be considered to start each naval movement step in either hex adjacent to the ferry hexside (enemy player's choice of hex each step) for purposes of naval patrol bombing missions (Rule 20G2h), initiation of naval combat (Rule 28C), mine attacks (rule 34E), and light forces attacks (Rule 34F).
J. Combat Naval Forces.
-
Permanent Losses. If a type BB, BC, PD, CA, or MT taskforce (TF) receives sufficient damage, it suffers permanent losses (representing the loss or writing off of ships that cannot be replaced in the timeframe of the game). When such a TF receives hits of damage that equal or exceed half its printed defense strength, the TF suffers permanent losses. Flip its counter to its reverse, half strength side and adjust the hits on it to reflect its current defense strength. The TF cannot be repaired or replaced above its half strength side for the rest of the game. Example: A type PD TF with a printed defense strength of 12 already has 5 hits of damage when it enters naval combat. In the combat, it receives 2 further hits of damage, for a total of 7, and has a current defense strength of 5. Since its damage exceeds half its printed defense strength, flip its counter to its 6-point half-strength side, and adjust the hits on it so that it remains at a defense strength of 5. The TF cannot be repaired or replaced above its 6-point half strength.
-
Naval Ground Support Supply. For a TF to provide naval gunfire support (NGS) or to bombard enemy units, it must be in naval ground support supply. Note that a TF which is not in naval ground support supply cannot provide NGS or bombard enemy units. A player places his TFs in naval ground support supply by spending resource points. Special: Type GB and MT taskforces are always in naval ground support supply and do not require resource points to be spent for this purpose on their behalf. Immediately after announcement of a bombardment or combat, a player may spend resource points in friendly-owned ports for naval ground support supply. The resource point to be spent must be within 30 naval MPs of the TFs it is to supply. Each resource point spent will pro-vide supply for friendly TFs totaling up to 30 naval gunnery or bombardment strength points (calculated before any modification of the gunnery or bombardment strength due to sea conditions) for that bombardment or combat (only). Example: The CP player announces a combat against a hex. The Entente player has three TFs totaling 43 gunnery strength points that are eligible to provide NGS (e.g. are prepared and within range of the attacked hex). The Entente player spends 1 resource point at a friendly-owned port 26 naval MPs away, and notes, regretfully, that the only other resource point he has in a friendly-owned port is 32 naval MPs away and thus cannot be spent for supply. The one resource point he does spend places 30 of his TFs' 43 gunnery strength points in naval ground support supply. The Entente TFs will, therefore, provide 30 pts of NGS to the combat. Designers' Note: Gunboat and monitor TFs engaged in NGS and bombardment on a routine basis; for other types of TFs to do this was out of the ordinary. The resource point cost not only covers the large ammunition expenditures inherent in these tasks, but encourages players to use their naval units along historical lines.
K. Naval Supply Lines.
A player may not trace a naval sub-element of a supply line (Rule 11B3) from, into, or through any hex or hexside that is:
-
In the combat zone (Rule 28B) of an enemy naval group or CD.
-
Enemy-interdicted (Rule 28, third bulleted section). Any 10 continuous MPs of a naval sub-element of a supply line may be traced at night. Note that night affects combat zones, per Rule 34A2.
L. Water-Only Units.
If a combat or mixed naval group enters a hex or hexside containing a water-only unit, the water-only unit is eliminated. Water-only units (Rule 14B2) may not enter hexes or hexsides in the combat zone of a mixed or combat naval group.
M. Limited Intelligence.
A player may not examine a stack of enemy naval units while they are at sea in an all-sea hex; he may examine them while they are in port or while they are at sea in a coastal hex or on a river hexside. Note that a player can always examine the top naval unit in a stack. A player may not examine the cargo an enemy naval unit is carrying. (Simply stack the cargo under the naval unit and do not allow the enemy player to peek underneath. If there is a stack of naval units in a hex, the enemy player can demand that you spread the naval units out so he can see how many transports there are, but he cannot look under any of them.) Further, a naval unit may carry dummy cargo (use any agreed upon marker for this). Designers' Note: Both sides usually had a pretty fair idea of what was going on with the enemy fleet while the enemy was in port or operating close to land, due to radio intercepts, air recon, and spies outside the naval bases.
Rule 35 — Naval Replacement System
During the course of the game, players may refit naval units, receive naval reinforcements and replacements, and must withdraw and lay up naval units. All naval replacement activities are performed during the player’s initial phase. The orders of battle (OBs) list the naval reinforcements and replacements in the game. The various activities occur as detailed below. Each player follows these procedures separately for each of his nationalities.
A. Refits.
Type CA, CD, BB, BC, and PD naval units (but no others) must refit once each year or suffer penalties. To begin a refit, the TF must begin the player's initial phase in port at a friendlyowned, functioning major naval base usable by the TF to be refitted. (Place a refit marker on the TF to note this.) Two months (4 turns) later, the refit is completed. (Remove the refit marker at this time.) While under refit, the TF may not spend MPs for any purpose, or fire any of its strengths (except AA). A player may voluntarily remove the TF from the refit process before completion of the two-month period. Such a TF is not refitted, however. A TF may be refitted at the same time it is repaired (see Rule 35D). Check the refit status of all TFs during the initial phase of the Jan I turn of each calendar year. Mark TFs that did not refit during the previous calendar year with a "no refit" marker. If the TF already has a "no-refit" marker on it, place a 1-point status marker under the "no refit" marker. Note: 1) At the beginning of each game, all TFs are considered to have refitted for the current calendar year if the scenario starts on or after Jun I; 2) TFs which enter play as reinforcements on or after the Jun I turn of a year are considered to have refitted for that calendar year prior to their entry. TFs that are in need of refit (as indicated by no refit markers) may not be able to leave port. Roll one die each time such a TF attempts to leave port, modifying the die roll by +1 for each 1point status marker under the no refit marker. If the modified die roll is 6 or greater, the TF has broken down and must remain in port; the TF may not attempt to leave port again during the same game turn. Additionally, if the modified die roll is 7 or greater, the TF has suffered major mechanical damage and immediately receives 1 hit of damage. Each refit period a TF completes removes one 1-point status marker from under the no refit marker (or removes the no refit marker is there are no hit markers under it).
B. Withdrawals and Lay Ups.
The OBs require certain naval units to withdrawn from play or to be laid up in a decommissioned status at various times. Any naval unit of the indicated nationality and naval unit type may be withdrawn or laid up. The strength of the naval unit to be withdrawn or laid up must be equal to or greater than that specified in the OB; but if none such is available, any naval unit of the indicated nationality and naval unit type may be withdrawn or laid up instead. If a naval unit with a strength less than that specified is withdrawn or laid up, the player forfeits NRPs (if the naval unit is withdrawn) or manpower points (if the naval unit is laid up) equal to the difference in strength between the specified TF and that actually withdrawn or laid up. Simply remove a withdrawn naval unit from the map; it is out of play and may not return to play unless called for in the OB. Remove a laid up naval unit from the map and place it in the Laid Up Warships Box on the appropriate Game Chart; it is out of play unless (and until) the player recommissions the naval unit per below. If no naval unit in play can be withdrawn, then an eliminated naval unit is removed from the replacement pool, and the player forfeits NRPs equal to the naval unit's replacement cost. If no naval unit in play can be laid up, then the player instead forfeits 1 manpower point for each strength point in the naval unit specified as laying up. If a player must forfeit NRPs or manpower points and does not have sufficient number to meet this cost, then the player maintains a deficit until he has NRPs (or manpower points). (NRPs are covered in Rule 35D; manpower points are covered in Rule 16.) Example #1: The German 6pt TF PD-1 is specified as withdrawing. Any German type PD TF with a current strength of 6 or more may be withdrawn. Failing that, any German type PD TF with a strength of 1 to 5 may be withdrawn, with the player then forfeiting NRPs equal to the difference in strength between the specified TF and the one actually withdrawn. Failing that, any German type PD TF in the replacement pool may be withdrawn with the player forfeiting 6 NRPs. Example #2: The British 8pt TF PD-1 is specified as laying up. Any British type PD TF with a current strength of 8 or more may be laid up. (It would be placed in the Laid Up Warships Box on the British Isles Game Chart.) Failing that, any British type PD TF with a strength 1 to 7 may be laid up, with the player then forfeiting British manpower pts equal to the difference in strength between the specified TF and the one actually laid up. Failing that, any British type PD TF in the replacement pool may be withdrawn with the player forfeiting 8 British manpower pts.
- Recommissiong Laid-Up Warships. Laid-up warships may be recommissioned (returned to play) using the following procedure:
-
Spend 1 manpower point (Man Pt) per strength point in the naval unit (current, not printed strength) to be recommissioned. The Man Pts must be of the same faction as the naval unit.
-
12 turns later, remove the naval unit from the "Laid Up Warships" box and receive it as a reinforcement at any friendly-owned port in the naval unit's home country. Designers' Note: The regular reinforcements section of the various OBs track the historical decommissioning (laying up) of warships. Laid up naval units are merely mothballed, their armament is still intact and given a new crew they could become operational again. Naval units which were disarmed historically are not shown as laying up in the OB, but withdraw instead (or convert into something else, such as heavy siege guns). Laying up the ships is not under player control, as the trained naval ratings from the laid up ships go to man new naval units appearing in the game or to man naval units fighting the abstracted submarine war. Players may recommission laid up ships, however, if they wish to pay a premium in manpower points.
C. Reinforcements.
Players receive naval reinforcements during the game. A player places his reinforcements on the map during his initial phase, at the location specified in his OB. If the indicated location is enemy-owned at the time the reinforcement is to be received, it is eliminated instead. When naval strength points are received, make a paper note of their location. If their indicated parent naval unit moves to that location, add the naval strength points to the parent naval unit. Note that these naval strength points may be added to the naval unit even if the naval unit is at its reduced strength side (this is an exception to Rule 34J1). Example: The Italian player receives 5 Hv Naval Strength Pts (BB-2) at Castellamare di Stabia (GW3:4715). If the Italian BB-2 naval unit moves to hex GW3:4715, the BB-2 naval unit would immediately have its strength increased by 5 points.
D. Replacements.
-
Naval Repair Point (NRP) Production. Players receive NRPs in the initial phase at the start of each production cycle. (The production cycle is covered in Rule 38.) A player receives 1/2 NRP for each friendly-owned, functioning major naval base in commands under his control. (Naval bases are covered in Rule 34B.) Note that a major naval base may have its NRP production reduced to zero under some circumstances (as listed in the appropriate nation-specific section of Rule 41). Example: An Entente player controlling the West (France/West Germany) and West (British Isles) commands in 1916 would receive a maximum of 2 British and 1 French NRPs each production cycle, assuming that his major naval bases at Toulon and Brest (France) and Scapa Flow, Rossyth, Portsmouth, and Plymouth (Britain) were are all friendly-owned and functioning. However, as the French major city of Lille is enemy-owned (Lille is the center of French naval armaments production as noted in the French nation-specific rules) French major naval base NRP production is reduced to zero. Thus the Entente player receives 2 British NRPs only.
-
Spending Equipment Points (Equ Pts) to buy additional NRPs. During the initial phase at the start of each production cycle, a player may spend a limited number of his Equ Pts to buy additional NRPs. The Equ Pts to be spent must be in a hex containing a friendly-owned, functioning major naval base. For every 2 Equ Pts spent at such a base (and a maximum of 2 Equ Pts may be spent for this purpose at each base), the player receives 1/2 NRP three months (six turns) later at that base. (Keep a paper record of when and where these NRPs will appear.)
-
Using NRPs to Repair/Replace Naval Units. During his initial phase, a player may spend his NRPs to repair hits of damage from naval units, to repair damaged landing craft, and to replace eliminated naval units. A player may accumulate NRPs for use in later turns. A player spends NRPs as follows:
-
2 NRPs repair one hit of damage on a type BB, BC, PD, CA, CD, or MT taskforce. To be repaired, the TF must spend 4 complete turns in port at a friendly-owned functioning major naval base usable by the taskforce; it may not spend MPs for any purpose or fire any of its strengths (except AA) during the turns while it is under repair.
-
1 NRP repairs one hit of damage on a transport or type CL, C, CS, CV, DD, GB, MW, or TB taskforce. To be repaired, the naval unit must be in port at a friendlyowned functioning naval base (major or minor); it may not spend MPs for any purpose or fire any of its strengths (except AA) in the player turn it is repaired.
-
0.5 NRP repairs one damaged LC. The LC need not be in port; and it is fully operational in the player turn it is repaired.
-
1 NRP replaces one strength point of a sunken transport or type CL, C, CS, CV, DD, GB, MW, or TB taskforce. (Note: sunken type BB, BC, PD, CA, CD, and MT taskforces may not be replaced.) Upon replacement, place the naval unit at any friendly-owned functioning naval base in the command in which it was sunk. It is fully operational upon replacement. Mark the replaced unit with hit markers as necessary to show as yet unreplaced/unrepaired strength points. Example: A 3point NT is in the replacement pool, and 2 naval repair points are spent. The NT is replaced at a strength of 2; place the 3-point NT, marked with one hit, at a friendlyowned functioning naval base.